Skip to main content

Full text of "Flight without formulae; simple discussions on the mechanics of the aeroplane"

See other formats


THE  LIBRARY 

OF 

THE  UNIVERSITY 
OF  CALIFORNIA 

LOS  ANGELES 


FLIGHT    WITHOUT    FORMULA 


THE  MECHANICS  OF  THE  AERO- 
PLANE. A  Study  of  the  Principles  of 
Flight.  By  COMMANDANT  DUCHENE. 
Translated  from  the  French  by  JOHN  H. 
LEDEBOER,  B.A.,  andT.  O'B.  HUBBARD. 
With  98  Illustrations  and  Diagrams. 
8vo.  8s.  net. 


FLYING  :  Some  Practical  Experiences. 
By  GUSTAV  HAMEL  and  CHARLES  C. 
TURNER.  With  72  Illustrations.  8vo. 
I2s.  6d.  net. 

LONGMANS,  GREEN,  AND  CO., 

LONDON,  NEW  YORK,  BOMBAY.CALCUTTA,  MADRAS 


FLIGHT  WITHOUT 
FORMULA 

SIMPLE     DISCUSSIONS      ON      THE 
MECHANICS  OF  THE  AEROPLANE 


BY 

COMMANDANT  DUCHENE 


OF   THE   FRENCH   GENIE 


TRANSLATED  FROM  THE  FRENCH  BY 

JOHN    H.   LEDEBOER,   B.A. 

ASSOCIATE  FELLOW,  AERONAUTICAL  SOCIETY;  EDITOR 
"AERONAUTICS";  JOINT- AUTHOR  OF  "THE  AEROPLANE" 
TRANSLATOR  OF  "  THE  MECHANICS  OF  THE  AEROPLANE" 


SECOND  EDITION 


LONGMANS,  GREEN,  AND  CO. 

39    PATERNOSTER    ROW,    LONDON 

FOURTH    AVENUE  &  30™   STREET,    NEW  YORK 

BOMBAY,  CALCUTTA,   AND  MADRAS 

1916 

All  rights  reserved 


First  Published    .         .     July  1914 
Type  Reset  .         .     October  1916 


TL 

S" 

JD 


I  (> 


TRANSLATOR'S  PREFACE 


and  equations  are  necessary  evils  ;  they  repre- 
sent, as  it  were,  the  shorthand  of  the  mathematician  and  the 
engineer,  forming  as  they  do  the  simplest  and  most  con- 
venient method  of  expressing  certain  relations  between 
facts  and  phenomena  which  appear  complicated  when 
dressed  in  everyday  garb.  Nevertheless,  it  is  to  be  feared 
that  their  very  appearance  is  forbidding  and  strikes  terror 
to  the  hearts  of  many  readers  not  possessed  of  a  mathematical 
turn  of  mind.  However  baseless  this  prejudice  may  be  — 
as  indeed  it  is  —  the  fact  remains  that  it  exists,  and  has  hi 
the  past  deterred  many  from  the  study  of  the  principles  of 
the  aeroplane,  which  is  playing  a  part  of  ever  -increasing 
importance  in  the  life  of  the  community. 

The  present  work  forms  an  attempt  to  cater  for  this  class 
of  reader.  It  has  throughout  been  written  in  the  simplest 
possible  language,  and  contains  in  its  whole  extent  not  a 
single  formula.  It  treats  of  every  one  of  the  principles  of 
flight  and  of  every  one  of  the  problems  involved  in  the 
mechanics  of  the  aeroplane,  and  this  without  demanding 
from  the  reader  more  than  the  most  elementary  knowledge 
of  arithmetic.  The  chapters  on  stability  should  prove  of 
particular  interest  to  the  pilot  and  the  student,  containing 
as  they  do  several  new  theories  of  the  highest  importance 
here  fully  set  out  for  the  first  time. 

In  conclusion,  I  have  to  thank  Lieutenant  T.  O'B. 
Hubbard,  my  collaborator  for  many  years,  for  his  kind  and 
diligent  perusal  of  the  proofs  and  for  many  helpful 
suggestions. 

J.  H.  L. 


968209 


CONTENTS 

CHAPTER  I 


PAGE 

FLIGHT    IN    STILL   AIR — SPEED  1 


CHAPTER  II 

PLIGHT    IN    STILL   AIR — POWER 16 

CHAPTER  III 
PLIGHT  IN  STILL  AIR — POWER  (concluded)      ....       35 

CHAPTER  IV 

FLIGHT    IN   STILL   AIR — THE    POWER-PLANT         .  .  .  .         53 

CHAPTER  V 

FLIGHT    IN    STILL   AIR — THE    POWER-PLANT    (concluded)      .  .          70 

CHAPTER  VI 

STABILITY    IN    STILL   AIR — LONGITUDINAL    STABILITY       .    .  .          90 

CHAPTER  VII 

STABILITY     IN      STILL     AIR — LONGITUDINAL     STABILITY      (cotl- 

cluded)         .....         .         .         .         .       115 

CHAPTER  VIII 

STABILITY    IN    STILL   AIR — LATERAL   STABILITY  .  .  .142 

CHAPTER  IX 

STABILITY     IN      STILL     AIR LATERAL     STABILITY     (concluded) 

DIRECTIONAL   STABILITY,    TURNING   .  .  .  .  .       161 

CHAPTER  X 

THE    EFFECT    OF    WIND   ON    AEROPLANES    .  .  .  .  183 


Flight  without  Formulae 

Simple  Discussions  on  the  Mechanics 
of  the  Aeroplane 


CHAPTER  I 
FLIGHT  IN  STILL  AIR 

SPEED 

NOWADAYS  everyone  understands  something  of  the  main 
principles  of  aeroplane  flight.  It  may  be  demonstrated 
in  the  simplest  possible  way  by  plunging  the  hand  in 
water  and  trying  to  move  it  at  some  speed  horizontally, 
after  first  slightly  inclining  the  palm,  so  as  to  meet  or 
"  attack  "  the  fluid  at  a  small  "  angle  of  incidence."  It 
will  be  noticed  at  once  that,  although  the  hand  remains 
very  nearly  horizontal,  and  though  it  is  moved  horizon- 
tally, the  water  exerts  upon  it  a  certain  amount  of  pressure 
directed  nearly  vertically  upwards  and  tending  to  lift  the 
hand. 

This,  in  effect,  is  the  principle  underlying  the  flight  of 
an  aeroplane,  which  consists  in  drawing  through  the  air 
wings  or  planes  in  a  position  nearly  horizontal,  and  thus 
employing,  for  sustaining  the  weight  of  the  whole  machine, 
the  vertically  upward  pressure  exerted  by  the  air  on  these 
wings,  a  pressure  which  is  caused  by  the  very  forward 
movement  of  the  wings. 

Hence,  the  sustentation  and  the  forward  movement  of 
an  aeroplane  are  absolutely  interdependent,  and  the  former 

1 


2  FLIGHT  WITHOUT  FORMULAS 

can  only  be  produced,  in  still  air,  by  the  latter,  out  of  which 
it  arises. 

But  the  entire  problem  of  aeroplane  flight  is  not  solved 
merely  by  obtaining  from  the  "  relative  "  air  current  which 
meets  the  wings,  owing  to  their  forward  speed,  sufficient 
lift  to  sustain  the  weight  of  the  machine  ;  an  aeroplane, 
in  addition,  must  always  encounter  the  relative  air  current 
in  the  same  attitude,  and  must  neither  upset  nor  be  thrown 
out  of  its  path  by  even  a  slight  aerial  disturbance.  In 
other  words,  it  is  essential  for  an  aeroplane  to  remain  in 
equilibrium — more,  in  stable  equilibrium. 

This  consideration  clearly  divides  the  study  of  aeroplane 
flight  in  calm  air  into  two  broad,  natural  parts  : 

The  study  of  lift  and  the  study  of  stability. 

These  two  aspects  will  be  dealt  with  successively,  and 
will  be  followed  by  a  consideration  of  flight  in  disturbed  air. 

First  we  will  proceed  to  examine  the  lift  of  an  aeroplane 
in  still  air. 

Following  the  example  of  a  bird,  and  in  accordance  with 
the  results  obtained  by  experiments  with  models,  the  wings 
of  an  aeroplane  are  given  a  span  five  or  six  times  greater 
than  then1  fore-and-aft  dimension,  or  "  chord,"  while  they 
are  also  curved,  so  that  their  lower  surface  is  concave.*  It 
is  desirable  to  give  the  wings  a  large  span  as  compared 
to  the  chord,  in  order  to  reduce  as  far  as  possible  the 
escape  or  leakage  of  the  air  along  the  sides  ;  while  it 
has  the  further  advantage  of  playing  an  important  part 
in  stability.  Again,  the  camber  of  the  wings  increases  their 
lift  and  at  the  same  time  reduces  their  head-resistance  or 
"  drag." 

The  angle  of  incidence  of  a  wing  or  plane  is  the  anerle. 

*  In  English  this  curvature  of  the  wing  is  generally  known  as  the 
"  camber."  On  the  whole,  it  would  perhaps  be  more  accurate  to  describe 
the  upper  surface  as  being  convex,  since  highly  efficient  wings  have  been 
designed  in  which  the  camber  is  confined  to  the  upper  surface,  the  lower 
surface  being  perfectly  flat. — TRANSLATOR. 


FLIGHT  IN  STILL  AIR  3 

expressed  in  degrees,  made  by  the  chord  of  the  curve  in 
profile  with  the  direction  of  the  aeroplane's  flight. 

As  stated  above,  the  pressure  of  the  air  on  a  wing  mov- 
ing horizontally  is  nearly  vertical,  but  only  nearly.  For, 
though  it  lifts,  a  wing  at  the  same  time  offers  a  certain 
amount  of  resistance — known  either  as  head-resistance  or 
drag  * — which  may  well  be  described  as  the  price  paid  for 
the  lift. 

As  the  result  of  the  research  work  of  several  scientists, 
and  of  M.  Eiffel  in  particular,  with  scale  models,  unit  figures, 
or  "  coefficients,"  have  been  determined  which  enable  us  to 
calculate  the  amount  of  lift  possessed  by  a  given  surface 
and  its  drag,  when  moving  through  the  air  at  certain  angles 
and  at  certain  speeds. 

Hereafter  the  coefficient  which  serves  to  calculate  the 
lifting-power  of  a  plane  will  be  simply  termed  the  lift, 
while  that  whereon  the  calculation  of  its  drag  is  based  will 
be  known  as  the  drag. 

M.  Eiffel  has  plotted  the  results  of  his  experiments  in 
diagrams  or  curves,  which  give,  for  each  type  of  wing,  the 
values  of  the  lift  and  drag  corresponding  to  the  various 
angles  of  incidence. 

The  following  curves  are  here  reproduced  from  M.  Eiffel's 
work,  and  relate  to  : 

A  flat  plane  (fig.  1). 

A  slightly  cambered  plane,  a  type  used  by  Maurice 

Farman  (fig.  2). 
A    plane    of    medium   camber,    adopted    by   Breguet 

(fig.  3). 

A   deeply   cambered    plane,   used    by    Bleriot    on    his 
No.  XI.  monoplanes,  cross-Channel  type  (fig.  4). 

*  The  word  "  drag  "  is  here  adopted,  in  accordance  with  Mr  Archibald 
Low's  suggestion,  in  preference  to  the  more  usual  "  drift,"  in  order  to 
prevent  confusion,  and  so  as  to  preserve  for  the  latter  term  its  more 
general,  and  certainly  more  appropriate  meaning,  illustrated  in  the  ex- 
pression "  the  drift  of  an  aeroplane  from  its  course  in  a  side-wind,"  or 
"  drifting  before  a  current." — TRANSLATOR. 


4  FLIGHT  WITHOUT  FORMULA 

These    diagrams    are    so    simple    as    to    render    further 
explanation  superfluous. 


.0.00. 


0.02  001  000 

Drag.  Drag. 

FIG.  1. — Flat  plane.  FIG.  2.— Maurice  Farman  plane. 

The  calculation  of  the  lifting-power  and  the  head-resist- 
ance produced  by  a  given  type  of  plane,  moving  through 


FLIGHT  IN  STILL  AIR 


the  air  at  a  given  angle  of  incidence  and  at  a  given  speed, 
is  exceedingly  simple.     To  obtain  the  desired  result  all  that 


J0.08 


0.00 


0.00 


0.02  0:01 

Drag. 

FIG.  3.— Br6guet  plane. 


O.QO 


0  02  0.01  0.00 

Drag. 
FIG.  4.— Bleriot  XI.  plane. 


is  needed  is  to  multiply  either  the  lift  or  the  drag    co- 
efficients, corresponding  to  the  particular  angle  of  incidence, 


6  FLIGHT  WITHOUT  FORMULA 

by  the  area  of  the  plane  (hi  square  metres,  or,  if  English 
measurements  are  adopted,  hi  square  feet)  and  by  the  square 
of  the  speed,  hi  metres  per  second  (or  miles  per  hour).* 

EXAMPLE. — A  Bleriot  monoplane,  type  No.  XI.,  has  an 
area  of  15  sq.  m.,  and  flies  at  20  m,  per  second  at  an  angle 
of  incidence  of  7°.  (1)  What  weight  can  its  wings  lift,  and 
(2)  what  is  the  power  required  to  propel  the  machine  ? 

Referring  to  the  curve  in  fig.  4,  the  lift  of  this  particular 
type  of  wing  at  an  angle  of  7°  is  0-05,  and  its  drag  0-0055. 

Hence 

T  -f.  .  Square  of 

Lift.  Area.  the  Speed. 

0-05      x         15          x      400 

gives  the  required  value  of  the  lifting-power,  i.e.  300  kg. 
Again 

Drag.  Are,  *£™£ 

0-0055      x       15          x       400 
gives  the  value  of  the  resistance  of  the  wings,  i.e.  33  kg. 

Let  us  for  the  present  only  consider  the  question  of  lift, 
leaving  that  of  drag  on  one  side. 

From  the  method  of  calculation  shown  above  we  may 
immediately  proceed  to  draw  some  highly  important  de- 
ductions regarding  the  speed  of  an  aeroplane.  The  fore- 
and-aft  equilibrium  of  an  aeroplane,  hi  fact,  as  will  be 
shown  subsequently,  is  so  adjusted  that  the  aeroplane  can 
only  fly  at  one  fixed  angle  of  incidence,  so  long  as  the 
elevator  or  stabiliser  remains  untouched.  By  means  of  the 
elevator,  however,  the  angle  of  incidence  can  be  varied 
within  certain  limits. 

In  the  previous  example,  let  the  Bleriot  monoplane  be 
taken  to  have  been  designed  to  fly  at  7°.  It  has  already 
been  shown  that  this  machine,  with  its  area  of  15  sq.  m. 
and  its  speed  of  72  km.  per  hour,  will  give  a  lifting-power 
equal  to  300  kg.  Now,  if  this  lifting-power  be  greater  than 

*  Throughout  this  work  the  metric  system  will  henceforward  be 
strictly  adhered  to. — TRANSLATOR. 


FLIGHT   IN  STILL  AIR  7 

the  weight  of  the  machine,  the  latter  will  tend  to  rise  ;  if  the 
weight  be  less,  it  will  tend  to  descend.  Perfectly  horizontal 
flight  at  a  speed  of  72  km.  per  hour  is  only  possible  if  the 
aeroplane  weighs  just  300  kg. 

In  other  words,  an  aeroplane  of  a  given  weight  and  a 
given  plane-area  can  only  fly  horizontally  at  a  given  angle 
of  incidence  at  one  single  speed,  which  must  be  that  at 
which  the  lifting-power  it  produces  is  precisely  equal  to 
the  weight  of  the  aeroplane. 

Now  it  has  already  been  shown  that  the  lifting-power 
for  a  given  angle  of  incidence  is  obtained  by  multiplying 
the  lift  coefficient  corresponding  to  this  angle  by  the  plane 
area  and  by  the  square  of  the  speed.  This,  therefore,  must 
also  give  us  the  weight  of  the  aeroplane.  It  is  clear  that 
this  is  only  possible  for  one  definite  speed,  i.e.  when  the 
square  of  the  speed  is  equal  to  the  weight,  divided  by  the 
area  multiplied  by  the  inverse  of  the  lift.  And  since  the 
weight  of  the  aeroplane  divided  by  its  area  gives  the  load- 
ing on  the  planes  per  sq.  m.,  the  following  most  important 
and  practical  rule  may  be  laid  down  : 

The  speed  (in  metres  per  second)  of  an  aeroplane,  flying 
at  a  given  angle  of  incidence,  is  obtained  by  multiplying 
the  square  root  of  its  loading  (in  kg.  per  sq.  in.}  by  the  square 
root  of  the  inverse  of  the  lift  corresponding  to  the  given 
angle. 

At  first  sight  the  rule  may  appear  complicated.  Actually 
it  is  exceedingly  simple  when  applied. 

EXAMPLE. — A  Breguet  aeroplane,  with  an  area  of  30  sq.  m. 
and  weighing  600  kg.,  flies  with  a  lift  of  0-04,  equivalent 
(according  to  the  curve  in  fig.  3)  to  an  angle  of  incidence 
of  about  4°.  What  is  its  speed  ? 

600 
The  loading  is  ——=20  kg.  per  sq.  m. 


Square  root  of  the  loading— 4 '47. 

Inverse  of  the  lift  is  —=25. 
0-04 

Square  root  of  inverse  of  the  lift =5. 


FLIGHT  WITHOUT  FORMULA 


The  speed  required,  therefore,  in  metres  per  second— 4-47 
X  5=22- 3  m.  per  second,  or  about  80  km.  per  hour.  But 
if  a  different  angle  of  incidence,  or  a  different  figure  for 
the  lift — which  is  equivalent,  and,  as  will  be  seen  here- 
after, more  usual — be  taken,  a  different  speed  will  be 
obtained. 

Hence  each  angle  of  incidence  has  its  own  definite  speed. 

For  instance,  if  we  take  the  Breguet  aeroplane  already 
considered,  and  calculate  its  speed  for  a  whole  series  of 
angles  of  incidence,  we  obtain  the  results  shown  in  Table  I. 
But  before  examining  these  results  in  greater  detail,  so  far 
as  the  relation  between  the  angles  of  incidence,  or  the  lift, 
and  the  speed  is  concerned,  a  few  preliminary  observations 
may  be  useful. 

TABLE  I. 


'Speed. 

In  m.p.s. 

In  km.p.h. 

Lift. 

Correspond- 
ing Angle  of 
Incidence. 

!     Square 
Inverse  of  i     Root  of 
Lift.       ;  Inverse  of 
Lift. 

~*  >j~o  50 

10  >» 
|1^   . 

J'ilfcr 

lit" 

:(?  S  3  "8 

|*a 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

0-020 

0°  (about) 

50 

7-07 

31-6 

113-6 

0-030 

2°       ,, 

33-3             577 

25-8 

92-8 

0-040 

4°       ,, 

25 

5-00 

22-3 

80-3 

0-050 

64°     „ 

20 

4-47 

20-0 

72-0 

0-060 

10°      ,, 

16-6              4-08 

18-2 

65-6 

0-066 

15°      ,, 

15-2 

3-90 

17-4 

62-6 

In  the  first  place,  it  should  be  noted  that  when  the 
Breguet  whig  has  no  angle  of  incidence,  when,  that  is,  the 
wind  meets  it  parallel  to  the  chord,  it  still  has  a  certain 
lift.  This  constitutes  one  of  the  interesting  properties  of 


FLIGHT  IN  STILL  AIR  9 

a  cambered  plane.  While  a  flat  plane  meeting  the  air 
edge-on  has  no  lift  whatever,  as  is  evident,  a  cambered 
plane  striking  the  air  in  a  direction  parallel  to  its  chord 
still  retains  a  certain  lifting-power  which  varies  according 
to  the  plane  section. 

Thus,  in  those  conditions  a  Breguet  wing  still  has  a  lift  of 
0-019,  and  if  figs.  4  and  2  are  examined  it  will  be  seen  that 
at  zero  incidence  the  Bleriot  No.  XI.  would  similarly  have 
a  lift  of  0-012,  but  the  Maurice  Farman  of  only  0-006.  It 
follows  that  a  cambered  plane  exerts  no  lift  whatever  only 
when  the  wind  strikes  it  slightly  on  the  upper  surface.  In 
other  words,  by  virtue  of  this  property,  a  cambered  plane 
may  be  regarded  as  possessing  an  imaginary  chord — if  the 
expression  be  allowed — inclined  at  a  negative  angle  (that  is, 
in  the  direction  opposed  to  the  ordinary  angle  of  incidence) 
to  the  chord  of  the  profile  of  the  plane  viewed  in  section. 

If  the  necessary  experiments  were  made  and  the  curves 
on  the  diagrams  were  continued  to  the  horizontal  axis,  it 
would  be  found  that  the  angle  between  this  "  imaginary 
chord  "  and  the  actual  chord  is,  for  the  Maurice  Farman 
plane  section  about  1°,  for  that  of  the  Bleriot  XI.  some  2°, 
and  for  that  of  the  Breguet  4°. 

Let  it  be  noted  in  passing  that  in  the  case  of  nearly 
every  plane  section  a  variation  of  1°  in  the  angle  of  incidence 
is  roughly  equivalent  to  a  variation  in  lift  of  0-005,  at  any 
rate  for  the  smaller  angles.  One  may  therefore  generalise 
and  say  that  for  any  ordinary  plane  section  a  lift  of  0-015 
corresponds  to  an  angle  of  incidence  of  3°  relatively  to  the 
"  imaginary  chord,"  a  lift  of  0-020  to  an  angle  of  4°,  a  lift 
of  0-025  to  5°,  and  so  forth. 

Turning  now  to  the  upper  portion  of  the  curves  in  the 
diagrams,  it  will  be  seen  that,  beginning  with  a  definite 
angle  of  incidence,  usually  in  the  neighbourhood  of  15°,  the 
lift  of  a  plane  no  longer  increases.  The  curves  relating  to 
the  Breguet  and  the  Bleriot  cease  at  15°,  but  the  Maurice 
Farman  curve  clearly  shows  that  for  angles  of  incidence 
greater  than  15°  the  lift  gradually  diminishes.  Such  coarse 


10  FLIGHT  WITHOUT  FORMULA 

angles,  however,  are  never  used  in  practice,  for  a  reason 
shown  in  the  diagrams,  which  is  the  excessive  increase  in 
the  drag  when  the  angle  of  incidence  is  greater  than  10°. 
In  aviation  the  angles  of  incidence  that  are  employed  there- 
fore only  vary  within  narrow  limits,  the  variation  certainly 
not  surpassing  10°. 

We  may  now  return  to  the  main  object  for  which  Table  I. 
was  compiled,  namely,  the  variation  in  the  speed  of  an 
aeroplane  according  to  the  angle  of  incidence  of  its  planes. 

First,  it  is  seen  that  speed  and  angle  of  incidence  vary 
inversely,  which  is  obvious  enough  when  it  is  remembered 
that  in  order  to  support  its  own  weight,  which  necessarily 
remains  constant,  an  aeroplane  must  fly  the  faster  the 
smaller  the  angle  at  which  its  planes  meet  the  air. 

Secondly,  it  will  be  seen  that  the  variation  in  speed  is 
more  pronounced  for  the  smaller  angles  of  incidence  ;  hence, 
by  utilising  a  small  lift  coefficient  great  speeds  can  be 
attained.  Thus,  for  a  lift  equal  to  0-02,  at  which  the 
Breguet  wing  would  meet  the  air  along  its  geometrical 
chord,  the  speed  of  the  aeroplane,  according  to  Table  I., 
would  exceed  113  km.  an  hour. 

If  an  aeroplane  could  fly  with  a  lift  coefficient  of  O'Ol, 
that  is,  if  the  planes  met  the  air  with  their  upper  surface — 
the  imaginary  chord  would  then  have  an  angle  of  incidence 
of  no  more  than  2° — the  same  method  of  calculation  would 
give  a  speed  of  over  160  km.  per  hour. 

The  chief  reason  which  in  practice  places  a  limit  on  the 
reduction  of  the  lift  is,  as  will  be  shown  subsequently,  the 
rapid  increase  in  the  motive -power  required  to  obtain  high 
speeds  with  small  angles  of  incidence.  And  further,  there 
is  a  considerable  element  of  danger  in  unduly  small  angles. 
For  instance,  if  an  aeroplane  were  to  fly  with  a  lift  of  O'Ol 
— so  that  the  imaginary  chord  met  the  air  at  an  angle  of 
only  2° — a  slight  longitudinal  oscillation,  only  just  exceeding 
this  very  small  angle,  would  be  enough  to  convert  the  fierce 
air  current  striking  the  aeroplane  moving  at  an  enormous 
speed  from  a  lifting  force  into  one  provoking  a  fall.  It  is 


FLIGHT  IN  STILL  AIR  11 

true  that  the  machine  would  for  an  instant  preserve  its 
speed  owing  to  inertia,  but  the  least  that  could  happen 
would  be  a  violent  dive,  which  could  only  end  in  disaster 
if  the  machine  was  flying  near  the  ground. 

Nevertheless  there  are  certain  pilots,  to  whom  the  word 
intrepid  may  be  justly  applied,  who  deny  the  danger  and 
argue  that  the  disturbing  oscillation  is  the  less  likely  to 
occur  the  smaller  the  angle  of  incidence,  for  it  is  true,  as 
will  be  seen  hereafter,  that  a  small  angle  of  incidence  is  an 
important  condition  of  stability.  However  this  may  be, 
there  can  be  no  question  but  that  flying  at  a  very  small 
angle  of  incidence  may  set  up  excessive  strains  in  the  frame- 
work, which,  in  consequence,  would  have  to  be  given 
enormous  strength .  Thus ,  if  it  were  possible  for  an  aeroplane 
to  fly  with  a  lift  coefficient  of  0-01,  and  if,  owing  to  a  wind 
gust  or  to  a  manoeuvre  corresponding  to  the  sudden  "  flatten- 
ing out  "  practised  by  birds  of  prey  and  by  aviators  at  the 
conclusion  of  a  dive,  the  plane  suddenly  met  the  air  at  an 
angle  of  incidence  at  which  the  lift  reaches  a  maximum — 
that  is,  from  0-06  to  0-07  according  to  the  type  of  plane — 
the  machine  would  have  to  support,  the  speed  remaining 
constant  for  the  time  being  by  reason  of  inertia,  a  pressure 
six  or  seven  times  greater  than  that  encountered  in  normal 
flight,  or  than  its  own  weight. 

In  practice,  therefore,  various  considerations  place  a  limit 
on  the  decrease  of  the  angle  of  incidence,  and  it  would 
accordingly  appear  doubtful  whether  hitherto  an  aeroplane 
has  flown  with  a  lift  coefficient  smaller  than  0-02.* 

It  is  easy  enough  to  find  out  the  value  of  the  lift  co- 
efficient at  which  exceptionally  high  speeds  have  been 
attained  from  a  few  known  particulars  relating  to  the 
machine  in  question.  The  particulars  required  are  : 

The  velocity  of  the  aeroplane,  which  must  have  been 
carefully  timed  and  corrected  for  the  speed  of  the  wind  ; 

The  total  weight  of  the  aeroplane  fully  loaded  ; 

The  supporting  area. 

*  See  footnote  on  p.  12. 


12  FLIGHT  WITHOUT  FORMULA 

The  lift  may  then  be  found  by  dividing  the  loading  of 
the  planes  by  the  square  of  the  speed  in  metres  per  second. 

EXAMPLE. — An  aeroplane  with  a  plane  area  of  12  sq.  m. 
and  weighing,  fully  loaded,  360  kg.  has  flown  at  a  speed  of 
130  km.  or  36-1  m.  per  second.  What  was  its  lift  coefficient  ? 

O  f*(\ 

The  loading= =  30  kg.  per  sq.  m. 

12 

Square  of  the  speed=1300. 

Ofi 

Required  lift=-?"-  =about  0-023.* 

Table  I.  further  shows  that  when  the  angle  of  incidence 
reaches  the  neighbourhood  of  15°  (which  cannot,  as  has 
been  seen,  be  employed  in  practical  flight)  the  lift  reaches 
its  maximum  value,  and  the  speed  consequently  its  minimum. 

*  At  the  time  of  writing  (August  1913)  the  speed  record,  171 '7  km. 
per  hour  or  47'6  m.  per  second,  is  held  by  the  Deperdussin  monocoque 
with  a  140-h.p.  motor,  weighing  525  kg.  with  full  load,  and  with  a  plane 
area  of  about  12  sq.  m.  (loading,  43'7  kg.  per  sq.  m.).  Another  machine 
of  the  same  type,  but  with  a  100-h.p.  engine,  weighing  470  kg.  in  all,  and 
with  an  area  of  11  sq.  m.,  has  attained  a  speed  of  168  km.  per  hour  or 
46'8  m.  per  second.  According  to  the  above  method  of  calculation,  the 
flight  in  both  cases  was  made  with  a  lift  coefficient  of  about  0'0195. 
— AUTHOR. 

Since  the  above  was  written,  all  speed  records  were  broken  during 
the  last  Gordon-Bennett  race  in  September  1913.  The  winner  was 
Prevost,  on  a  160-h.p.  Gnome  Deperdussin  monoplane,  who  attained  a 
speed  of  a  fraction  under  204  km.  per  hour ;  while  Vedrines,  on  a  160- 
h.p.  Gnome-Ponnier  monoplane,  achieved  close  upon  201  km.  per  hour. 
The  Deperdussin  monoplane,  with  an  area  of  10  sq.  m.,  weighed,  fully 
loaded,  about  680  kg. ;  the  Ponnier,  measuring  8  sq.  m.,  weighed  ap- 
proximately 500  kg.  Adopting  the  same  method  of  calculation,  it  is 
easily  shown  that  the  lift  coefficients  worked  out  at  0'021  and  0'020 
respectively.  It  is  just  possible  that  these  figures  were  actually  slightly 
smaller,  since  it  is  difficult  to  determine  the  weights  with  any  consider- 
able degree  of  accuracy.  However,  the  error,  if  there  be  any,  is  only 
slight,  and  the  result  only  confirms  the  author's  conclusions.  Since  that 
time  Emile  Vedrines  is  stated  to  have  attained,  during  an  official  trial, 
a  speed  of  212  km.  per  hour,  on  a  still  smaller  Ponnier  monoplane 
measuring  only  7  sq.  m.  in  area  and  weighing  only  450  kg.  in  flight. 
This  would  imply  a  lift  coefficient  of  0'0185,  a  figure  which  cannot  be 
accepted  without  reserve. — TRANSLATOR. 


FLIGHT  IN  STILL  AIR  13 

If  the  angle  surpassed  15°  the  lift  would  diminish  and  the 
speed  again  increase. 

A  given  aeroplane,  therefore,  cannot  in  fact  fly  below  a 
certain  limit  speed,  which  in  the  case  of  the  Breguet  already 
considered,  for  instance,  is  about  63  km.  per  hour. 

It  will  be  further  noticed  that  in  Table  I.  one  of  the 
columns,  the  second  one,  contains  particulars  relating  only 
to  the  Breguet  type  of  plane.  If  this  column  were  omitted, 
the  whole  table  would  give  the  speed  variation  of  any 
aeroplane  with  a  loading  of  20  kg.  per  sq.  m.  on  its 
planes,  for  a  variation  in  the  lift  coefficient  of  the  planes. 
It  was  this  that  led  to  the  above  remark,  made  in  passing, 
that  it  was  more  usual  to  take  the  lift  coefficient  than  the 
angle  of  incidence  ;  for  the  former  is  independent  of  the 
shape  of  the  plane. 

The  speed  variation  of  an  aeroplane  for  a  variation  in  its 
lift  coefficient  can  easily  be  plotted  hi  a  curve,  which  would 
have  the  shape  shown  in  fig.  5,  which  is  based  on  the  figures 
in  Table  I. 

The  previous  considerations  relate  more  especially  to  a 
study  of  the  speeds  at  which  a  given  type  of  aeroplane  can 
fly.  In  order  to  compare  the  speeds  at  which  different 
types  of  aeroplanes  can  fly  at  the  same  lift  coefficient,  we 
need  only  return  to  the  basic  rule  already  set  forth  (p.  7).  . 
It  then  becomes  evident  that  these  speeds  are  to  one 
another  as  the  square  roots  of  the  loading. 

The  fact  that  only  the  loading  comes  into  consideration 
in  calculating  the  speed  of  an  aeroplane  shows  that  the 
speed,  for  a  given  lift  coefficient,  of  a  machine  does  not 
depend  on  the  absolute  values  of  its  weight  and  its  plane 
area,  but  only  on  the  ratio  of  these  latter.  The  most  heavily 
loaded  aeroplanes  yet  built  (those  of  the  French  military 
trials  in  1911)  were  loaded  to  the  extent  of  40  kg.  per 
sq.  m.  of  plane  area.*  The  square  root  of  this  number 
being  6-32,  an  aeroplane  of  this  type,  driven  by  a  sufficiently 

*  The   140-kp.   Deperdussin  monocoque  had  a  loading  of   43-8  kg. 

per  sq.  m. 


14 


FLIGHT  WITHOUT  FORMULA 


powerful  engine  to  enable  it  to  fly  at  a  lift  coefficient  of 
0-02  (the  square  root  of  whose  inverse  is  7-07),  could  have 
attained  a  speed  equal  to  6-32  x  7-07,  that  is,  it  could  have 
exceeded  44-5  m.  per  second  or  160  km.  per  hour. 

It  is  therefore  evident  that  there  are  only  two  means  for 
increasing  the  speed  of  an  aeroplane — either  to  reduce  the 


30 


20 


10 


00 


Lift 


0.0/0    0.020     0.030     0,0*0     0.050     0.060     0.076 
FIG.  5. 


lift  coefficient  or  to  increase  the  loading.  Both  methods 
require  power  ;  we  shall  see  further  on  which  of  the  two  is 
the  more  economical  in  this  respect. 

The  former  has  the  disadvantages — contested,  it  is  true 
—which  have  already  been  stated.  The  latter  requires 
exceptionally  strong  planes. 

In  any  case,  it  would  appear  that,  in  the  present  stage  of 
aeroplane  construction,  the  speed  of  machines  will  scarcely 
exceed  150  to  160  km.  per  hour  ;  and  even  so,  this  result 


FLIGHT  IN  STILL  AIR  15 

could  only  have  been  achieved  with  the  aid  of  good  engines 
developing  from  120  to  130  h.p.*  So  that  we  are  still  far 
removed  from  the  speeds  of  200  and  even  300  km.  per  hour 
which  were  prophesied  on  the  morrow  of  the  first  advent 
of  the  aeroplane,  f 

In  concluding  these  observations  on  the  speed  of  aero- 
planes, attention  may  be  drawn  to  a  rule  already  laid  down 
in  a  previous  work,!  which  gives  a  rapid  method  of  calculat- 
ing with  fair  accuracy  the  speed  of  an  average  machine 
whose  weight  and  plane  area  are  known. 

The  speed  of  an  average  aeroplane,  in  metres  per  second, 
is  equal  to  five  times  the  square  root  of  its  loading,  in  kg. 
per  sq.  m. 

This  rule  simply  presupposes  that  the  average  aeroplane 
flies  with  a  lift  coefficient  of  0-04,  the  inverse  of  whose 
square  root  is  5.  The  rule,  of  course,  is  not  absolutely 
accurate,  but  has  the  merit  of  being  easy  to  remember  and 
to  apply. 

EXAMPLE. — What  is  the  speed  of  an  aeroplane  weighing 
900  kg.,  and  having  an  area  of  36  sq.  m.  ? 

900 
Loading  =  — r  =  25  kg.  per  sq.  m. 

OO 

Square  root  of  the  loading =5. 

Speed  required=5x5=25  m.  per  second  or  90  km. 
per  hour. 

*  In  previous  footnotes  it  has  already  been  stated  that  the  Deper- 
dussin  monocoques,  a  140-h.p.  and  a  100-h.p.,  have  already  flown  at 
about  170  km.  per  hour.  But  these  were  exceptions,  and,  on  the  whole, 
the  author's  contention  remains  perfectly  accurate  even  to-day. — TRANS- 
LATOR. 

f  The  reference,  of  course,  is  only  to  aeroplanes  designed  for  everyday 
use,  and  not  to  racing  machines. — TRANSLATOR. 

J  The  Mechanics  of  the  Aeroplane  (Longmans,  Green  &  Co.). 


CHAPTER  II 

FLIGHT  IN  STILL  AIR 

POWER 

IN  the  first  chapter  the  speed  of  the  aeroplane  was  dealt 
with  in  its  relation  to  the  constructional  features  of  the 
machine,  or  its  characteristics  (i.e.  the  weight  and  plane 
area),  and  to  its  angle  of  incidence.  It  may  seem  strange 
that,  in  considering  the  speed  of  a  motor-driven  vehicle,  no 
account  should  have  been  taken  of  the  one  element  which 
usually  determines  the  speed  of  such  vehicles,  that  is,  of 
the  motive-power.  But  the  anomaly  is  only  apparent,  and 
wholly  due  to  the  unique  nature  of  the  aeroplane,  which 
alone  possesses  the  faculty — denied  to  terrestrial  vehicles 
which  are  compelled  to  crawl  along  the  surface  of  the 
earth,  or,  in  other  words,  to  move  hi  but  two  dimensions — of 
being  free  to  move  upwards  and  downwards,  in  all  three 
dimensions,  that  is,  of  space. 

The  subject  of  this  chapter  and  the  next  will  be  to 
examine  the  part  played  by  the  motive-power  in  aeroplane 
flight,  and  its  effect  on  the  value  of  the  speed. 

In  all  that  has  gone  before  it  has  been  assumed  that,  in 
order  to  achieve  horizontal  flight,  an  aeroplane  must  be 
drawn  forward  at  a  speed  sufficient  to  cause  the  weight  of 
the  whole  machine  to  be  balanced  by  the  lifting  power 
exerted  by  the  planes.  But  hitherto  we  have  left  out  of 
consideration  the  means  whereby  the  aeroplane  is  endowed 
with  the  speed  essential  for  the  production  of  the  necessary 
lifting-power,  and  we  purposely  omitted,  at  the  time,  to 


FLIGHT  IN  STILL  AIR  17 

deal  with  the  head-resistance  or  drag,  which  constitutes,  as 
already  stated,  the  price  to  be  paid  for  the  lift. 

This  point  will  now  be  considered. 

Reverting  to  the  concrete  case  first  examined,  that  of  the 
horizontal  flight  at  an  angle  of  incidence  of  7°  of  a  Bleriot 
monoplane  weighing  300  kg.  and  possessing  a  wing  area  of 
15  sq.  m.,  it  has  been  seen  that  the  speed  of  this  machine 
flying  at  this  angle  would  be  20  m.  per  second  or  72  km. 
per  hour,  and  that  the  drag  of  the  wings  at  the  speed 
mentioned  would  amount  to  33  kg. 

Unfortunately,  though  alone  producing  lift  in  an  aero- 
plane, the  planes  are  not  the  only  portions  productive  of 
drag,  for  they  have  to  draw  along  the  fuselage,  or  inter- 
plane  connections,  the  landing  chassis,  the  motor,  the 
occupants,  etc. 

For  reasons  of  simplicity,  it  may  be  assumed  that  all  these 
together  exert  the  same  amount  of  resistance  or  drag  as 
that  offered  by  an  imaginary  plate  placed  at  right  angles 
to  the  wind,  so  as  to  be  struck  full  in  the  face,  whose  area 
is  termed  the  detrimental  surface  of  the  aeroplane. 

M.  Eiffel  has  calculated  from  experiments  with  scale 
models  that  the  detrimental  surface  of  the  average 
single-seater  monoplane  amounted  to  between  f  and  1 
sq.  m.,  and  that  of  an  average  large  biplane  to  about 
1|  sq.  m.*  But  it  is  clear  that  these  calculations  can 
only  have  an  approximate  value,  and  that  the  detrimental 
surface  of  an  aeroplane  must  always  be  an  uncertain 
quantity. 

But  in  any  case  it  is  evident  that  this  parasitical  effect 
should  be  reduced  to  the  lowest  possible  limits  by  stream- 
lining every  part  offering  head-resistance,  by  diminishing 
exterior  stay  wires  to  the  utmost  extent  compatible  with 
safety,  etc.  And  it  will  be  shown  hereafter  that  these 
measures  become  the  more  important  the  greater  the 
speed  of  flight. 

The  drag  or  passive  resistance  can  be  easily  calculated 
*  These  figures  have  since  been  undoubtedly  reduced. 

2 


18  PLIGHT  WITHOUT  FORMULA 

for  a  given  detrimental  surface  by  multiplying  its  area 
in  square  metres  by  the  coefficient  0-08  (found  to  be  the 
average  from  experiments  with  plates  placed  normally),  and 
by  the  square  of  the  speed  in  metres  per  second. 

Thus,  taking  once  again  the  Bleriot  monoplane,  let  us 
suppose  it  to  possess  a  detrimental  surface  of  0-8  sq.  m.  ; 
its  drag  at  a  speed  of  72  km.  per  hour  or  20  m.  per  second 
will  be: 

n    «?  •     *       Detrimental      Square  of 
Coefficient.        gurface>       ^  gpeed> 

0-08      x     0-8      x     400     =26  kg.  (about). 

As  the  drag  of  the  planes  alone  at  the  above  speed 
amounts  to  33  kg.,  it  is  necessary  to  add  this  figure  of 
26  kg.,  in  order  to  find  the  total  resistance,  which  is 
therefore  equal  to  59  kg.  The  principles  of  mechanics 
teach  that  to  overcome  a  resistance  of  59  kg.  at  a  speed 
of  20  m.  per  second,  power  must  be  exerted  whose  amount, 
expressed  in  horse-power,  is  found  by  dividing  the  product 
of  the  resistance  (59  kg.)  and  the  speed  (20  m.  per  second) 
by  75.*  We  thus  obtain  16  h.p.  But  a  motor  of  16  h.p. 
would  be  insufficient  to  meet  the  requirements. 

I^or  the  propelling  plant,  consisting  of  motor  and  pro- 
peller, designed  to  overcome  the  drag  or  air  resistance  of 
the  aeroplane,  is  like  every  other  piece  of  machinery  subject 
to  losses  of  energy.  Its  efficiency,  therefore,  is  only  a 
portion  of  the  power  actually  developed  by  the  motor. 
The  efficiency  of  the  power-plant  is  the  ratio  of  useful, 
power — that  is,  the  power  capable  of  being  turned  to  effect 
after  transmission — to  the  motive  power. 

Thus,  in  order  to  produce  the  16  h.p.  required  for 
horizontal  flight  in  the  above  case  of  the  Bleriot  mono- 

*  This  is  easily  understood.  The  unit  of  power,  or  horse-power,  is 
the  power  required  to  raise  a  weight  of  75  kg.  to  a  height  of  1  in.  in 
1  second,  so  that,  to  raise  in  this  time  a  weight  of  59  kg.  to  a  height  of 

59  x  20 
20  m.,  we  require  — =^ —  h.p.     Exactly  the  same  holds  good  if,  instead 

of  overcoming  the  vertical  force  of  gravity,  we  have  to  overcome  the 
horizontal  resistance  of  the  air. 


FLIGHT  IN  STILL  AIR  19 

plane,  it  would  be  necessary  to  possess  an  engine  develop- 
ing 32  h.p.  if  the  efficiency  is  only  50  per  cent.,  26-6  h.p. 
for  an  efficiency  of  60  per  cent.,  etc. 

But  if  the  aeroplane  were  to  fly  at  an  angle  of  incidence 
other  than  7° — which,  as  already  stated,  would  depend  on 
the  position  of  the  elevator — the  speed  would  necessarily 
be  altered.  If  this  primary  condition  were  modified,  the 
immediate  result  would  be  a  variation  in  the  drag  of  the 
planes,  in  the  head-resistance  of  the  aeroplane,  in  the 
propeller-thrust,  which  is  equal  to  the  total  drag,  and  lastly, 
in  the  useful  power  required  for  flight. 

Each  value  of  the  angle  of  incidence — and  consequently 
of  the  speed — therefore  has  only  one  corresponding  value 
of  the  useful  power  necessary  for  horizontal  flight. 

Returning  to  the  Breguet  aeroplane  weighing  600  kg. 
with  a  plane  area  of  30  sq.  m.,  on  which  Table  I.  was  based, 
we  may  calculate  the  values  of  the  useful  powers  required 
to  enable  it  to  fly  along  a  horizontal  path  for  different 
angles  of  incidence  and  for  different  lifts.  The  detrimental 
surface  may  be  assumed,  for  the  sake  of  simplicity,  to  be 
1-2  sq.  m. 

The  values  of  the  drag  corresponding  to  those  of  the 
lift  will  be  obtained  from  the  polar  diagram  shown  in 
fig.  3. 

Table  II.,  p.  20,  summarises  the  results  of  the  calcula- 
tion required  to  find  the  values  of  the  useful  powers  for 
horizontal  flight  at  different  lift  coefficients. 

Various  and  interesting  conclusions  may  be  drawn  from 
the  figures  in  columns  8  and  9  of  this  Table. 

In  the  first  place,  it  will  be  noticed  from  the  figures  in 
column  8  that  the  propeller-thrust  (equivalent  to  the  drag 
of  the  planes  added  to  the  head-resistance  of  the  machine, 
i.e.  column  6  and  column  7)  has  a  minimum  value  of  91  kg., 
corresponding  to  a  lift  coefficient  of  0-05,  and  to  the  angle 
6£°.  This  angle,  which,  in  the  case  under  consideration, 
is  that  corresponding  to  the  smallest  propeller-thrust,  is 
usually  known  as  the  optimum  angle  of  the  aeroplane. 


20 


FLIGHT  WITHOUT  FORMULA 


TABLE  II. 


| 

•«  « 

Speed  Values. 

fl 

Bfe 

g^g 

§1^'     -S 
g  g  ^||     g 

it-is 

*-:-£ 

&C  ^" 

3              ^  o  5T1 

^ 

o  ~~  '**.  ^a 

Lift. 

II 

ic 
s  *s 

11 

n 

o  | 

Drag  of  P 
(drag  x  area,  3 
x  square  of 

il«^ 

llfi 

|sl  i1 

wsl  x 

Propeller-  T 

Useful  Power  f 
zontal  Flight  ( 
product  of  figs 
3  and  8  divide 

m.p.s. 

kni.p.h. 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 

0-020 

0° 

31-6 

113-6 

0-0022 

66kg. 

96kg. 

162kg. 

68 

0-030 

2° 

25-8 

92-8 

0-0024!     48 

64 

112 

38 

0-040 

4° 

22-3 

80-3 

0-0032 

48 

48 

96 

29 

0-050 

64* 

20-0 

72-0 

0-0044 

53 

38 

91 

24 

0-060 

10° 

18-2 

65-6 

0-0063 

63 

32 

95 

23 

0-066 

15° 

17-4          62-6 

0-0118 

107 

29 

136 

31 

When  the  lift  coefficient  is  small,  the  requisite  thrust, 
it  will  be  seen,  increases  very  rapidly,  and  the  same  holds 
good  for  high  lift  coefficients. 

Secondly,  the  figures  in  column  9  show  that,  together 
with  the  thrust,  the  useful  power  required  for  flight  reaches 
a  minimum  of  23  h.p.,  corresponding  to  a  lift  value  of 
0-06.  The  angle  of  incidence  at  which  this  minimum  of 
useful  power  can  be  achieved,  about  10°  in  the  present  case, 
can  be  termed  the  economical  angle. 

This  angle  is  greater  than  the  optimum  angle,  which  can 
be  explained  by  the  fact  that,  though  the  thrust  begins 
to  increase  again,  albeit  very  slowly,  when  the  angle  of 
incidence  is  raised  above  the  optimum  angle,  the  speed  still 
continues  to  decrease  to  an  appreciable  extent,  and  for  the 
time  being  this  decrease  in  speed  affects  the  useful  power 
more  strongly  than  the  increasing  thrust ;  and  the  minimum 
value  of  the  useful  power  is,  consequently,  not  attained 
until,  as  the  angle  of  incidence  continues  to  grow,  the 


FLIGHT  IN  STILL  AIR  21 

increase  in  the  thrust  exactly  balances  the  decrease  in  the 


The  figures  in  column  9  again  show  the  great  expenditure 
of  power  required  for  flight  at  a  low  lift  coefficient.  Thus, 
the  Breguet  aeroplane  already  referred  to,  driven  by  a 
propelling  plant  of  50  per  cent,  efficiency,  flying  at  a  lift  of 
0-05 — that  is,  at  a  speed  of  72  km.  per  hour — only  requires 
an  engine  developing  46  h.p.  ;  but  it  would  need  a  136-h.p. 
engine  to  fly  with  a  lift  of  O02,  or  at  about  113  km.  per 
hour.  It  is  mainly  on  this  account  that,  as  we  have  already 
stated,  the  use  of  low  lift  coefficients  is  strictly  limited. 

The  variations  in  power  corresponding  to  variations  in 
speed  (and  in  lift)  can  be  plotted  in  a  simple  curve. 

Fig.  6  is  of  exceptional  importance,  for  it  may  be  said  to 
determine  the  character  of  the  machine,  and  will  hereafter 
be  referred  to  as  the  essential  aeroplane  curve. 

After  these  preliminary  considerations  on  the  power 
required  for  horizontal  flight,  we  may  now  proceed  to 
examine  the  precise  nature  of  the  effect  of  the  motive- 
power  on  the  speed,  which  will  lead  at  the  same  time  to 
certain  conclusions  relating  to  gliding  flight  * 

For  this,  recourse  must  be  had  to  one  of  the  most  elemen- 
tary principles  of  mechanics,  known  as  the  composition 
and  decomposition  of  forces.  The  principle  is  one  which 
is  almost  self-evident,  and  has,  in  fact,  already  been  used  in 
these  pages,  when  at  the  beginning  of  Chapter  I.  it  was 
shown  that  in  the  air  pressure,  which  is  almost  vertical,  on 
a  plane  moving  horizontally,  a  clear  distinction  must  be 
made  between  the  principal  part  of  this  pressure,  which  is 
strictly  vertical  (the  lift),  and  a  secondary  part,  which  is 
strictly  horizontal  (the  drag). 

And,  conversely,  it  is  evident  that  for  the  action  of  two 
forces  working  together  at  the  same  time  may  be  substituted 

*  There  is  really  no  excuse  for  the  importation  into  English  of  the 
French  term  "  vol  plane,"  and  still  less  for  the  horrid  anglicism 
"  volplane,"  since  "  gliding  flight  "  is  a  perfect  English  equivalent  of  the 
French. — TRANSLATOR. 


22 


FLIGHT  WITHOUT  FORMULA 


that  of  a  single  force,  termed  the  resultant  of  these  two 
forces.  This  proceeding  is  known  as  the  composition  of 
forces.  So,  in  compounding  the  vertical  reaction  con- 
stituting the  lift,  and  the  horizontal  reaction  which  forms 


71) 


40 


3* 


id 


- 


10 


Flying  Speeds  (m/s). 


FIG.  6. 

The  figures  on  the  curve  indicate  the  lift. 

the  drift,  one  obtains  the  total  air  pressure,  which  is  simply 
their  resultant. 

Both  the  composition  and  decomposition  of  forces  is 
accomplished  by  way  of  projection.  Thus  (fig.  7),  the  force 
Q,*  which  is  inclined,  can  be  decomposed  into  two  forces, 

*  A  force  is  represented  by  a  straight  line,  drawn  in  the  direction  in 
which  the  force  operates,  and  of  a  length  just  proportional  to  the 
magnitude  of  the  force. 


FLIGHT  IN  STILL  AIR 


F  and  r,  vertical  and  horizontal  respectively,  by  projecting 
in  the  horizontal  and  vertical  directions  the  end  point  A  on 
two  axes  starting  from  the  point  0,  where  the  forces  are 
applied.  Conversely,  these  two  forces  F  and  r  may  be 


FIG.  7. 


FligU-Path.  ._ 


FIG.  8. 

compounded  into  one  resultant  Q,  by  drawing  the  diagonal 
of  the  parallelogram  or  rectangle  of  which  they  form  two 
of  the  sides.  We  may  now  return  to  the  problem  under 
consideration. 

If  we  take  the  aeroplane  as  a  whole,  instead  of  dealing 
with  the  planes  alone,  it  will  be  readily  seen  that  the 
horizontal  component  of  the  air  pressure  on  the  whole 


24  FLIGHT  WITHOUT  FORMULA 

machine  is  equal  to  the  drag  of  the  planes  added  to  the 
passive  or  head-resistance,  the  while  the  vertical  component 
remains  practically  equal  to  the  bare  lift  of  the  planes, 
since  the  remaining  parts  of  the  structure  of  an  aeroplane 
exert  but  slight  lift,  if  at  all.*  The  entire  pressure  of  the 
air  on  a  complete  aeroplane  in  flight  is  therefore  farther 
inclined  to  the  perpendicular  than  that  exerted  on  the  planes 
alone. 

If  (see  fig.  8)  the  aeroplane  is  assumed  to  be  represented 
by  a  single  point  O,  in  horizontal  flight,  the  air  pressure  Q 
exerted  upon  it  may  be  decomposed  into  two  forces,  of 
which  the  lift  F  is  equal  and  directly  opposite  to  the 
weight  P,  and  the  drag  r,  or  total  resistance  to  forward 
movement,  which  must  be  exactly  balanced  by  the  thrust 
t  of  the  propeller. 

But,  supposing  the  engine  be  stopped  and  the  propeller 
consequently  to  produce  no  thrust  (fig.  9),  the  aeroplane 
will  assume  a  descending  flight-path  such  that  the  planes 
still  retain  the  single  angle  of  7°,  for  instance,  which  we 
have  assumed,  so  long  as  the  elevator  is  not  moved,  and 
such  that  the  air  pressure  Q  on  the  planes  becomes 
absolutely  vertical,  in  order  to  balance  the  weight  of  the 
machine,  instead  of  remaining  inclined  as  heretofore.  This 
is  gliding  flight. 

Relatively  to  the  direction  of  flight,  the  air  pressure  Q 
still  retains  its  two  components,  of  which  r  is  simply  the 
resistance  of  the  air  opposed  to  the  forward  movement  of 
the  glider.  The  second  component  F  is  identical  to  the 
lifting  power  in  horizontal  flight,  and  its  value  is  obtained 
by  multiplying  the  lift  coefficient  corresponding  to  the 
angle  7°  by  the  plane  area,  and  by  the  square  of  the  speed 
of  the  aeroplane  on  its  downward  flight-path. 

Fig.  9  shows  that,  by  the  very  fact  of  being  inclined,  the 
force  F  is  slightly  less  than  the  weight  of  the  machine,  but, 
since  the  gliding  angle  of  an  aeroplane  is  usually  a  slight 

*  For  the  sake  of  simplicity,  we  may  consider  that  the  tail  plane, 
which  will  be  hereinafter  dealt  with,  exerts  no  lift. 


FLIGHT  IN  STILL  AIR 


25 


one,  the  lifting  power  F  may  still  be  deemed  to  be  equal  to 
the  weight  of  the  aeroplane. 

Clearly,  therefore,  every  consideration  in  the  first  chapter 
which  related  to  the  speed  in  horizontal  flight  is  equally 
applicable  to  gliding  flight,  so  that  it  may  be  said  that 


FIG.  9. 

when  an  aeroplane  begins  to  glide,  without  changing  its 
angle,  the  speed  remains  the  same  as  before. 

In  fact,  horizontal  flight  is  simply  a  glide  in  which  the 
angle  of  the  flight-path  has  been  raised  by  mechanical 
means. 

On  comparing  figs.  8  and  9  it  will  be  seen  that  this  angle 
is  that  which,  in  fig.  8,  is  marked  by  the  letter  p.  If  this 


26 


FLIGHT  WITHOUT  FORMULAE 


angle  is  represented,  as  in  the  case  of  any  gradient,  in 
terms  of  a  decimal  fraction,  it  will  be  found  to  depend  on 
the  ratio  which  the  forces  r  and  F  bear  to  one  another. 
Hence,  the  following  rule  may  be  stated  : — 

RULE. — The  gliding  angle  assumed  at  a  given  angle  of 
incidence  by  any  aeroplane  is  equal  to  the  thrust  required 
for  its  horizontal  flight  at  the  same  angle,  divided  by  the 
weight  of  the  machine. 

Thus  the  Bleriot  monoplane  dealt  with  in  the  first 
instance,  which  requires  for  horizontal  flight  at  an  angle 
of  7°  a  thrust  of  59  kg.,  and  weighs  300  kg.,  would  assume 
on  its  glide,  at  the  same  angle  of  incidence,  a  descending 

59 

flight-path  equal  to  — — ,  or  0-197,  which  is  equivalent  to 
oOO 

nearly  20  cm.  in  every  metre  (1  in  5).  The  Breguet 
aeroplane  on  which  Tables  I.  and  II.  were  based,  weighing 
600  kg.,  would  assume  at  different  angles  (or  lift  coefficients) 
the  gliding  angles  shown  in  Table  III. 

TABLE  III. 


Angle 
corre- 
Lift.           spending 
to  the 
Lift. 

Speed. 

Propeller- 
Thrust  in 
Horizontal 

Flight. 

Gliding  Angle 
Weight 
(600kg.) 
divided  by 
figures  in 
col.  5. 

m/s. 

km/li. 

1                     2 

3                    4 

5 

6 

0-02               0° 

31-6 

113-6 

162 

0-270 

I 

0-03       |         2° 

25-8 

92-8 

112 

0-187 

0-04       !         4° 

22-3 

80-3 

96 

0-160 

| 

6i° 

20-0 

72-0               91 

0-151 

0-06                10° 

18-2 

65-6 

9f> 

0-158 

0-066              15° 

17-4 

62-6 

136 

0-22C 

It  will  now  be  seen  that  the  best  gliding  angle  is  obtained 
when  the  angle  of  incidence  is  the  same  as  the  optimum 


FLIGHT  IN  STILL  AIR  27 

angle  of  the  aeroplane.  The  latter,  therefore,  is  the  best 
from  the  gliding  point  of  view,  so  far  as  the  length  of  the 
glide  is  concerned. 

In  fig.  10,  starting  from  a  point  0,  are  drawn  dotted  lines 
corresponding  to  the  gliding  angle  given  in  column  6  of 
Table  III.,  and  on  these  lines  are  marked  off  distances 
proportional  to  the  speed  values  set  out  in  columns  3  or  4  ; 
the  diagram  will  then  give,  if  the  points  are  connected 
into  a  curve,  the  positions  assumed,  in  unit  time,  by  a 
glider,  launched  at  the  various  angles  from  the  point  0. 

It  will  be  observed  in  the  first  place  that  any  given 
gliding  path,  such  as  OA,  for  instance,  cuts  the  curve  at 
two  points,  A  and  B,  thus  showing  that  this  gliding  path 
could  have  been  traversed  by  the  aeroplane  at  two  different 
speeds,  OA  and  OB,  corresponding  to  the  two  different 
angles  of  incidence,  1°  and  15°  in  the  present  case. 

Only  for  the  single  gliding  path  OM,  corresponding  to 
the  smallest  gliding  slope  and  the  optimum  angle  of  inci- 
dence, do  these  two  points  coincide. 

But  it  is  not  by  following  this  gliding  path  that  an  aero- 
plane will  descend  best  in  the  vertical  sense  during  a  given 
period  of  time  ;  for  this  it  will  only  do  by  following  the 
path  OE  corresponding  to  the  highest  point  on  the  curve, 
and  the  angle  of  incidence  to  be  adopted  to  achieve  this 
result  is  none  other  than  the  economical  angle.  But  the 
difference  in  the  rate  of  fall  is  only  slight  for  the  example 
in  question. 

It  will  be  noted  that  as  the  angle  of  incidence  diminishes, 
the  gliding  angle  rapidly  becomes  steeper.  If  the  curve 
were  extended  so  as  to  take  in  very  small  angles  of 
incidence,  it  would  be  found  that  at  a  lift  coefficient  of 
0-015  the  gliding  path  would  already  have  become  very 
steep,  that  this  steepness  would  increase  very  rapidly  for 
the  coefficient  0-010,  and  that  at  0-005  it  approached  a 
headlong  fall.  The  fall,  in  fact,  must  become  vertical  when 
the  lift  disappears,  that  is,  when  the  plane  meets  the  air 
along  its  imaginary  chord. 


28  FLIGHT  WITHOUT  FORMULA 


FLIGHT  IN  STILL  AIR  29 

In  these  conditions,  a  slight  variation  in  the  lift  there- 
fore brings  about  a  very  large  alteration  in  the  gliding 
angle,  and  this  effect  is  the  more  intense  the  smaller  the 
lift  coefficient.  The  glide  becomes  a  dive.  Hence  it  is 
clear  that  this  is  another  danger  of  adopting  a  low  lift 
coefficient. 

This  brief  discussion  on  gliding  flight,  interesting  enough 
in  itself,  was  necessary  to  a  proper  understanding  of  the 
part  played  by  power  in  the  horizontal  flight  of  an  aero- 
plane, for  we  can  now  regard  the  latter  in  the  light  of 
a  glide  in  which  the  gliding  path  has  been  artificially 
raised. 

And  this  raising  of  the  gliding  path  is  due  to  the  power 
derived  from  the  propelling  plant. 

This  will  be  better  understood  if  we  assume  that,  during 
the  course  of  a  glide,  the  pilot  started  up  his  engine  again 
without  altering  the  position  of  the  elevator,  so  that  the 
planes  remained  at  the  same  angle  as  before  ;  the  gliding 
path  would  gradually  be  raised  until  it  attained  and  even 
surpassed  the  horizontal,  while  the  aeroplane  (as  has  been 
seen)  would  approximately  maintain  the  same  speed 
throughout. 

Hence  it  may  be  said  that  when  the  angle  of  incidence 
remains  constant,  the  speed  of  an  aeroplane  is  not  produced 
by  its  motive  power,  as  in  the  case  of  all  other  existing 
vehicles,  since,  when  the  motor  is  stopped,  this  speed  is 
maintained. 

The  function  of  the  power-plant  is  simply  to  overcome 
gravity,  to  prevent  the  aeroplane  from  yielding,  as  it  in- 
evitably must  do  in  calm  air,  to  the  attraction  of  the  earth  ; 
in  other  words,  to  govern  its  vertical  flight. 

In  the  case  now  under  consideration,  the  speed  therefore 
is  wholly  independent  of  the  power,  since,  as  has  been  seen, 
it  is  entirely  determined  by  the  angle  of  incidence,  and  if 
this  remains  constant,  as  assumed,  any  excess  of  power  will 
simply  cause  the  aeroplane  to  climb,  while  a  lack  of  power 


30  FLIGHT  WITHOUT   FORMULA 

will  cause  it  to  coine  down,  but  without  any  variation  in  the 
speed. 

But  this  must  not  be  taken  to  imply  that  the  available 
motive-power  cannot  be  transformed  into  speed,  for  such, 
happily,  is  not  the  case.  Hitherto  the  elevator  has  been 
assumed  to  be  immovable  so  that  the  incidence  remained 
constant. 

As  a  matter  of  fact,  the  incidence  need  only  be  diminished 
through  the  action  of  the  elevator  in  order  to  enable  the 
aeroplane  to  adopt  the  speed  corresponding  to  the  new 
angle  of  planes,  and  in  this  way  to  absorb  the  excess  of 
power  without  climbing. 

Nevertheless — and  the  point  should  be  insisted  upon  as 
it  is  one  of  the  essential  principles  of  aeroplane  flight — the 
angle  of  incidence  alone  determines  the  speed,  which  cannot 
be  affected  by  the  power  save  through  the  intermediary  of 
the  incidence. 

Hitherto  we  have  constantly  alluded  to  the  different 
speeds  at  which  an  aeroplane  can  fly,  as  if,  in  practice, 
pilots  were  able  to  drive  their  machines  at  almost  any 
speed  they  desired.  In  actual  fact,  a  given  aeroplane 
usually  only  flies  at  a  single  speed,  so  that  we  are  in 
the  habit  of  referring  to  the  X  biplane  as  a  70  km. 
per  hour  machine,  or  of  stating  that  the  Y  monoplane 
does  100  km.  per  hour.  This  is  simply  because  up  to 
now,  and  with  very  few  exceptions,  pilots  run  their  engines 
at  their  normal  number  of  revolutions.  In  these  conditions 
it  is  evident  that  the  useful  power  furnished  by  the 
propelling  plant  determines  the  incidence,  and  hence  the 


Thus,  referring  once  again  to  Table  II.,  it  will  be  seen 
for  example  that,  if  the  Breguet  biplane  receives  29  h.p. 
in  useful  power  from  its  propelling  plant,  the  pilot,  in 
order  to  maintain  horizontal  flight,  will  have  to  manipulate 
his  elevator  until  the  incidence  of  the  planes  is  approxi- 
mately 4°,  which  corresponds  to  the  lift  0-040. 

The  speed,  then,  would  only  be  about  80  km.  per  hour. 


FLIGHT  IN  STILL  AIR  31 

Experience  teaches  the  pilot  to  find  the  correct  position 
of  the  elevator  to  maintain  horizontal  flight.  Should  the 
engine  run  irregularly,  and  if  the  aeroplane  is  to  maintain 
its  horizontal  flight,  the  elevator  must  be  slightly  actuated 
in  order  to  correct  this  disturbing  influence. 

Horizontal  flight,  therefore,  implies  a  constant  mainten- 
ance of  equilibrium,  whence  the  designation  equilibrator, 
which  is  often  applied  to  the  elevator,  derives  full  justifi- 
cation. 

But  if  the  engine  is  running  normally,  the  incidence,  and 
consequently  the  speed,  of  an  aeroplane  remain  practically 
constant,  and  these  constitute  its  normal  incidence  and 
speed. 

Generally  the  engine  is  running  at  full  power  during 
flight,  and  so  in  the  ordinary  course  of  events  the  normal 
speed  of  an  aeroplane  is  the  highest  it  can  attain. 

But  there  is  a  growing  tendency  among  pilots  to 
reserve  a  portion  of  the  power  which  the  engine  is 
capable  of  developing,  and  to  throttle  down  in  normal 
flight.  In  this  case  the  reserve  of  power  available  may 
be  saved  for  an  emergency,  and  be  used — the  case  will  be 
dealt  with  hereafter — for  climbing  rapidly,  or  to  assume 
a  higher  speed  for  the  time  being.  In  this  case  the 
normal  speed  is,  of  course,  no  longer  the  highest  possible 
speed. 

In  the  example  already  considered,  the  Breguet  biplane 
would  fly  at  about  80  km.  per  hour,  if  it  possessed  useful 
power  amounting  to  29  h.p. 

But  by  throttling  down  the  engine  so  that  it  normally 
only  produced  a  reduced  useful  power  equivalent  to  24  h.p., 
the  normal  speed  of  the  machine,  according  to  Table  II., 
would  only  be  72  km.  per  hour  (the  normal  incidence  being 
6|°  and  the  lift  0-050). 

The  pilot  would  therefore  have  at  his  disposal  a  surplus 
of  power  amounting  to  5  h.p.,  which  he  could  use,  by, 
opening  the  throttle,  either  for  climbing  or  for  temporarily 
increasing  his  speed  to  80  km.  per  hour. 


32  FLIGHT  WITHOUT  FORMULA 

Although,  therefore,  an  aeroplane  usually  only  flies  at 
one  speed,  which  we  call  its  normal  speed,  it  can  perfectly 
well  fly  at  other  speeds,  as  was  shown  in  Chapter  I.  But, 
in  order  to  obtain  this  result,  it  is  essential  that  on  each 
occasion  the  engine  should  be  made  to  develop  the  precise 
amount  of  power  required  by  the  speed  at  which  it  is 
desired  to  fly. 

Speed  variation  can  therefore  only  be  achieved  by 
simultaneously  varying  the  incidence  and  the  power,  or,  in 
practice,  by  operating  the  elevator  and  the  throttle  together. 
This  may  be  accomplished  with  greater  or  less  ease 
according  to  the  type  of  motor  in  use,  but  certain  pilots 
practise  it  most  cleverly  and  succeed  in  achieving  a  very 
notable  speed  variation,  which  i?  of  great  importance, 
especially  in  the  case  of  high-speed  aeroplanes,  at  the 
moment  of  alighting. 

As  has  already  been  explained,  the  horizontal  flight  of  an 
aeroplane  may  be  considered  in  the  light  of  gliding  flight 
with  the  gliding  angle  artificially  raised.  From  this  point 
of  view  it  is  possible  to  calculate  in  another  way  the  power 
required  for  horizontal  flight. 

For  instance,  if  we  know  that  an  aeroplane  of  a  given 
weight,  such  as  600  kg.,  has,  for  a  given  incidence,  a  glid- 
ing angle  of  16  cm.  per  metre  (approximately  1  in  6)  at 
which  its  speed  is  22-3  m.  per  second,  we  conclude  that 
in  1  second  it  descended  0-16  x  22-3=3-58  m.  Hence, 
in  order  to  overcome  its  descent  and  to  preserve  its  hori- 
zontal flight,  it  would  be  necessary  to  expend  the  useful 
power  required  to  raise  a  weight  of  600  kg.  to  a  height 
of  3-58  m.  in  1  second.  Since  1  h.p.  is  the  unit  required 
to  raise  a  weight  of  75  kg.  to  a  height  of  1  m.  in  1  second, 

the  desired  useful  power = — —about  29  h.p.     This, 

as  a  matter  of  fact,  is  the  amount  given  by  Table  II.  for 
the  Breguet  biplane  which  complies  with  the  conditions 
given. 

In    order    to    find    the    useful    power    required   for    the 


FLIGHT  IN  STILL  AIR  33 

horizontal  flight  of  an  aeroplane  flying  at  a  given  incidence, 
and  hence  at  a  given  speed,  multiply  the  weight  of  the  machine 
by  this  speed  and  by  the  gliding  angle  corresponding  to  the 
incidence,  and  divide  by  75. 

By  a  similar  method  one  may  easily  calculate  the  useful 
power  required  to  convert  horizontal  flight  into  a  climb  at 
any  angle. 

Thus,  if  the  aeroplane  already  referred  to  had  to  climb, 
always  at  the  same  speed  of  22-3  m.  per  second,  at  an  angle 
of  5  cm.  per  metre  (1  in  20),  it  would  be  necessary  to  expend 
the  additional  power 

0-05x600x22-3       , 

=about  9  h.p. 

75 

Of  course,  this  expenditure  of  surplus  power  would  be 
greater  the  smaller  the  efficiency  of  the  propeller,  and 
would  be  12  h.p.  for  75  per  cent,  efficiency,  and  18  h.p. 
for  50  per  cent,  efficiency. 

Clearly,  this  method  of  making  an  aeroplane  climb — by 
increasing  the  motive  power — can  only  be  resorted  to  if 
there  is  a  surplus  of  power  available,  that  is,  if  the  engine 
is  not  normally  running  at  full  power,  which  until  now  is 
the  exception. 

For  this  reason,  when,  as  is  generally  the  case,  the  engine 
is  running  at  full  power,  climbing  is  effected  in  a  much 
simpler  manner,  which  consists  in  increasing  the  angle  of 
incidence  of  the  planes  by  means  of  the  elevator. 

Let  us  once  more  take  our  Breguet  biplane  which,  with 
motor  working  at  full  power,  flies  at  a  normal  speed  of 
22-3  m.  per  second  (80-3  km.  per  hour)  at  4°  incidence  (or 
a  lift  coefficient  of  0-040).  The  useful  power  needed  to 
achieve  this  speed  (see  Table  II.)  is  29  h.p. 

Assume  that,  by  means  of  his  elevator,  the  pilot  increases 
the  angle  of  incidence  to  10°  (lift  coefficient  0-060).  Since 
horizontal  flight  at  this  incidence,  which  must  inevitably 
reduce  the  speed  to  18-2  m.  per  second  or  65-6  km.  per 
hour,  would  only  require  23  h.p.,  there  will  be  an  ex- 

3 


34  FLIGHT  WITHOUT  FORMULAE 

cess  of  power  amounting  to  6  h.p.,*  and  the  aeroplane 
will  rise. 

The  climbing  angle  can  be  calculated  with  great  ease. 
The  method  is  just  the  converse  of  the  one  we  have  just 
employed,  and  thus  consists  in  dividing  6x75  (representing 
the  surplus  power)  by  600  x20  (weight  multiplied  by  speed), 
which  gives  an  angle  of  3*75  cm.  per  metre  (1  in  27 
about). 

This  climbing  rate  may  not  appear  very  great  ;  still,  for 
a  speed  of  18-2  m.  per  second,  it  corresponds  to  a  climb 
of  68  cm.  per  second=41  m.  per  minute=410  m.  in  10 
minutes,  which  is,  at  all  events,  appreciable. 

The  aeroplane,  therefore,  may  be  made  to  climb  or  to  descend 
by  the  operation  of  the  elevator  by  the  pilot. 

More  especially  is  the  elevator  used  for  starting.  In 
this  case  the  elevator  is  placed  in  a  position  corresponding 
to  a  very  slight  incidence  of  the  main  planes,  so  that  these 
offer  very  little  resistance  to  forward  motion  when  the 
motor  is  started  and  the  machine  begins  to  run  along  the 
ground.  As  soon  as  the  rolling  speed  is  deemed  sufficient, 
the  elevator  is  moved  to  a  considerable  angle,  which  causes 
the  planes  to  assume  a  fairly  high  incidence,  and  the  aero- 
plane rises  from  the  ground. 

*  This  is  not  strictly  correct,  since,  as  will  be  seen  hereafter,  the 
propeller  efficiency  varies  to  some  extent  with  the  speed  of  the  aeroplane ; 
still,  we  shall  not  make  a  grievous  error  in  assuming  that  the  efficiency 
remains  the  same. 


CHAPTER  III 

FLIGHT  IN  STILL  AIR 

POWER  (concluded] 

THE  second  chapter  was  mainly  devoted  to  explaining  how 
one  may  calculate  the  useful  power  required  for  horizontal 
flight,  at  the  various  angles  of  incidence  and  at  the  different 
lift  coefficients — in  other  words,  at  the  various  speeds  of  a 
given  aeroplane. 

In  addition,  gliding  flight  has  been  briefly  touched  on, 
and  has  served  to  show  the  precise  manner  in  which  the 
power  employed  affects  the  speed  of  the  aeroplane. 

In  the  present  chapter  this  discussion  will  be  completed  ; 
it  will  be  devoted  to  finding  the  best  way  of  employing  the 
available  power  to  obtain  speed.  Incidentally,  we  shall 
have  occasion  to  deal  briefly  with  the  limits  of  speed  which 
the  aeroplane  as  we  know  it  to-day  seems  capable  of 
attaining. 

It  has  been  shown  that  the  flight  of  a  given  aeroplane 
requires  a  minimum  useful  power,  and  that  this  is  only 
possible  when  the  angle  of  incidence  is  that  which  we  have 
termed  the  economical  angle. 

The  power  would  therefore  be  turned  to  the  best  account, 
having  regard  merely  to  the  sustentation  of  the  aeroplane, 
by  making  it  fly  normally  at  its  economical  angle. 

But,  on  the  other  hand,  this  method  is  most  defective 
from  the  point  of  view  of  speed,  for  as  fig.  6  (Chapter  II.) 
clearly  shows,  when  the  machine  flies  at  its  economical 
angle,  a  very  slight  increase  in  power  will  increase  the 

35 


36  FLIGHT  WITHOUT  FORMULA 

speed  to  a  considerable  extent.  Besides,  the  method  in 
question  would  be  worthless  from  a  practical  point  of  view, 
since  it  is  evident  that  an  aeroplane  flying  under  these 
conditions  would  be  endangered  by  the  slightest  failure  of 
its  engine. 

Such,  in  fact,  was  the  case  with  the  first  aeroplanes  which 
actually  rose  from  the  ground  ;  they  flew  "  without  a 
margin,"  to  use  an  expressive  term.  And  even  to-day  the 
same  is  true  of  machines  whose  motor  is  running  badly  : 
in  such  a  case  the  only  thing  to  be  done  is  to  land  as  soon 
as  possible,  since  the  aeroplane  will  scarcely  respond  to  the 
controls. 

The  other  characteristic  value  of  the  angle  of  incidence 
referred  to  in  Chapter  II.,  there  called  the  optimum  angle, 
corresponds  to  the  least  value  of  the  ratio  between  the 
propeller-thrust  and  the  weight  of  the  aeroplane,  or  to  its 
equivalent — the  best  gliding  angle. 

For  the  best  utilisation  of  the  power  in  order  to  obtain 
speed,  which  alone  concerns  us  for  the  moment,  there  is  a 
distinct  advantage  attached  to  the  use  of  the  optimum 
angle  for  the  normal  incidence  of  the  machine  ;  Colonel 
Renard,  indeed,  long  ago  pointed  out  that  by  using  the 
optimum  angle  for  normal  flight  in  preference  to  the 
economical  angle,  one  obtained  32  per  cent,  increase  in  speed 
for  an  increase  in  power  amounting  to  13  per  cent.  only. 

In  any  case,  when  the  incidence  is  optimum  the  ratio 
between  the  speed  and  the  useful  power  required  to  obtain 
it  is  largest.  This  is  easily  explained  by  reference  to 
Chapter  II.,  which  showed  that  the  useful  power  required 
for  horizontal  flight  at  a  given  incidence  is  proportional  to 
the  speed  multiplied  by  the  gliding  angle  of  the  aeroplane 
at  the  same  incidence. 

When  the  gliding  angle  is  least  (i.e.  flattest),  that  is, 
when  the  incidence  is  that  of  the  optimum  angle,  the  ratio 
of  power  to  speed  is  also  smallest,  and  hence  the  ratio  of 
speed  to  maximum  power. 

It  would  therefore  appear  that  by  using  the  optimum 


FLIGHT  IN  STILL  AIR  37 

angle  as  the  normal  incidence  we  would  obtain  the  best 
results  from  the  point  of  view  with  which  we  are  at  present 
concerned,  which  is  that  of  the  most  profitable  utilisation 
of  the  power  to  produce  speed.  This,  in  fact,  is  generally 
accepted  as  the  truth,  and  in  his  scale  model  experiments 
M.  Eiffel  always  recorded  this  important  value  of  the  angle 
of  incidence,  together  with  the  corresponding  flattest  gliding 
angle. 

Nevertheless  we  are  not  prepared  to  accept  as  inevitably 
true  that  the  optimum  angle  is  necessarily  the  most  ad- 
vantageous for  flight,  so  far  as  the  transmutation  of  power 
into  speed  is  concerned.  This  will  now  be  shown  by 
approaching  the  question  in  a  different  manner,  and  by 
finding  the  best  conditions  under  which  a  given  speed  can 
be  attained. 

The  power  required  for  flight  is  proportional,  as  has  been 
shown,  to  the  propeller-thrust  multiplied  by  the  speed. 
Hence,  on  comparing  different  aeroplanes  flying  at  the  same 
speed,  it  will  be  found  that  the  values  of  the  power  ex- 
pended to  maintain  flight  will  have  the  same  relation  to  one 
another  as  the  corresponding  values  of  the  propeller-thrust. 

If  we  assume  that  the  detrimental  surface  of  each  one 
of  these  aeroplanes  is  identical,  the  head-resistance  will  be 
the  same  in  each  case,  since  it  is  proportional  to  the  detri- 
mental surface  multiplied  by  the  square  of  the  speed  (which 
is  identical  in  every  case). 

It  follows  that  the  speed  in  question  will  be  attained 
most  economically  by  the  aeroplane  whose  planes  exert 
the  least  drag.  Now,  it  was  shown  in  Chapter  II.  that 
the  drag  of  the  wings  of  an  aeroplane  is  a  fraction  of  the 
weight  of  the  machine  equal  to  the  ratio  between  the 
drag  coefficient  and  the  lift  coefficient  corresponding  to 
the  incidence  at  which  flight  is  made. 

If  we  assume,  therefore,  that  the  weight  of  each  aero- 
plane is  identical,  it  follows  that  the  best  results  are  given 
by  that  machine  whose  planes  in  normal  flight  have  the 
smallest  drag-to-lift  ratio. 


38  FLIGHT  WITHOUT  FORMULA 

Reference  to  the  polar  diagrams  (Chapter  I.,  figs.  1,  2,  3, 
and  4)  shows  that  the  minimum  drag-to-lift  ratio  occurs 
at  the  angle  of  incidence  corresponding  to  the  point  on 
the  curve  where  a  straight  line  rotated  about  the  centre 
0-00  comes  into  contact  with  the  curve.  This  angle  of 
incidence  is  beyond  all  question,  for  any  aeroplane  provided 
with  planes  of  the  types  under  consideration,  the  most 
profitable  from  our  point  of  view  ;  this  angle,  in  other 
words,  is  that  at  which  an  aeroplane  of  given  weight  can 
fly  at  a  given  speed  for  the  least  expenditure  of  power, 
and  this  for  any  weight  and  speed.  Hence  this  is  the 
angle  at  which  an  aeroplane  possessing  one  of  these  wing 
sections  should  always  fly  in  theory.  Accordingly,  it  may  be 
termed  the  be  t  angle  of  incidence,  and  the  corresponding 
lift  coefficient  the  best  lift  coefficient. 

The  value  of  the  best  incidence  only  depends  on  the 
wing  section,  but  it  is  always  smaller  than  the  optimum 
angle,  which  in  its  turn  depends  not  only  on  the  wing 
section  but  also  on  the  ratio  of  the  detrimental  surface  to 
the  plane  area. 

A  straight  line  rotated  from  the  centre  0-00  in  figs.  2,  3, 
and  4  indicates  that  the  best  lift  coefficients  for  M.  Farman, 
Breguet,  and  Bleriot  XI.  plane  sections  are  respectively 
0-017,  0-035,  and  0-047,  corresponding  to  the  best  angles 
of  incidence  1|°,  2£°,  and  6°.  These  values  can  only  be  de- 
termined with  some  difficulty,  however,  since  the  curves 
are  so  nearly  straight  at  these  points  that  the  rotating  line 
would  come  into  contact  with  the  curves  for  some  distance 
and  not  at  one  precise  point  alone. 

On  the  other  hand,  it  is  evident  that  the  drag-to-lift  ratio 
only  varies  very  slightly  for  a  series  of  angles  of  incidence, 
the  range  depending  on  the  particular  plane  section,  so 
that  one  is  justified  in  saying  that  each  type  of  wing  pos- 
sesses not  only  one  best  incidence  and  one  best  lift,  but 
several  good  incidences  and  good  lifts. 

Thus,  for  the  Maurice  Farman  section,  the  good  lifts  lie 
between  0-010  and  0-025  approximately,  and  the  corre- 


FLIGHT  IN  STILL  AIR  39 

spending  good  incidences  extend  from  1°  to  4°,  while  the 
drag-to-lift  ratio  between  these  limits  remains  practically 
constant  at  0-065. 

For  the  Breguet  wing,  the  good  lifts  are  between  0-030 
and  0-045,  the  good  incidences  between  3°  and  6°,  and  the 
drag-to-lift  ratio  remains  about  0-08. 

Lastly,  for  the  Bleriot  XI.  the  same  values  read  as 
follows  :  0-030  and  0-055,  3°  and  6°,  and  about  0-105. 

Even  at  this  point  it  becomes  evident  that  the  use  of 
.slightly  cambered  wings  is  the  more  suitable  for  flight 
with  a  low  lift  coefficient,  and  that  for  a  large  lift  a  heavily 
cambered  wing  is  preferable. 

If  the  optimum  angle  of  an  aeroplane,  which  depends, 
as  already  shown,  on  the  ratio  between  the  detrimental 
surface  and  the  plane  area,  is  included  within  the  limits 
of  the  good  incidences,  its  use  as  the  normal  angle  of  in- 
cidence remains  as  advantageous  as  that  of  any  other 
"  good  "  incidence.  But  if  it  is  not  included,*  flight  at  the 
optimum  angle  would  require,  in  theory  at  all  events,  a 
greater  expenditure  of  power  than  would  be  required  under 
similar  conditions  if  flight  took  place  at  any  of  the  good 
incidences. 

This  shows  that  the  optimum  angle  is  not  necessarily 
that  at  which  an  aeroplane  should  fly  normally  in  order  to 
use  the  power  most  advantageously. 

To  sum  up  :  the  normal  speed  should  always  correspond 
to  a  "  good  "  angle  of  incidence. 

Should  this  not  be  the  case  in  fact,  it  would  be  possible 
to  design  an  aeroplane  which,  for  the  same  weight  and 
detrimental  surface  as  the  one  under  consideration,  could 
achieve  an  equal  speed  for  a  smaller  expenditure  of  power. 

A  concrete  example  will  render  these  considerations 
clearer. 

In  Table  II.  (Chapter  II.)  there  was  set  out  the  variation 

*  This  would  be  possible  more  particularly  in  the  case  of  aeroplanes 
with  very  slightly  cambered  planes  and  small  wing  area  and  considerable 
detrimental  surface. 


40  FLIGHT  WITHOUT  FORMULA 

of  the  useful  power  required  for  the  horizontal  flight  of  a 
Breguet  aeroplane  weighing  600  kg.,  with  a  plane  area  of 
30  sq.  m.  and  a  detrimental  surface  of  1-20  sq.  m.,  according 
to  its  speed. 

Let  us  assume  that  the  useful  power — 24  h. p. —developed 
by  the  propeller  makes  the  aeroplane  fly  normally  at 
0-050  lift,  or  at  its  optimum  incidence.  The  speed  will 
then  be  72  km.  per  hour  or  20  m.  per  second.  This  lift 
coefficient  0-050,  be  it  noted,  is  slightly  greater  than  the 
highest  of  the  good  incidences  peculiar  to  the  Breguet 
section. 

Now  let  us  take  another  aeroplane  of  the  same  type,  also 
weighing  600  kg.  and  with  the  same  detrimental  surface 
of  1-20  sq.  m.,  but  with  40  sq.  m.  plane  area,  which  should 
still  fly  at  the  same  speed  of  20  m.  per  second. 

The  lift  coefficient  may  be  obtained  (cf.  Chapter  I.)  by 
dividing  the  loading  of  the  planes  (15  kg.)  by  the  square  of 
the  speed  in  metres  per  second  (400),  which  gives  0-0375. 
Now  this  is  one  of  the  good  lift  coefficients  of  the  Breguet 
plane.  In  these  conditions,  therefore,  the  drag-to-lift  ratio 
will  assume  the  constant  value  of  about  0-08  common  to  all 
good  incidences. 

It  follows  that  the  drag  of  the  planes  will  be  equal  to 
the  weight,  600  kg.  x  0-08=48  kg. 

The  head-resistance,  on  the  other  hand,  will  remain  the 
same  as  in  the  original  aeroplane  whose  speed  was  72  km. 
per  hour,  since  head-resistance  is  dependent  simply  on  the 
amount  of  detrimental  surface  and  on  the  speed  (neither  of 
which  undergoes  any  change).  The  head-resistance,  there- 
fore (cf.  Chapter  II.),  equals  38  kg. 

The  propeller-thrust,  equal  to  the  sum  of  head-resistance 
and  drag  of  the  planes,  will  be  86  kg.,  and  the  useful  power 
required  for  flight = 

Thrust  (86) XqeedjjO^  ^ 

75 

The  figure  thus  obtained  is  less  than  the  24  h.p.  of  useful 


FLIGHT  IN  STILL  AIR  41 

power  required  to  make  the  aeroplane  first  considered  fly 
at  72  km.  per  hour. 

Therefore,  in  theory  at  all  events,  the  optimum  angle  is 
not  necessarily  the  most  advantageous  from  the  point  of 
view  of  the  least  expenditure  of  power  to  obtain  speed. 
But  in  practice  the  small  saving  in  power  would  probably 
be  neutralised  owing  to  the  difficulty  of  constructing  two 
aeroplanes  of  the  same  type  with  a  plane  area  of  30  and 
40  sq.  m.  respectively  without  increasing  the  weight  and 
the  detrimental  surface  of  the  latter.  Hence  the  advantage 
dealt  with  would  appear  to  be  purely  a  theoretical  one  in 
the  present  case. 

But  this  would  not  be  so  with  an  aeroplane  whose  normal 
angle  of  incidence  was  smaller  than  the  good  incidences 
belonging  to  its  particular  plane  section.  For  instance,  let 
us  assume  that  the  propeller  of  the  Breguet  aeroplane 
(vide  Table  II.)  furnishes  normally  68  useful  h.p.,  which 
would  give  the  machine  a  speed  of  113-6  km.  per  hour  or 
31-6  m.  per  second,  at  the  lift  0-020,  which  is  less  than  the 
good  lifts  for  this  plane  section. 

Now  take  another  Breguet  aeroplane  of  the  same  weight 
and  detrimental  surface,  but  with  a  plane  area  of  only 
20  sq.  m.  Calculating  as  before,  it  will  be  found  that  in 
order  to  achieve  a  speed  of  113-6  km.  per  hour,  this  machine 
Avould  have  to  fly  with  a  lift  of  0-030,  which  is  one  of  the 
good  lifts,  and  that  useful  power  amounting  to  only  60  h.p. 
would  be  sufficient  to  effect  the  purpose.  This  time  the 
advantage  of  using  a  good  incidence  as  the  normal  angle  is 
clearly  apparent. 

As  a  matter  of  fact,  in  practice  the  advantage  would 
probably  be  even  more  considerable,  since  a  machine  with 
20  sq.  m.  plane  area  would  probably  be  lighter  and  have 
less  detrimental  surface  than  a  30  sq.  m.  machine. 

Care  should  therefore  be  taken  that  the  normal  angle  of 
an  aeroplane  is  included  among  the  good  incidences  belonging 
to  its  plane  section,  and,  above  all,  that  it  is  not  smaller  than 
the  good  incidences. 


42  PLIGHT  WITHOUT  FORMULA 

This  manner  of  considering  good  incidences  and  lifts 
provides  a  solution  of  the  following  problem  which  was 
referred  to  in  Chapter  I.  : 

Since  there  are  only  two  means  of  increasing  the  speed 
of  an  aeroplane — either  by  increasing  the  plane  loading 
or  by  reducing  the  lift  coefficient  —  which  of  these  is  the  more 
economical  ? 

To  begin  with,  the  question  will  be  examined  from  a 
theoretical  point  of  view,  by  assuming  that  the  adoption  of 
either  means  will  have  the  same  effect  in  each  case  on  the 
weight  and  the  detrimental  surface,  since  the  values  of 
these  must  be  supposed  to  remain  the  same  in  the  various 
machines  to  enable  our  usual  method  of  calculation  to  be 
applied. 

This  being  so,  it  will  be  readily  seen  that  as  long  as  the 
normal  lift  remains  one  of  the  good  lifts,  both  means  of 
increasing  the  speed  are  equivalent  as  far  as  the  expenditure 
of  useful  power  is  concerned. 

On  the  one  hand,  since  the  drag-to-lift  ratio  retains 
approximately  the  same  value  for  all  good  lifts,  the  drag 
of  the  planes  will  remain  for  every  angle  of  incidence  a 
constant  fraction  of  the  weight,  which  is  assumed  to  be  in- 
variable. On  the  other  hand,  at  the  speed  it  is  desired  to 
attain,  the  head-resistance,  proportional  to  the  detrimental 
surface,  which  is  also  assumed  to  be  invariable,  will  remain 
the  same  in  both  cases.  Consequently,  the  propeller-thrust, 
equal  to  the  sum  of  the  two  resistances  (drag  of  the  planes 
4-head-resistance),  and  hence  the  useful  power,  will  retain 
the  same  value  by  whichever  of  the  two  methods  the  increase 
in  speed  has  been  obtained. 

But  if  the  lift  had  already  been  reduced  to  the  smallest 
of  the  good  lift  values,  and  it  was  still  desired  to  increase 
the  speed,  the  most  profitable  manner  of  doing  this  would 
be  to  increase  the  loading  by  reducing  the  plane  area.  So 
much  for  the  theoretical  aspect  of  the  problem. 

Purely  practical  considerations  strengthen  these  theor- 
etical conclusions,  in  so  far  as  they  clearly  prove  the  ad- 


FLIGHT  IN  STILL  AIR  43 

vantage  of  increasing  the  speed  by  the  reduction  of  plane 
area,  even  where  the  lift  remains  one  of  the  good  lift 
values. 

Indeed,  in  practice  the  two  methods  are  no  longer  equiva- 
lent in  the  latter  case,  since,  as  already  mentioned,  the 
reduction  of  the  wing  area  is  usually  accompanied  by  a 
decrease  in  the  weight  and  detrimental  surface. 

Generally  speaking,  it  is  therefore  preferable  to  take  the 
highest  rather  than  the  lowest  of  the  good  lifts  as  the 
normal  angle  of  incidence,  and  this  conclusion  tallies, 
moreover,  with  that  arising  from  the  danger  of  flying 
at  a  very  low  lift.  Finally,  the  normal  angle  would  thus 
remain  in  the  neighbourhood  of  the  optimum  angle, 
which  is  an  excellent  point  so  far  as  a  flat  gliding  angle 
is  concerned.* 

Obviously,  the  advantage  of  the  method  of  increasing 
the  speed  by  reducing  the  plane  area  over  that  consisting 
in  reducing  the  lift  becomes  greater  still  in  the  case  where 
the  latter  method,  if  applied,  would  lead  to  the  lift  being 
less  than  any  of  the  good  lift  values. 

The  disadvantage  of  greatly  reducing  the  plane  area 
to  obtain  fast  machines  is  the  heavy  loading  which  it 
entails  and  the  lessening  of  the  gliding  qualities.  The  best 
practical  solution  of  the  whole  problem  would  therefore 
appear  to  consist  in  a  judicious  compromise  between  these 
two  methods. 

As  usual,  a  concrete  example  will  aid  the  explanation 
given  above. 

Let  the  Breguet  aeroplane  already  referred  to  be  supposed 
to  fly  at  a  speed  of  92-8  km.  per  hour  with  a  lift  of  0-030, 
which  is  the  lowest  of  its  good  lift  values.  Table  II.  shows 
that  this  would  require  38  h.p. 

Another  machine  of  the  same  type,  and  having  the  same 
weight  and  detrimental  surface,  but  with  an  area  of  only 
20  sq.  m.  (instead  of  30),  in  order  to  attain  the  same  speed 

*  Chapter  X.  will  show  that  this  conclusion  is  strengthened  still 
further  by  the  effect  of  wind  on  the  aeroplane. 


44  FLIGHT  WITHOUT  FORMULA 

would  have  to  fly  at  0-040  lift,  which  is  also  one  of  the 
good  lift  values. 

The  necessary  calculations  would  show  that  the  latter 
machine,  like  the  former,  would  also  require  38  h.p.  This  is 
readily  explicable  on  the  score  that  the  drag  of  the  planes 
is  0-08  of  the  weight,  or  48  kg.,  while  the  head-resistance 
also  remains  constant  and  equal  to  64  kg.  (Table  II.). 

In  theory,  therefore,  there  is  nothing  to  choose  between 
either  solution.  But  in  practice  the  latter  is  preferable, 
since  the  20  sq.  m.  machine  would  in  all  likelihood  be  lighter 
and  possess  less  detrimental  surface. 

But  if  a  speed  of  113-6  km.  per  hour  were  to  be  attained, 
the  20  sq.  m.  aeroplane  has  a  distinct  advantage  both  in 
theory,  and  even  more  in  practice,  for  the  machine  with 
30  sq.  m.  area  would  have  to  fly  at  0-020  lift,  which  is 
lower  than  the  good  lift  values  belonging  to  the  Breguet 
plane  section,  which  would,  as  already  shown,  require 
useful  power  amounting  to  68  h.p.,  whereas  60  h.p.  would 
suffice  to  maintain  the  smaller  machine  in  flight  at  the 
same  speed. 

We  have  already  set  forth  the  good  lift  values  belonging 
to  the  Maurice  Farman,  Breguet,  and  Bleriot  XI.  plane 
sections,  and  the  corresponding  values  of  the  drag-to-lift 
ratio  or,  its  equivalent,  the  ratio  of  the  drag  of  the  planes 
to  the  weight  of  the  machine. . 

Reference  to  these  values  has  already  shown  that  slightly 
cambered  planes  are  undoubtedly  more  economical  for  low 
lift  values,  which  are  necessary  for  the  attainment  of  high 
speeds,  especially  in  the  case  of  lightly  loaded  planes,  as  in 
some  biplanes. 

But  the  good  lift  values  of  very  flat  planes  are  usually 
very  low — from  0-010  to  0-025  in  the  case  of  the  Maurice 
Farman — which  greatly  restricts  the  use  of  these  values, 
since,  as  already  stated,  it  is  doubtful  whether  hitherto  an 
aeroplane  has  flown  at  a  lower  lift  value  than  0-020. 

The  advantages  and  disadvantages  of  these  three  wing 
sections,  from  the  point  of  view  at  issue,  will  be  more  readily 


FLIGHT  IN  STILL  AIR 


45 


BL 

?RIOT 
0^ 

n°XI 

s 

\ 

Bf 

EGUE 

TO^ 

\ 

5 

/'~ 

~N 

1 

M.I 

'ARM* 

I/V 

\ 

1 

\ 

1 

I 

! 

1  o1 
•    1 
9 

,    i 

4  ! 

A 

O.Q8 


0.07 


0.08 


seen  by  plotting  their  polar  curves  in  one  diagram,   as 
shown  in  fig.  11. 

The  Breguet  and  Maurice  Farman  curves  intersect  at  a 
point  corresponding  to  the 
lift  value  0-030,  whence  we 
may  conclude  that  for  all  lift 
values  lower  than  this,  the 
Maurice  Farman  section  is 
the  better,*  but  for  all  lift 
values  higher  than  0-032 
(which  at  present  are  more 
usual),  the  Breguet  wing 
has  a  distinct  advantage. 
In  the  same  way,  the 
Maurice  Farman  is  better 
than  the  Bleriot  XI.  for 
lift  values  below  0-042, 
whereas  the  latter  is  better 
for  all  higher  lift  values. 

Finally,  the  Bleriot  XI. 
only  becomes  superior  to 
the  Breguet  for  lift  values 
in  excess  of  0-065,  which 
are  very  high  indeed,  and 
little  used  owing  to  the 
fact  that  they  correspond 
to  angles  in  the  neighbour- 
hood of  the  economical 
angle. 

To  apply  these  various 
considerations,  we  will  now 
proceed  to  fix  the  best  con- 
ditions in  which  to  obtain 


A 0.04 


0.03 


0.02 


0.01 


0.02 
Drag. 


0.01 


o'uo 


o.oq 


FIG.  11 


a   speed   of    160   km.   per 
hour  or  about  44-5  m.  per  second,  which  appears  to  be 
the  highest  speed  which  it  seems  at  present   possible   to 
*  Since  it  has  a  smaller  drag  for  the  same  lift. 


46  FLIGHT  WITHOUT  FORMULA 

reach,*  that  is,  by  assuming  it  to  be  possible  to  have  a 
loading  of  40  kg.  per  sq.  m.  of  surface  and  to  fly  at  a  lift- 
value  of  0-020. 

In  laying  down  this  limit  to  the  speed  of  flight  we  also 
stated  our  belief  that,  in  order  to  enable  it  to  be  attained, 
engines  developing  from  120  to  130  effective  h.p.  would 
have  to  be  employed. 

This  opinion  was  founded  on  the  results  of  M.  Eiffel's 
experiments,  from  which  it  was  concluded  that  an  aeroplane 
to  attain  this  speed  would  have  to  possess  a  detrimental 
surface  of  no  more  than  0-75  sq.  m. 

Now,  the  last  two  Aeronautical  Salons,  those  of  1911 
and  1912,  have  shown  a  very  clearly  marked  tendency 
among  constructors  to  reduce  all  passive  resistance  to  the 
lowest  possible  point,  especially  in  high-speed  machines, 
and  it  would  appear  that  in  this  direction  considerable 
progress  has  been  and  is  being  made. 

One  machine  in  particular,  the  Paulhan-Tatin  "  Torpille," 
specially  designed  with  this  point  in  view,  is  worthy  of 
notice. 

Its  designer,  the  late  M.  Tatin,  estimated  the  detrimental 
surface  of  this  aeroplane  at  no  more  than  0-26  sq.  m.,  and 
its  resistance  must  in  fact  have  been  very  low,  since  it  had 
the  fair-shaped  lines  of  a  bird,  every  part  of  the  structure 
capable  of  setting  up  resistance  being  enclosed  in  a  shell-like 
hull  from  which  only  the  landing  wheels,  reduced  to  the 
utmost  verge  of  simplicity,  projected. 

Taking  into  account  the  slightly  less  favourable  figures 
obtained  by  M.  Eiffel  from  experiments  with  a  scale  model, 
the  detrimental  surface  of  the  "  Torpille  "  may  be  estimated 
at  0-30  sq.  m. 

According  to  information  given  by  M.  Tatin  himself,  the 
weight  of  this  monoplane  was  450  kg.,  and  its  plane  area 
12-5  sq.  m. 

*  It  should,  however,  be  remembered  that  this  limit  has  actual^ 
been  exceeded,  with  a  loading  of  44  kg.  per  sq.  m.  and  a  lift  value  of 
slightly  less  than  0*020.  See  also  Translator's  note  on  p.  12. 


FLIGHT  IN  STILL  AIR  47 

Let  us  assume  that  the  planes,  which  were  only  very 
slightly  cambered,  were  about  equivalent  to  those  of  the 
Maurice  Farman,  and  that  they  flew  at  a  good  lift  coefficient. 
In  that  case  the  drag  of  the  planes  would  be  equal  to  0-065 
of  the  weight  of  the  machine,  or  to  29-5  kg. 

On  the  other  hand,  at  the  speed  of  44-5  m.  a  second,  the 
head-resistance = 

n    ffi  •  Detrimental      Square  of 

Coefficient.        ^^        ^  s^ 

0-08      x      0-3      X      1980  -  47-5  kg. 

The  propeller-thrust,  consequently,  the  sum  of  both 
resistances,  would =17  kg. 

The  useful  power  required  would  thus= 

77x44-5       , 

=about  45  h.p. 

75 

Propeller  efficiency  in  this  case  must  have  been  exception- 
ally high  (as  will  be  seen  hereafter),  and  was  probably  in 
the  region  of  80  per  cent. 

The  engine -power  required  to  give  the  "  Aero-Torpille  "  a 

A£* 

speed  of  160  km.  per  hour  must  therefore  have  been  — = 

0*8 

57  h.p.,  or  approximately  60  h.p. 

M.  Tatin  considered  that  he  could  obtain  the  same  result 
with  even  less  motive-power,  and  that  some  45  h.p.  would 
suffice.  If  this  proves  to  be  the  case,  the  detrimental 
surface  of  the  aeroplane  would  have  to  be  less  than  0-30 
sq.  m.  and  the  propeller  efficiency  even  higher  than  80  per 
cent.,  or  else — and  this  was  M.  Tatin's  own  opinion — the 
coefficients  derived  from  experiments  with  small  scale 
models  must  be  increased  for  full-size  machines,  their 
value  possibly  depending  in  some  degree  on  the  speed.* 

*  No  proof,  as  a  matter  of  fact,  was  possible  owing  to  the  short  life  of 
the  machine.  But  the  results  obtained  from  other  machines  in  which 
stream-lining  had  been  carried  out  to  an  unusual  degree,  such  as  the 
Deperdussin  "  monocoque  " — which,  with  an  engine  of  85-90  effective 
h.p.,  only  achieved  163  km.  per  hour — would  appear  to  show  that  the 


48  FLIGHT  WITHOUT  FORMULA 

It  should  also  be  noted  that,  in  order  to  attain  160  km. 
per  hour,  the  Tatin  "  Torpille  "  would  have  to  fly  at  a  lift 
coefficient  equal  to 

36  (loading)  =0-018 

1980  (square  of  the  speed) 

Perhaps  it  will  seem  strange  that  simply  by  estimating 
the  value  of  the  detrimental  surface  at  0-30  instead  of  the 
previous  estimate  of  0-75,  the  motive  power  required  for 
flight  at  160  km.  per  hour  should  have  been  reduced  by 
one-half.  Yet  there  is  no  need  for  surprise  ;  for  if  the 
method  for  calculating  the  useful  power  necessary  for 
horizontal  flight  (set  forth  in  Chapter  II.,  and  since  applied 
more  than  once)  is  carefully  examined,  it  becomes  evident 
that,  whereas  that  portion  of  the  power  required  only  for 
lifting  remains  proportional  to  the  speed,  the  remaining 
portion,  used  to  overcome  all  passive  resistance,  is  propor- 
tional to  the  cube  of  the  speed. 

For  this  reason  it  is  of  such  great  importance  to  cut  down 
the  detrimental  surface  hi  designing  a  high-speed  machine. 

Thus,  in  the  present  case,  of  the  46  h.p.  available,  only 
18  h.p.  are  required  to  lift  the  machine.  The  remain- 
ing 28  h.p.,  therefore,  are  necessary  to  overcome  passive 
resistance. 

Had  the  detrimental  surface  been  0-75  sq.  m.  instead  of 
0-30,  the  useful  power  absorbed  in  overcoming  passive 
resistance  would  have  been 

Q.75x28=7()  h       mgtead       2g 
0-30 

To  complete  our  examination  of  the  high-speed  aeroplane, 
Table  IV.  has  been  drawn  up,  and  includes  the  values  of  the 
useful  power  required  on  the  one  hand  for  the  flight  of  a 
Maurice  Farman  plane  at  a  good  incidence,  and  weighing 

estimate  of  0'30  sq.  m.  for  the  detrimental  surface  was  too  low,  a  con- 
clusion supported  by  M.  Eiffel's  experiments. 

It  is  doubtful  whether  an  aeroplane  has  yet  been  built  with  a  detri- 
mental surface  of  much  less  than  half  a  square  metre. 


FLIGHT  IN  STILL  AIR 


49 


1  ton  (metric),  and  on  the  other  for  driving  through 
air  a  detrimental  surface  of  1  sq.  m.  at  speeds  from 
to  200  km.  per  hour. 

TABLE  IV. 


the 
150 


Speed. 

lllL 

II.  J^s 

|3*g*-i 

|||.si 

Km. 

Metres 

Drag  of 
Planes  (kg.)   ; 
per  aeroplane 
ton. 

-sll^l 

1151II 

fsflll 

Ijjn 

per  hr. 

per  see. 

"*  £  ^  >>  " 

3  f  *"  ^oo  g 

^  f,  2  -S  ^ 

g  *  ^*> 

(2«S     ^6 

}S  «se^     8 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

150 

41-6 

65 

36 

138 

76 

160 

44-4^ 

•slsf 

38 

157 

93 

170 

47-2 

l?|ol 

41 

178 

112 

180 
190 

50-0 
52-8 

43 
46 

200 
232 

132 
157 

200 

55-6, 

-**  K     5 

48 

248 

184 

•^       o 

According  to  this  Table,  an  aeroplane  weighing  500  kg., 
and  possessing,  as  we  supposed  in  the  case  of  the  Tatin 
"  Torpille,"  a  detrimental  surface  of  0-30  sq.  m.,  would  re- 
quire a  useful  power  of  about  80  h.p.  to  attain  a  speed  of 
200  km.  per  hour.  This  high  speed  could  therefore  be 
achieved  with  a  power-plant  consisting  of  a  100-h.p.  motor 
and  a  propeller  of  80  per  cent,  efficiency.  It  could  only  be 
obtained — just  as  the  "  Torpille  "  could  only  achieve  160 
km.  per  hour  at  a  lift  coefficient  of  0-018 — with  a  plane 
loading  of  about  56  kg.  per  sq.  m.  Consequently,  the 

area  of  the  planes  would  be  only  -=^-  =  9  sq.  m. 

OD 

If  the  theoretical  qualities  of  design  of  machines  of  the 
"  Torpille  "  type  are  borne  out  by  practice  *  our  present 

*  But,  according  to  what  has  already  been  said,  this  does  not  seem  to 
be  the  case.  Hence,  a  speed  of  200  km.  per  hour  is  not  likely  to  be 


50  FLIGHT  WITHOUT  FORMULA 

motors  would  appear  to  be  sufficient  to  give  them  a  speed 
of  200  km.  per  hour.  But  this  would  necessitate  a  very 
heavy  loading  and  a  lift  coefficient  much  lower  than  any 
hitherto  employed — a  proceeding  which,  as  we  have  seen,  is 
not  without  danger.  Moreover,  one  cannot  but  be  uneasy 
at  the  thought  of  a  machine  weighing  perhaps  500  or  600 
kg.  alighting  at  this  speed. 

This,  beyond  all  manner  of  doubt,  is  the  main  obstacle 
which  the  high-speed  aeroplane  will  have  to  overcome,  and 
this  it  can  only  do  by  possessing  speed  variation  to  an 
exceptional  degree.  We  will  return  to  this  aspect  of  the 
matter  subsequently. 

To-day  an  aeroplane,  weighing  with  full  load  a  certain 
weight  and  equipped  with  an  engine  giving  a  certain  power, 
in  practice  flies  horizontally  at  a  given  speed. 

These  three  factors,  weight,  speed,  and  power,  are  always 
met  with  whatever  the  vehicle  of  locomotion  under  con- 
sideration, and  their  combination  enables  us  to  determine 
as  the  most  efficient  from  a  mechanical  point  of  view  that 
vehicle  or  machine  which  requires  the  least  power  to  attain, 
for  a  constant  weight,  the  same  speed. 

Hence,  what  we  may  term  the,  mechanical  efficiency 
of  an  aeroplane  may  be  measured  through  its  weight 
multiplied  by  its  normal  speed  and  divided  by  the  motive- 
power. 

If  the  speed  is  given  in  metres  per  second  and  the  power 
in  h.p.,  this  quotient  must  be  divided  by  75. 

RULE. — The  mechanical  efficiency  of  an  aeroplane  is 
obtained  by  dividing  its  weight  multiplied  by  its  normal 
speed  (in  metres  per  second)  by  75  times  the  power,  or,  what 
is  the  same  thing,  by  dividing  by  270  times  the  power  the 
product  of  the  weight  multiplied  by  the  speed  in  kilometres 
per  hour. 

EXAMPLE. — An  aeroplane  weighing  950  kg.,  and  driven 

attained  with  a  100-h.p.  motor.  Whether  an  engine  developing  140  h.p. 
or  more  will  succeed  in  this  can  only  be  shown  by  the  future,  and  perhaps 
at  no  distant  date.  See  footnote,  p.  12. 


FLIGHT  IN  STILL  AIR  51 

by  a,  lOQ-h.p.  engine,  flies  at  a  normal  speed  of  117  km.  per 
hour.     What  is  its  mechanical  efficiency  ? 

950x117 


Reference  to  what  has  already  been  said  will  show  that 
mechanical  efficiency  is  also  expressed  by  the  propeller 
efficiency  divided  by  the  gliding  angle  corresponding  to 
normal  incidence.  This  is  due  to  the  fact  that,  firstly,  the 
useful  power  required  for  horizontal  flight  is  the  75th  part 
of  the  weight  multiplied  by  the  speed  and  the  normal 
gliding  angle,  and,  secondly,  because  the  motive  power  is 
obtained  by  dividing  the  useful  power  by  the  propeller 
efficiency.  Accordingly,  a  machine  with  a  propeller  efficiency 
of  70  per  cent.,  and  with  a  normal  gliding  angle  of  0-17, 

would  have  a  mechanical  efficiency——  —  =4-12. 

This  conception  of  mechanical  efficiency  enables  us  to 
judge  an  aeroplane  as  a  whole  from  its  practical  flying 
performances  without  having  recourse  to  the  propeller 
efficiency  and  the  normal  gliding  angle,  which  are  difficult 
to  measure  with  any  accuracy. 

Even  yesterday  a  machine  possessing  mechanical  efficiency 
superior  to  4  was  still,  aerodynamically  considered,  an 
excellent  aeroplane.  But  the  progress  manifest  in  the 
last  Salon  entitles  us,  and  with  confidence,  to  be  more 
exacting  in  the  future. 

Hence,  the  average  mechanical  efficiency  of  the  ordinary 
run  of  aeroplanes  enables  us  in  some  measure  to  fix  definite 
periods  in  the  history  of  aviation.  In  1910,  for  instance, 
the  mean  mechanical  efficiency  was  roughly  3-33,  on  which 
we  based  the  statement  contained  in  a  previous  work  that, 
in  practice,  1  h.p.  transports  250  kg.  in  the  case  of  an  average 
aeroplane  at  1  m.  per  second. 

This  rule,  which  obviously  only  yielded  approximate 
results,  could  be  applied  both  quickly  and  easily,  and  enabled 
one,  for  instance,  to  form  a  very  fair  idea  of  the  results 


52  FLIGHT  WITHOUT  FORMULA 

that  would  be  attained  in  the  Military  Trials  of  1911.  In 
fact,  according  to  the  rules  of  this  competition,  the  aero- 
planes would  have  to  weigh  on  an  average  900  kg.  To 

give  them  a  speed  of  70  km.  per  hour  or  — -  m.  per  second, 

3'6 

c       •  i  A     •         90°  v  70 

for  instance,  the  rule  quoted  gives  — —  x^-^- 

250     o'b 

But  250  X  3-6  remains  the  denominator  whatever  the  speed 
it  is  desired  to  attain,  and  is  exactly  equal  to  900,  the  weight 
of  the  aeroplane.  From  this,  one  deduced  that  in  this  case 
the  power  required  in  h.p.  was  equivalent  to  the  speed  in 
kilometres  per  hour  : — 

70  km.  per  hour 70  h.p. 

80            „             .....     80  h.p. 
100  ,,  100  h.p. 

If,  on  the  other  hand,  certain  machines  during  these  trials, 
driven  by  engines  developing  less  than  100  effective  h.p., 
flew  at  over  100  km.  per  hour,  this  was  due  simply  to  their 
mechanical  efficiency  being  better  than  the  3-33  which 
obtained  in  1910,  and  was  already  too  low  for  1911. 

At  the  present  day,  therefore,  accepting  4  as  the  average 
mechanical  efficiency,  the  practical  rule  given  above  should 
be  modified  as  follows  : — 

RULE. — 1  h.p.  transports  300  kg.  of  an  average  aeroplane 
at  1  m.  per  second. 


CHAPTER  IV 

FLIGHT  IN  STILL  AIR 
THE  POWER-PLANT 

BOTH  this  chapter  and  the  next  will  be  devoted  to  the 
power-plant  of  the  aeroplane  as  it  is  in  use  at  the  present 
time.  This  will  entail  an  even  closer  consideration  of  the 
part  played  by  the  motive-power  in  horizontal  and  oblique 
flight,  and  will  finally  lead  to  several  important  conclusions 
concerning  the  variable-speed  aeroplane  and  the  solution  of 
the  problem  of  speed  variation. 

The  power-plant  of  an  aeroplane  consists  in  every  case 
of  an  internal  combustion  motor  and  one  or  more  propellers. 
Since  the  present  work  is  mainly  theoretical,  no  description 
of  aviation  motors  will  be  attempted,  and  only  those  of 
their  properties  will  be  dealt  with  which  affect  the  working 
of  the  propeller. 

Besides,  the  motor  works  on  principles  which  are  beyond 
the  realm  of  aerodynamics,  so  that  from  our  point  of  view 
its  study  has  only  a  minor  interest.  It  forms,  it  is  true,  an 
essential  auxiliary  of  the  aeroplane,  but  only  an  auxiliary. 
If  it  is  not  yet  perfectly  reliable,  there  is  no  doubt  that  it 
will  be  in  a  few  years,  and  this  quite  independently  of  any 
progress  in  the  science  of  aerodynamics. 

Deeply  interesting,  on  the  other  hand,  are  the  problems 
relating  to  the  aeroplane  itself,  or  to  that  mysterious 
contrivance  which,  as  it  were,  screws  itself  into  the  air 
and  transmutes  into  thrust  the  power  developed  by  the 
engine. 


54  FLIGHT  WITHOUT  FORMULA 

The  power  developed  by  an  internal  combustion  engine 
varies  with  the  number  of  revolutions  at  which  the  resist- 
ance it  encounters  enables  it  to  turn.  There  is  a  generally 
recognised  ratio  between  the  power  developed  and  the  speed 
of  revolution. 

Thus,  if  a  motor,  normally  developing  50  h.p.  at  1200 
revolutions  per  minute,  only  turns  at  960  revolutions  per 

50  X  960 
minute,  it  will  develop  no  more  than  =40  h.p. 

The  rule,  however,  is  not  wholly  accurate,  and  the 
variation  of  the  power  developed  by  a  motor  with  the 
number  of  revolutions  per  minute  is  more  accurately  shown 
in  the  curve  in  fig.  12.  It  should  be  clearly  understood 
that  the  curve  only  relates  to  a  motor  with  the  throttle 
fully  open,  and  where  the  variation  in  its  speed  of  rotation 
is  only  due  to  the  resistance  it  has  to  overcome. 

For  the  speed  of  rotation  may  be  reduced  in  another 
manner — by  shutting  off  a  portion  of  the  petrol  mixture  by 
means  of  the  throttle.  The  engine  then  runs  "throttled 
down,"  which  is  the  usual  case  with  a  motor  car. 

In  such  a  case,  if  the  petrol  supply  is  constant,  the  curve 
in  fig.  12  grows  flatter,  with  its  crest  corresponding  to  a 
lower  speed  of  rotation  the  more  the  throttle  is  closed  and 
the  explosive  mixture  reduced. 

Fig.  13  shows  a  series  of  curves  which  were  prepared  at 
my  request  by  the  managing  director  of  the  Gnome  Engine 
Company  ;  these  represent  the  variation  in  power  with  the 
speed  of  rotation  of  a  50-h.p.  engine,  normally  running  at 
1200  revolutions  per  minute,  with  the  throttle  closed  to  a 
varying  extent. 

In  practice,  it  is  easier  to  throttle  down  certain  engines 
than  others  ;  with  some  it  is  constantly  done,  with  others 
it  is  more  difficult. 

Even  to-day  the  working  of  a  propeller  remains  one  of 
the  most  difficult  problems  awaiting  solution  in  the  whole 
range  of  aerodynamics,  and  the  motion,  possibly  whirling, 
of  the  air  molecules  as  they  are  drawn  into  the  revolving 


FLIGHT  IN  STILL  AIR 

Horse-Power. 


55 


&    3     3.. 


56 


FLIGHT  WITHOUT  FORMULA 


Horse-Power. 

.5   $     §     *     §    J?     3    3     3    ^      Lja__2 

/ 

\ 

/ 

\ 

\ 

\\ 

1 

\\ 

\ 

7 

\ 

\ 

C 

\ 

\ 

( 

5 

/ 

\\ 

I 

\ 

\ 

\ 

\ 

\\ 

V 

\\ 

\ 

\L 

\ 

\ 

\ 

FLIGHT  IN   STILL  AIR  57 

propeller  has  never  yet  been  explained  in  a  manner  satis- 
factory to  the  dictates  of  science. 

All  said  and  done,  the  rough  method  of  likening  a  propeller 
to  a  screw  seems  the  most  likely  to  explain  the  results 
obtained  from  experiments  with  propellers. 

The  pitch  of  a  screw  is  the  distance  it  advances  in  one 
revolution  in  a  solid  body.  The  term  may  be  applied  in  a 
similar  capacity  to  a  propeller.  The  pitch  of  a  propeller, 
therefore,  is  the  distance  it  would  travel  forwards  during 
one  revolution  if  it  could  be  made  to  penetrate  a  solid  body. 
But  a  propeller  obtains  its  thrust  from  the  reaction  of  an 
elusive  tenuous  fluid.  Clearly,  therefore,  it  will  not  travel 
forward  as  great  a  distance  for  each  revolution  as  it  would 
if  screwing  itself  into  a  solid. 

The  distance  of  its  forward  travel  is  consequently  always 
smaller  than  the  pitch,  and  the  difference  is  known  as  the 
slip.  But,  contrary  to  an  opinion  which  is  often  held,  this 
slip  should  not  be  as  small  as  possible,  or  even  be  altogether 
eliminated,  for  the  propeller  to  work  under  the  best  con- 
ditions. 

Without  attempting  to  lay  down  precisely  the  phenomena 
produced  in  the  working  of  this  mysterious  contrivance,  we 
may  readily  assume  that  at  every  point  the  blade  meets  the 
air,  or  "  bites  "  into  it,  at  a  certain  angle  depending,  among 
other  things,  on  the  speed  of  rotation  and  of  forward  travel 
of  the  blade  and  of  the  distance  of  each  point  from  the 
axis. 

Just  as  the  plane  of  an  aeroplane  meeting  the  air  along 
its  chord  would  produce  no  lift,  so  a  propeller  travelling 
forward  at  its  pitch  speed — that  is,  without  any  slip — 
would  meet  the  air  at  each  point  of  the  blades  at  no  angle 
of  incidence,  and  consequently  would  produce  no  thrust. 

The  slip  and  angle  of  incidence  are  clearly  connected 
together,  and  it  will  be  easily  understood  that  a  given 
propeller  running  at  a  given  number  of  revolutions  will 
have  a  best  slip,  and  hence  a  lest  forward  travel,  just  as 
a  given  plane  has  a  best  angle  of  incidence. 


58  FLIGHT  WITHOUT  FORMULA 

When  the  propeller  rotates  without  moving  forward 
through  the  air,  as  when  an  aeroplane  is  held  stationary  on 
the  ground,  it  simply  acts  as  a  ventilator,  throwing  the  air 
backwards,  and  exerts  a  thrust  on  the  machine  to  which 
it  is  attached.  But  it  produces  no  useful  power,  for  in 
mechanics  power  always  connotes  motion. 

But  if  the  machine  were  not  fixed,  as  in  the  case  of  an 
aeroplane,  and  could  yield  to  the  thrust  of  the  propeller, 
it  would  be  driven  forward  at  a  certain  speed,  and  the 
product  of  this  speed  multiplied  by  the  thrust  and  divided 
by  75  represents  the  useful  power  produced  by  the  pro- 
peller. 

On  the  other  hand,  in  order  to  make  the  propeller  rotate 
it  must  be  acted  upon  by  a  certain  amount  of  motive  power. 
The  relation  between  the  useful  power  actually  developed 
and  the  motive  power  expended  is  the  efficiency  of  the 
propeller. 

But  the  conditions  under  which  this  is  accomplished 
vary,  firstly,  with  the  number  of  revolutions  per  minute 
at  which  the  propeller  turns,  and  secondly,  with  the  speed 
of  its  forward  travel,  so  that  it  will  be  readily  understood 
that  the  efficiency  of  a  propeller  may  vary  according  to  the 
conditions  under  which  it  is  used. 

Experiments  lately  conducted  —  notably  by  Major 
Dorand  at  the  military  laboratory  of  Chalais-Meudoii  and 
by  M.  Eiffel — have  shown  that  the  efficiency  remains 
approximately  constant  so  long  as  the  ratio  of  the  forward 
speed  to  its  speed  of  revolution,  i.e.  the  forward  travel  per 
revolution,  remains  constant. 

For  instance,  if  a  propeller  is  travelling  forward  at  15 
m.  per  second  and  revolving  at  10  revolutions  per  second, 
its  efficiency  is  the  same  as  if  it  travelled  forward  at  30 
m.  per  second  and  revolved  at  20  revolutions  per  second, 
since  in  both  cases  its  forward  travel  per  revolution  is 
1-50  m. 

But  the  propeller  efficiency  varies  with  the  amount  of 
its  forward  travel  per  revolution. 


FLIGHT  IN  STILL  AIR  59 

Hence,  when  the  propeller  revolves  attached  to  a 
stationary  point,  as  during  a  bench  test,  so  that  its  forward 
travel  is  zero,  its  efficiency  is  also  zero,  for  the  only 
effect  of  the  motive  power  expended  to  rotate  the  propeller 
is  to  produce  a  thrust,  which  in  this  instance  is  exerted 
upon  an  immovable  body,  and  therefore  is  wasted  so  far 
as  the  production  of  useful  power  is  concerned. 

Similarly,  when  the  forward  travel  of  the  propeller  per 
revolution  is  equal  to  the  pitch,  and  hence  when  there  is 
no  slip,  it  screws  itself  into  the  air  like  a  screw  into  a 
solid  ;  the  blades  have  no  angle  of  incidence,  and  therefore 
produce  no  thrust.* 

Between  the  two  values  of  the  forward  travel  per 
revolution  at  which  the  thrust  disappears,  there  is  a  value 
corresponding  on  the  other  hand  to  maximum  thrust. 
This  has  already  been  pointed  out,  and  has  been  termed 
the  best  forward  travel  per  revolution. 

This  shows  that  the  thrust  of  one  and  the  same  propeller 
may  vary  from  zero  to  a  maximum  value  obtained  with  a 
certain  definite  value  of  the  forward  travel.  The  variation 
of  the  thrust  with  the  forward  travel  per  revolution  may 
be  plotted  in  a  curve.  A  single  curve  may  be  drawn  to 
show  this  variation  for  a  whole  family  of  propellers,  geometri- 
cally similar  and  only  differing  one  from  the  other  by  their 
diameter. 

Experiments,  in  fact,  have  shown  that  such  propellers 
had  approximately  the  same  thrust  when  their  forward 
travel  per  revolution  remained  proportional  to  their 
diameter. 

Thus  two  propellers  of  similar  type,  with  diameters 
measuring  respectively  2  and  3m.,  would  give  the  same 
thrust  if  the  former  travelled  1-2  m.  per  revolution  and 

*  This  could  never  take  place  if  the  vehicle  to  which  the  propeller 
was  attached  derived  its  speed  solely  from  the  propeller ;  it  could  only 
occur  in  practice  if  motive  power  from  some  outside  source  imparted 
to  the  vehicle  a  greater  speed  than  that  obtained  from  the  propeller- 
thrust  alone. 


60 


FLIGHT  WITHOUT  FORMULA 


the  latter  1-8  m.,  since  the  ratio  of  forward  travel  to 
diameter =0-60. 

This  has  led  M.  Eiffel  to  adopt  as  his  variable  quantity 
not  the  forward  travel  per  revolution,  but  the  ratio  of  this 
advance  to  the  diameter,  which  ratio  may  be  termed 
reduced  forward  travel  or  advance. 

Fig.  14,  based  on  his  researches,  shows  the  variation  in 
thrust  of  a  family  of  propellers  when  the  reduced  advance 
assumes  a  series  of  gradually  increasing  values.* 

The  maximum  thrust  efficiency  (about  65  per  cent,  in 
this  case)  corresponds  to  a  reduced  advance  value  of  0-6. 


Reduced  Advance. 
FIG.  14. 

Hence  a  propeller  of  the  type  under  consideration,  with  a 
diameter  of  2-5  m.,  in  order  to  give  its  highest  thrust, 
would  have  to  have  a  forward  travel  of  2-5  xO'6=l-2  m. 
Consequently,  if  in  normal  flight  it  turned  at  1200 
revolutions  per  minute,  or  20  revolutions  per  second,  the 
machine  it  propelled  ought  to  fly  at  1-20x20=24  m.  per 
second. 

For  all  propellers  belonging  to  the  same  family  there 
exists,  therefore,  a  definite  reduced  advance  which  is  more 

*  Actually,  M.  Eiffel  found  that  for  the  same  value  of  the  reduced 
advance  the  thrust  was  not  absolutely  constant,  but  rather  that  it 
tended  to  grow  as  the  number  of  revolutions  of  the  propeller  increased. 
Accordingly,  he  drew  up  a  series  of  curves,  but  these  approximate  very 
closely  one  to  another. 


FLIGHT  IN  STILL  AIR 


61 


favourable  than  any  other,  and  may  thence  be  termed  the 
best  reduced  advance,  which  enables  any  of  these  propellers 
to  produce  their  maximum  thrust. 

It  has  been  shown  that  all  geometrically  similar  pro- 
pellers— in  other  words,  belonging  to  the  same  family — 
give  approximately  the  same  maximum  thrust  efficiency. 

But  when  the  shape  of  the  propeller  is  changed,  this 
maximum  thrust  value  also  varies. 

It  depends  more  especially  on  the  ratio  between  the 
pitch  of  the  propeller  and  its  diameter,  which  is  known  as 
the  pitch  ratio. 

But,  as  the  value  of  the  highest  thrust  varies  with  the 
pitch  ratio,  so  does  that  of  the  best  reduced  advance  corre- 
sponding to  this  highest  thrust. 

In  the  following  Table  V.,  based  on  Commandant  Dorand's 
researches  at  the  military  laboratory  of  Chalais-Meudon 
with  a  particular  type  of  propeller,  are  shown  the  values 
of  the  maximum  thrust  and  the  best  reduced  advance 
corresponding  to  propellers  of  varying  pitch  ratio. 

TABLE  V. 


Pitch  ratio      . 

0-5 

0-6 

0-7 

0-8 

0-9 

1-0 

I'M 

Maximum  thrust  efficiency 

0-45 

0'53 

0'61 

0-70 

0-76 

0-80 

0-84 

Best  reduced  advance 

0"29 

0-38 

0-47 

0-55 

0-63 

072 

0-84 

EXAMPLE. — A  propeller  of  the  Chalais-Meudon  type  with 
2-5  m.  diameter  and  2  m.  pitch  turns  at  1200  revolutions 
per  minute. 

1.  What  is  the  value  of  its  highest  thrust  efficiency  ? 

2.  What  should  be  the  speed  of  the  aeroplane  it  drives  in 
order  to  obtain  this  highest  thrust  ? 

The  pitch  ratio  is  — ~=0-8. 
Table   V.   immediately   solves   the   first   question :    the 


62  FLIGHT  WITHOUT  FORMULA 

highest  thrust  efficiency  is  0-7.  Further,  this  table  shows 
that  to  obtain  this  thrust  the  reduced  advance  should 
=0-55.  In  other  words,  the  speed  of  the  machine  divided 
by  50  (the  number  of  revolutions  per  second,  50  x  diameter, 
2-5)  should  =0-55. 

Hence  the  speed  =0-55  x  50=27-5  m.  per  second,  or 
99  km.  per  hour. 

Again,  Table  V.  proves,  according  to  Commandant 
Dorand's  experiments,  that  even  at  the  present  time  it  is 
possible  to  produce  propellers  giving  the  excellent  efficiency 
of  84  per  cent,  under  the  most  favourable  running  conditions, 
but  only  if  the  pitch  ratio  is  greater  than  unity — that  is, 
when  the  pitch  is  equal  to  or  greater  than  the  diameter. 

It  is  further  clear  that,  since  the  best  reduced  advance 
increases  with  the  pitch  ratio,  the  speed  at  which  the 
machine  should  fly  for  the  propeller  (turning  at  a  constant 
number  of  revolutions  per  minute)  to  give  maximum 
efficiency  is  the  higher  the  greater  the  pitch  ratio.  This  is 
why  propellers  with  a  high  pitch  ratio,  or  the  equivalent, 
a  high  maximum  thrust,  are  more  especially  adaptable 
for  high-speed  aeroplanes.  At  the  same  time,  they  are 
equally  efficient  when  fitted  to  slower  machines,  provided 
that  the  revolutions  per  minute  are  reduced  by  means  of 
gearing. 

These  truths  are  only  slowly  gaining  acceptance  to-day — 
although  the  writer  advocated  them  ardently  long  since, — 
and  this  notwithstanding  the  fact  that  the  astonishing 
dynamic  efficiency  of  the  first  motor-driven  aeroplane 
which  in  1903  enabled  the  Wrights,  to  their  enduring 
glory,  to  make  the  first  flight  in  history,  was  largely  due  to 
the  use  of  propellers  with  a  very  high  pitch  ratio,  that  is, 
of  high  efficiency,  excellently  well  adapted  to  the  relatively 
low  speed  of  the  machine  by  the  employment  of  a  good 
gearing  system. 

The  only  thing  that  seemed  to  have  been  taught  by  this 
fine  example  was  the  use  of  large  diameter  propellers. 

This  soon  became  the  fashion.     But,  instead  of  gearing 


FLIGHT  IN  STILL  AIR  63 

down  these  large  propellers,  as  the  Wrights  cleverly  did, 
they  were  usually  driven  direct  by  the  motor,  and  so  that 
the  latter  could  revolve  at  its  normal  number  of  revolutions 
the  pitch  had  perforce  to  be  reduced. 

As  the  pitch  decreased,  so  the  maximum  efficiency  and 
the  best  reduced  advance — that  is,  the  most  suitable  flying 
speed — fell  off,  while  at  the  same  time  the  development  of 
the  monoplane  actually  led  to  a  considerable  increase  in 
flying  speed. 

The  result  was  that  fast  machines  had  to  be  equipped 
with  propellers  of  very  low  efficiency  which,  even  so,  they 
were  unable  to  attain,  as  the  flying  speed  of  the  aeroplane 
was  too  high  for  them.  At  most  these  propellers  might 
have  done  for  a  dirigible,  but  they  would  have  been  poor 
even  at  that. 

Fortunately,  a  few  constructors  were  aware  of  these 
facts,  and  to  this  alone  we  may  ascribe  the  extraordinary 
superiority  shown  towards  the  end  of  1910  by  a  few  types 
of  aeroplanes,  among  which  we  may  name,  without  fear 
of  being  accused  of  bias,  those  of  M.  Breguet  and  the  late 
M.  Nieuport. 

But,  since  then,  progress  has  been  on  the  right  lines, 
and  those  who  visited  the  last  three  Aero  shows  must  have 
been  struck  with  the  general  decrease  in  propeller  diameter, 
which  has  been  accompanied  by  an  increase  in  efficiency 
and  adaptability  to  the  aeroplanes  of  to-day. 

To  take  but  one  final  example  :  the  fast  Paulhan-Tatin 
"  Torpille,"  already  referred  to,  had  a  pitch  ratio  greater 
than  unity.  For  this  reason  its  efficiency  was  estimated  in 
the  neighbourhood  of  80  per  cent. 

The  foregoing  considerations  may  be  summed  up  as 
follows  :  — 

1.  The  same  propeller  gives  an  efficiency  varying  accord- 
ing to  the  conditions  in  which  it  is  run,  depending  on  its 
forward  travel  per  revolution. 

2.  Each  propeller  has  a  speed  of  forward  travel  or  advance 
enabling  it  to  produce  its  highest  efficiency. 


64  FLIGHT   WITHOUT   FORMULA 

3.  For  propellers  of  identical  type  but  different  diameters 
the  various  speeds  of  forward  travel  corresponding  to  the 
same   thrust   are   proportional  to   the   diameters,   whence 
arises  the  factor  of  reduced  advance,  which,  in  other  words, 
is  the  ratio  between  the  forward  travel  per  revolution  and 
the  diameter. 

4.  The  maximum  efficiency  of  a  propeller  and  its  best 
reduced  advance  depend  on  its  shape,  and  more  especially 
on  its  pitch  ratio. 

Hitherto  the  propeller  has  been  considered  as  a  separate 
entity,  but  in  practice  it  works  in  conjunction  with  a 
petrol  motor,  whether  by  direct  drive  or  gearing. 

But  the  engine  and  propeller  together  constitute  the 
power-plant,  and  this  new  entity  possesses,  by  reason  of  the 
peculiar  nature  of  the  petrol  motor,  certain  properties 
which,  differing  materially  from  those  of  the  propeller  by 
itself,  must  therefore  be  considered  separately. 

First,  we  will  deal  with  the  case  of  a  propeller  driven 
direct  off  the  engine. 

Let  us  assume  that  on  a  truck  forming  part  of  a  railway 
tram  there  has  been  installed  a  propelling  plant  (wholly 
insufficient  to  move  the  tram)  consisting  of  a  50-h.p.  motor 
running  at  1200  revolutions  per  minute,  and  of  a  propeller, 
while  a  dynamometer  enables  the  thrust  to  be  constantly 
measured  and  a  revolution  indicator  shows  the  revolutions 
per  minute. 

The  tram  being  stationary,  the  motor  is  started. 

The  revolutions  will  then  attain  a  certain  number,  950 
revolutions  per  minute  for  instance,  at  which  the  power 
developed  by  the  motor  is  exactly  absorbed  by  the  propeller. 
The  latter  will  exert  a  certain  thrust  upon  the  train  (which, 
of  course,  remains  stationary),  indicated  by  the  dynamo- 
meter and  amounting  to,  say,  150  kg. 

The  power  developed  by  the  motor  at  950  revolutions  per 
minute  is  shown  by  the  power  curve  of  the  motor,  which 
we  will  assume  to  be  that  shown  in  fig.  12.  This  would 
give  about  43  h.p.  at  950  revolutions  per  minute. 


FLIGHT  IN  STILL  AIR  65 

The  useful  power,  on  the  other  hand,  is  zero,  since  no 
movement  has  taken  place. 

Now  let  the  train  be  started  and  run  at,  say,  10  km.  per 
hour  or  5  m.  per  second,  the  motor  still  continuing  to  run. 

The  revolutions  per  minute  of  the  propeller  would 
immediately  increase,  and  finally  amount  to,  say,  1010 
revolutions  per  minute. 

The  power  developed  by  the  motor  would  therefore  have 
increased  and  would  now  amount,  according  to  fig.  12,  to 
45-5  h.p. 

But  at  the  same  time  the  dynamometer  would  show  a 
smaller  thrust — about  130  kg. 

But  this  thrust  would,  though  in  only  a  slight  degree, 
have  assisted  to  propel  the  train  forward  and  the  useful 

power  produced  by  the  propeller  would  be =8*7  h.p. 

The  acceleration  in  rotary  velocity  and  the  decrease  in 
thrust  which  are  thus  experienced  are  to  be  explained  on 
the  score  that  the  blades,  travelling  forward  at  the  same 
time  that  they  revolve,  meet  the  air  at  a  smaller  angle 
than  when  revolving  while  the  propeller  is  stationary. 
In  these  conditions,  therefore,  the  propeller  turns  at 
a  greater  number  of  revolutions,  though  the  thrust  falls 
off. 

If  the  speed  of  the  train  were  successively  increased  to 
10,  15  and  20  m.  per  second,  the  following  values  would  be 
established  each  time  : — 

The  normal  number  of  revolutions  of  the  power-plant ; 

The  corresponding  power  developed  by  the  motor  ; 

The  useful  power  produced  by  the  propeller. 

We  could  then  plot  curves  similar  to  that  shown  in  fig.  15, 
giving  for  every  speed  of  the  train  the  corresponding 
motive  power  (shown  in  the  upper  curve)  and  the  useful 
power  (lower  curve).  The  dotted  lines  and  numbers  give 
the  number  of  revolutions. 

The  lower  curve  representing  the  variation  in  the  useful 
power  produced  by  the  propeller  according  to  the  forward 


66 


FLIGHT  WITHOUT  FORMULA 


speed  of  travel  is  of  capital  importance,  and  will  hereafter 
be  referred  to  as  the  power-plant  curve. 

Usually  the  highest  points  of  the  two  curves,  L  and  M, 
do  not  correspond.  This  simply  means  that  generally,  and 
unless  precautions  have  been  taken  to  avoid  this,  the  pro- 
peller gives  its  maximum  thrust,  and  accordingly  has  its 
best  reduced  advance,  at  a  forward  speed  which  does  not 


950 
40 


20 


k-d  of  fliffkt  (in 


Q   i 


FIG.  15. 


enable  the  motor  to  turn  at  its  normal  number  of  revolu- 
tions, 1200  in  the  present  case,  and  consequently  to  develop 
its  full  power  of  50  h.p. 

It  is  even  now  apparent,  therefore,  that  one  cannot  mount 
any  propeller  on  any  motor,  if  direct-driven,  and  that  there 
exists,  apart  altogether  from  the  machine  which  they  drive, 
a  mutual  relation  between  the  two  parts  constituting  the 
power-plant,  which  we  will  term  the  proper  adaptation  of 
the  propeller  to  the  motor. 


FLIGHT  IN  STILL  AIR  67 

Its  characteristic  feature  is  that  the  highest  points  in  the 
two  curves  representing  the  values  of  the  motive  power 
and  the  useful  power  at  different  speeds  of  flights  lie  in  a 
perpendicular  line  (see  fig.  16). 

The  highest  thrust  efficiency  is  then  obtained  from  the 
propeller  at  such  a  speed  that  the  motor  can  also  develop 
its  maximum  power. 


30 


20 


^ 


Spekd  of  fh$k 


10  (5 

FIG.  16. 


25 


The  expression  maximum  power-plant  efficiency  will  be 
used  to  denote  the  ratio  of  maximum  useful  power  Mm 
(see  fig.  15)  developed  at  the  maximum  power  LJ  of  which 
the  motor  is  capable  (50  h.p.  in  the  case  under  consideration). 

The  maximum  power-plant  efficiency,  it  is  clear,  corre- 
sponds to  a  certain  definite  speed  of  flight  Om.  This  may 
be  termed  the  best  speed  suited  to  the  power-plant. 

If  the  adaptation  of  the  propeller  to  the  motor  is  good 
(as  in  the  case  of  fig.  16),  the  maximum  power-plant 
efficiency  is  the  highest  that  can  be  obtained  by  mounting 


68  FLIGHT  WITHOUT  FORMULA 

direct-driven  propellers  belonging  to  one  and  the  same 
family  and  of  different  diameters  on  the  motor. 

Hence  there  is  only  one  propeller  in  any  family  or  series 
of  propellers  which  is  well  adapted  to  a  given  motor. 

We  already  know  that  in  a  family  of  propellers  the 
characteristic  feature  is  a  common  value  of  the  pitch  ratio 
— supposing,  naturally,  that  the  propellers  are  identical  in 
other  respects.  The  conclusion  set  down  above  can  there- 
fore also  be  expressed  as  follows  :  — 

There  can  be  only  one  propeller  of  given  pitch  ratio  that 
is  well  adapted  to  a  given  motor.  The  diameter  of  the  pro- 
peller depends  on  the  pitch  ratio,  and  vice  versa. 

Propellers  well  adapted  to  a  given  motor  consequently 
form  a  single  series  such  that  each  value  of  the  diameter 
corresponds  to  a  single  value  of  the  pitch,  and  vice  versa. 

According  to  the  results  of  Commandant  Dorand's  experi- 
ments with  the  type  of  propellers  which  he  employed,  the 
series  of  propellers  properly  adapted  to  a  50  h.p.  motor 
turning  at  1200  revolutions  per  minute  can  be  set  out  as 
in  Table  VI.,  which  also  gives  the  best  speed  suited  to  the 
power-plant  in  each  case,  and  the  maximum  useful  powers 
developed  obtained  by  multiplying  the  power  of  the  motor, 
50  h.p.,  by  the  maximum  efficiency  as  given  in  Table  V. 

To  summarise  : 

1.  The  useful  power  developed  by  a  given  power-plant 
varies  with  the  speed  of  the  aeroplane  on  which  it  is  mounted. 
The  variation  can  be  shown  by  a  curve  termed  the  char- 
acteristic power-plant  curve. 

2.  To  obtain  from  the  motor  its  full  power  and  from  the 
propeller  its   maximum  efficiency  the  propeller  must  be 
well  adapted  to  the  motor,  and  this  altogether  independently 
of  the  aeroplane  on  which  they  are  mounted. 

3.  There  is  only  a  single  series  of  propellers  well  adapted 
to  a  given  motor. 

4.  For  a  power-plant  to  develop  maximum  efficiency  the 
aeroplane  must  fly  at  a  certain  speed,  known  as  the  best 
speed  suited  to  the  power-plant  under  consideration. 


FLIGHT  IN  STILL  AIR 


TABLE  VI. 


Pitch 
Ratio. 

Propeller 
Diameters 
(in  metres). 

Propeller 
Pitch  (in 
metres  ; 
product 
of  cols.  1 
and  2). 

Best  Suitable  Speed. 

Maximum 
Power- 
plant 
Efficiency 
(from 
Table  V.) 

Maximum 
Useful 
Power 
developed 
(product  of 
50  h.p. 
and  col.  6). 

m.p.s. 

km.p.h. 

1 

2 

3                   4 

5 

6 

7 

0-5 

2-46 

1-23 

14-2 

51 

0-45 

22-5 

0-6 

2-33 

1-40 

17-7 

64 

0-53 

26-5 

0-7 

2-24 

1-57 

21-1 

76 

0-61 

30-5 

0-8 

2-16 

1-73 

23-8 

86 

0-70 

35 

0-9 

2'09 

1-88 

26-4 

95 

0-76 

38 

1-0 

2-04 

2-04 

29-5 

106 

0-80 

40 

1-15 

1-98 

2-28            33-3 

126 

0-84 

42 

In  conclusion,  it  will  be  advisable  to  remember  that 
the  conclusions  reached  above  should  not  be  deemed  to 
apply  with  rigorous  accuracy.  Fortunately,  practice  is 
more  elastic  than  theory.  Thus  we  have  already  seen  in 
the  case  of  the  angle  of  incidence  of  a  plane  that  there  is, 
round  about  the  value  of  the  best  incidence,  a  certain 
margin  within  whose  limits  the  incidence  remains  good. 
Just  so  we  have  to  admit  that  a  given  power-plant  may 
yield  good  results  not  only  when  the  aeroplane  is  flying  at 
a  single  best  speed,  but  also  when  its  speed  does  not  vary 
too  widely  from  this  value. 

In  other  words,  a  certain  elasticity  is  acquired  in  applying 
in  practice  purely  theoretical  deductions,  though  it  should 
not  be  forgotten  that  the  latter  indicate  highly  valuable 
principles  which  can  only  be  ignored  or  thrust  aside  with 
the  most  serious  results,  as  experience  has  proved  only 
too  well. 


CHAPTER  V 

FLIGHT  IN  STILL  AIR 
THE  POWER-PLANT  (concluded) 

IN  the  last  chapter  we  confined  ourselves  mainly  to  the 
working  of  the  power-plant  itself,  and  more  particularly  to 
the  mutual  relations  between  its  parts,  the  motor  and  the 
propeller,  without  reference  to  the  machine  they  are 
employed  to  propel.  The  present  chapter,  on  the  other 
hand,  will  be  devoted  to  the  adaptation  of  the  power-plant 
to  the  aeroplane,  and  incidentally  will  lead  to  some  con- 
sideration of  the  variable- speed  aeroplane  and  of  the  greatest 
possible  speed  variation. 

In  Chapter  II.  particular  stress  was  laid  on  the  graph 
termed  the  essential  curve  of  the  aeroplane,  which  enables 
us  to  find  the  different  values  of  the  useful  power  required 
to  sustain  in  flight  a  given  aeroplane  at  different  speeds, 
that  is,  at  different  angles  of  incidence  and  lift  coefficients. 

In  fig.  17  the  thin  curve  (reproduced  from  fig.  6, 
Chapter  II.)  is  the  essential  aeroplane  curve  of  a  Breguet 
biplane  weighing  600  kg.,  with  an  area  of  30  sq.  m.  and 
a  detrimental  surface  of  1-2  sq.  m. 

But  in  the  last  chapter  particular  attention  was  also 
drawn  to  the  graph  termed  the  power-pla-nt  curve,  which 
gives  the  values  of  the  useful  power  developed  by  a  given 
power-plant  when  the  aeroplane  it  drives  flies  at  different 


In  fig.  17  the  thick  curve  is  the  power-plant  curve,  in  the 
case  of  a  motor  of  50  h.p.  turning  at  1200  revolutions  per 


FLIGHT  IN  STILL  AIR 


71 


minute  and  a  propeller  of  the  Chalais-Meudon  type,  direct- 
driven,  well  adapted  to  the  motor,  and  with  a  pitch  ratio 
of  0-7. 

Table  VI.  (p.  69)  gives  the  diameter  and  pitch  of  the 
propeller  as  2-24  m.  and  1-57  m.  respectively.  The 
maximum  power-plant  efficiency  corresponds  to  a  speed  of 

60 


FIG.  17. 

22-1  m.  per  second.  The  maximum  useful  power  is  30-5  h.p. 
These  are  the  factors  which  enable  us  to  fix  M,  the  highest 
point  of  the  curve. 

It  will  be  clear  that,  by  superposing  in  one  diagram  (as  in 
fig.  17,  which  relates  to  the  specific  case  stated  above)  the 
two  curves  representing  in  both  cases  a  correlation  between 
useful  powers  and  speeds,  and  referring,  in  one  case  to  the 
aeroplane,  in  the  other  to  its  power-plant,  we  should  obtain 


72  FLIGHT  WITHOUT  FORMULA 

some  highly  interesting  information  concerning  the  adapta- 
tion of  the  power-plant  to  the  aeroplane. 

The  curves  intersect  in  two  points,  Rj  and  R2,  which 
means  that  there  are  two  flight  speeds,  Oj.  and  O2,  at 
which  the  useful  power  developed  by  the  power-plant  is 
exactly  that  required  for  the  horizontal  flight  of  the 
aeroplane.  These  two  speeds  both,  therefore,  fulfil  the 
definition  (see  Chapter  II.)  of  the  normal  flying  speeds. 

From  this  we  deduce  that  a  power-plant  capable  of 
sustaining  an  aeroplane  in  level  flight  can  do  so  at  two 
different  normal  flying  speeds.  But  in  practice  the  machine 
flies  at  the  higher  of  these  two  speeds,  for  reasons  which 
will  be  explained  later. 

These  two  normal  flying  speeds  will,  however,  crop  up 
again  whenever  the  relation  between  the  motive  power  and 
the  speed  of  the  aeroplane  comes  to  be  considered.  Thus, 
when  the  motive  power  is  zero,  that  is,  when  the  aeroplane 
glides  with  its  engine  stopped,  the  machine  can,  as  already 
explained,  follow  the  same  gliding  path  at  two  different 
speeds.  The  same,  of  course,  applies  to  horizontal  flight, 
since,  as  has  been  seen,  this  is  really  nothing  else  than  an 
ordinary  glide  in  which  the  angle  of  the  flight-path  has 
been  raised  by  mechanical  means,  through  utilising  the 
power  of  the  engine. 

Let  us  assume  that  the  ordinary  horizontal  flight  of  the 
aeroplane  is  indicated  by  the  point  Rl5  which  constitutes  its 
normal  flight. 

The  speed  ORj  will  be  roughly  23  m.  per  second,  and  the 
useful  power  required,  actually  developed  by  the  propeller, 
about  30  h.p. 

According  to  Table  II.  (Chapter  II.),  the  normal  angle  of 
incidence  will  be  about  4°,  corresponding  to  a  lift  coefficient 
of  0-038. 

Let  it  be  agreed  that  in  flight,  which  is  strictly  normal, 
the  pilot  suddenly  actuates  his  elevator  so  as  to  increase 
the  angle  of  incidence  to  6|°  (lift  coefficient  0-05),  and  hence 
necessarily  alters  the  speed  to  20  m.  per  second. 


FLIGHT  IN  STILL  AIR  73 

From  the  thin  curve  in  fig.  17  (and  from  Table  II.,  on 
which  it  is  based)  it  is  clear  that  the  useful  power  required 
to  sustain  the  aeroplane  at  this  speed  will  be  24  h.p. 

On  the  other  hand,  according  to  the  thick  curve  in  the 
same  figure,  the  power-plant  at  this  same  speed  of  20  m. 
per  second  will  develop  a  useful  power  of  30-3  h.p.,  giving 
a  surplus  of  6-3  h.p.  over  and  above  that  necessary  to 
sustain  the  machine.  The  latter  will  therefore  climb,  and 
climb  at  a  vertical  speed  such  that  the  raising  of  its  weight 
absorbs  exactly  the  surplus,  NN'  or  6-3  h.p.,  useful  power 

developed  by  the  power-plant,  that  is,  at  a  speed  of 

bOO 

=about  0-79  m.  per  second. 

Since  this  vertical  speed  must  necessarily  correspond  to  a 
horizontal  speed  of  20  m.  per  second,  the  angle  of  the  climb, 
as  a  decimal  fraction,  will  be  the  ratio  of  the  two  speeds,  i.e. 

0-79 

=:0<0395=about  4  centimetres  per  metre=l  in  25. 

As  a  matter  of  fact,  we  have  already  seen  that  by  using 
the  elevator  the  pilot  could  make  his  machine  climb  or 
descend  ;  but  by  considering  the  curves  of  the  aeroplane 
and  of  the  power-plant  at  one  and  the  same  time,  we  gain 
a  still  clearer  idea  of  the  process. 

Should  the  pilot  increase  the  incidence  to  more  than  6|° 
the  speed  would  diminish  still  more,  and  fig.  17  shows  that, 
in  so  doing,  the  surplus  power,  measured  by  the  distance 
dividing  the  two  curves  along  the  perpendicular  correspond- 
ing to  the  speed  in  question,  would  increase.  And  with  it 
we  note  an  increase  both  in  the  climbing  speed  and  in  the 
upward  flight-path. 

Yet  is  this  increase  limited,  and  the  curves  show  that 
there  is  one  definite  speed,  01,  at  which  the  surplus  of 
useful  power  exerted  by  the  power-plant  over  and  above 
that  required  for  horizontal  flight  has  a  maximum 
value. 

If,  by  still  further  increasing  the  angle  of  incidence, 
the  speed  were  brought  below  the  limit  01,  the  climb- 


74  FLIGHT  WITHOUT  FORMULA 

ing  speed  of  the  aeroplane  would  diminish  instead  of 
increasing. 

Nevertheless,  the  upward  climbing  angle  would  still 
increase,  but  ever  more  feebly,  until  the  speed  attained 
another  limit,  Op,  such  that  the  ratio  between  the  climbing 
speed  to  the  flying  speed,  which  measures  the  angle  of  the 
flight-path,  attained  a  maximum. 

Thus,  there  is  a  certain  angle  of  incidence  at  which  an 
aeroplane  climbs  as  steeply  as  it  is  possible  for  it  to  climb. 

If,  when  the  machine  was  following  this  flight-path, 
the  angle  of  incidence  were  still  further  increased  by 
the  use  of  the  elevator,  in  order  to  climb  still  more,  the 
angle  of  the  flight-path  would  diminish.  Relatively  to 
its  flight-path  the  aeroplane  would  actually  come  down, 
notwithstanding  the  fact  that  the  elevator  were  set  for 
climbing. 

The  same  inversion  of  the  effect  usually  produced  from 
the  use  of  the  elevator  would  arise  if  the  aeroplane  were 
flying  under  the  normal  conditions  represented  by  the  point 
R2  in  fig.  17.  For  a  decrease  in  the  angle  of  incidence 
through  the  use  of  the  elevator  would  have  the  immediate 
and  inevitable  result  of  increasing  the  speed  of  flight,  which 
would  pass  from  O2  to  Og,  for  instance.  But  this  would 
produce  an  increase  QQ'  in  the  useful  power  developed  by 
the  power-plant  over  and  above  that  required  for  horizontal 
flight,  so  that  even  though  the  elevator  were  set  for  descend- 
ing, the  aeroplane  would  actually  climb. 

This  inversion  of  the  normal  effect  produced  by  the 
elevator  has  sometimes  caused  this  second  condition  of 
flight  to  be  termed  unstable. 

For  if  a  pilot  flying  hi  these  conditions,  and  not  aware 
of  this  peculiar  effect,  felt  his  machine  ascending  through 
some  cause  or  other,  he  would  work  his  elevator  so  as  to 
come  down.  But  the  aeroplane  would  continue  to  ascend, 
gathering  speed  the  while.  The  pilot,  finding  that  his 
machine  was  still  climbing,  would  set  his  elevator  still 
further  for  descending  until  the  speed  exceeded  the  limit 


FLIGHT  IN  STILL  AIR  75 

Op,  and  the  elevator  effect  returned  to  its  usual  state  and 
the  machine  actually  started  to  descend.  The  pilot,  unaware 
of  the  existence  of  this  condition  and  brought  to  fly  under 
it  by  certain  circumstances  (which,  be  it  added,  are  purely 
hypothetical),  would  therefore  regain  normal  flight  by  using 
his  controls  in  the  ordinary  manner. 

Nevertheless,  one  is  scarcely  justified  in  applying  to  this 
second  condition  of  horizontal  flight  the  term  "  unstable  " 
— if  employed  in  the  sense  ordinarily  accepted  in  mechanics, 
— for  one  may  well  believe  that  a  pilot,  aware  of  its 
existence,  could  perfectly  well  accomplish  flight  under 
this  condition  by  reversing  the  usual  operation  of  his 
elevator. 

Still,  it  would  be  a  difficult  proposition  for  machines 
normally  flying  at  a  low  speed,  since  the  speed  of  flight 
under  the  second  condition  (indicated  by  the  point  R2,  fig. 
17)  would  be  lower  still. 

But  in  the  case  of  fast  machines  the  solution  is  obvious 
enough.  For  instance,  according  to  Table  II.,  the  minimum 
speed  of  the  aeroplane  represented  by  the  thin  curve  in 
fig.  17  is  about  63  km.  per  hour,  whereas  in  the  early 
days  of  aviation  the  normal  flying  speed  of  aeroplanes 
was  less. 

Now,  note  that  by  making  an  aeroplane  fly  under  the 
second  condition  the  angle  of  the  planes  would  be  quite 
considerable.  In  the  case  in  question  the  angle  would  be 
in  the  neighbourhood  of  15°,  which  is  about  10°  in  excess  of 
the  normal  flying  angle. 

The  whole  aeroplane  would  therefore  be  inclined  at  an 
angle  equivalent  to  some  ten  degrees  to  the  horizontal,  with 
the  result  that  the  detrimental  surface  (which  cannot  be 
supposed  constant  for  such  large  angles)  would  be  increased, 
and  with  it  the  useful  power  required  for  flight. 

In  practice,  therefore,  the  power-plant  would  not  enable 
the  minimum  speed  Or2  to  be  attained,  and  the  second  condi- 
tion of  flight  would  take  place  at  a  higher  speed  and  at  a 
smaller  angle  of  incidence.  Still,  it  would  be  practicable 


76  FLIGHT  WITHOUT  FORMULA 

by  working  the  elevator  in  the  reverse  sense  to  the 
usual.* 

Now  let  us  just  see  how  a  pilot  could  make  his  aeroplane 
pass  from  normal  flight  to  the  second  condition  ;  although, 
no  doubt,  in  so  doing  we  anticipate,  for  it  is  highly  im- 
probable that  any  pilot  hitherto  has  made  such  an  attempt. 

When  the  aeroplane  is  flying  horizontally  and  normally, 
the  pilot  would  simply  have  to  set  his  elevator  to  climb,  and 
continue  this  manoeuvre  until  the  flight-path  had  attained 
its  greatest  possible  angle.  The  aeroplane  would  then  return 
(and  very  quickly  too,  if  practice  is  in  accordance  with 
theory)  to  horizontal  flight,  and  now,  flying  very  slowly,  it 
would  have  attained  to  the  second  condition  of  flight.  At 
this  stage  it  would  be  flying  at  a  large  angle  to  the  flight- 
path,  very  cabre,  almost  like  a  kite. 

The  greater  part  of  the  useful  power  would  be  absorbed 
in  overcoming  the  large  resistance  opposed  to  forward 
motion  by  the  planes.  It  will  now  be  readily  seen  that, 
under  these  conditions,  any  decrease  in  the  angle  of  incidence 
would  cause  the  machine  to  climb,  since,  while  it  would 
have  but  little  effect  on  the  lift  of  the  planes,  it  would 
greatly  reduce  their  drag. 

By  the  process  outlined  above,  the  aeroplane  would 
successively  assume  every  one  of  the  series  of  speeds 
between  the  two  speeds  corresponding  to  normal  and  the 
second  condition  of  flight  (i.e.  it  would  gradually  pass  from 
Or1  to  O2,  fig.  17),  though  it  would  have  to  begin  with 
climbing  and  descend  afterwards. 

But  we  know  that  the  pilot  has  a  means  of  attaining 
these  intermediary  speeds  while  continuing  to  fly  horizontally, 
namely,  by  throttling  down  his  engine.  This,  at  all  events, 
is  what  he  should  do  until  the  speed  of  the  machine  had 

*  At  present  we  are  only  dealing  with  the  sustentation  of  the  aeroplane. 
From  the  point  of  view  of  stability,  which  will  be  dealt  with  in  subsequent 
chapters,  it  seems  highly  probable  that  the  necessity  of  being  able  to  fly  at 
a  small  and  at  a  large  angle  of  incidence  will  lead  to  the  employment  of 
special  constructional  devices. 


FLIGHT  IN  STILL  AIR 


77 


reached  a  certain  point  01  (fig.  18)  corresponding  to  that 
degree  of  throttling  at  which  the  power-plant  curve  (much 
flatter  now  by  reason  of  the  throttling-down  process)  only 
continues  to  touch  the  aeroplane  curve  at  a  single  point  L. 
Below  this  speed,  if  the  pilot  continues  to  increase  the  angle 
of  incidence  by  using  the  elevator,  horizontal  flight  cannot 
be  maintained  except  by  quickly  opening  the  throttle. 

It  would  therefore  seem  feasible  to  pass  from  the  normal 
to  the  second  condition  of  flight,  without  rising  or  falling, 


FIG.  18. 

by  the  combined  use  of  elevator  and  throttle.  But  up  till 
now  all  this  remains  pure  theory,  for  hitherto  few  pilots 
know  how  to  vary  their  speed  to  any  considerable  extent, 
and  probably  not  a  single  one  has  yet  reduced  this  speed 
below  the  point  01  and  ventured  into  the  region  of  the 
second  condition  of  flight,  that  wherein  the  elevator  has  to 
be  operated  in  the  inverse  sense. 

The  reason  for  this  view  is  that  the  aeroplane,  when 
its  speed  approaches  the  point  01,  is  flying  without  any 
margin,  and  consequently  is  then  bound  to  descend.  If 
therefore  it  obeys  the  impulse  of  descending  given  by  the 
elevator,  it  no  longer  responds  to  the  climbing  manipulation. 


78  FLIGHT  WITHOUT  FORMULA 

As  soon  as  the  pilot  perceives  this,*  he  hastens  to  increase 
the  speed  of  his  machine  again  by  reducing  the  angle  of 
incidence  and  opening  his  throttle,  whereas,  in  order  to  pass 
the  critical  point,  he  would  in  fact  have  to  open  the  throttle 
but  still  continue  to  set  his  elevator  to  climb. 

The  possibility  of  achieving  several  different  speeds  by 
the  combined  use  of  elevator  and  throttle  forms  the  solution 
to  the  problem  of  wide  speed  variation. 

The  greatest  possible  speed  variation  which  any  aeroplane 
is  capable  of  attaining  is  measured  by  the  difference  between 
the  normal  and  the  second  condition  of  flight.  But,  up  to 
the  present  at  any  rate,  the  latter  has  not  been  reached,  and 
the  lowest  speed  of  an  aeroplane  is  that  (indicated  by  01, 
fig.  18)  corresponding  to  flight  at  the  "  limit  of  capacity." 

This  particular  speed,  not  to  be  mistaken  for  one  of  the 
two  essential  conditions  of  flight,  is  usually  very  close  to 
that  corresponding  to  the  economical  angle  of  incidence 
(see  Chapter  II.).  Hence  the  economical  speed  constitutes  the 
lower  limit  of  variation,  which  has  probably  never  yet  been 
attained. 

In  the  future,  if  the  second  condition  of  flight  is  achieved 
in  practice,  one  will  be  able  to  fly  at  the  lowest  possible 
speed  an  aeroplane  can  attain.  This  conclusion  may  prove 
of  considerable  interest  in  the  case  of  fast  machines,  for 
any  reduction  of  speed,  however  slight,  is  then  important. 

The  highest  speed  is  that  of  the  normal  flight  of  an  aero- 
plane. In  the  example  represented  in  fig.  17  this  speed  is 
23  m.  per  second,  or  about  83  km.  per  hour.  Since  the 
economical  speed  of  the  machine  in  question  is  about  66 
km.  per  hour,  the  absolute  speed  variation  would  be  17  km. 
per  hour,  or,  relatively,  about  20  per  cent.  This,  however, 
is  a  maximum,  since  the  economical  speed,  as  we  know,  is 
never  attained  in  practice. 

The  above  leads  to  the  conclusion  that  the  way  to  obtain 

*  He  is  the  more  prone  to  do  this  owing  to  the  fact  that,  with  present 
methods  of  design  and  construction,  stability  decreases  as  the  angle  of 
incidence  is  increased. 


FLIGHT   IN   STILL  AIR 


79 


a  large  speed  variation  is  to  increase  the  normal  flying 
speed. 

In  the  previous  example  we  assumed  that  the  50  h.p. 
motor  turning  at  1200  revolutions  per  minute  was  equipped 
with  a  propeller  with  a  0-7  pitch  ratio,  well  adapted, 
whose  characteristic  qualities  are  given  in  Table  VI. 

Now  let  us  replace  this  propeller  by  another,  equally  well 


rStc] 


30 


adapted,  but  with  a  pitch  ratio  of  1-15.  According  to 
Table  VI.  the  diameter  of  this  propeller  would  be  1-98  m. 
and  its  pitch  2-28  m.  The  best  speed  corresponding  to 
the  new  propeller  would  be  33  m.  per  second,  and  the 
maximum  useful  power  developed  at  this  speed  42  h.p. 

Now  let  the  new  power-plant  curve  (thick  line)  be  super- 
posed on  the  previous  aeroplane  curve  (see  fig.  19).  For 
the  sake  of  comparison  the  previous  power-plant  curve  is 
also  reproduced  in  this  diagram. 


80  FLIGHT  WITHOUT  FORMULA 

The  advantage  of  the  step  is  clear  at  a  glance.  In  fact, 
the  normal  flying  speed  increases  from  Orl — equivalent 
to  23  m.  per  second  or  83  km.  per  hour — to  Or\ — equivalent 
to  26  m.  per  second,  or  about  93  km.  per  hour.  This  in- 
creases the  speed  variation  from  17  to  27  km.  per  hour,  or 
from  20  to  29  per  cent. 

Again,  the  maximum  surplus  power  developed  by  the 
power-plant  over  and  above  that  required  merely  for 
sustentation,  amounting  to  about  7  h.p.  with  the  former 
propeller,  now  becomes  about  12  h.p.  The  quickest  climb- 

7  x  75 
ing  speed  therefore  grows  from  -    —  =0-88  m.  per  second 

uOO 

12x75 

to  =  1'5  m.  per  second. 

oOO 

Hence,  by  simply  changing  the  propeller,  one  obtains  the 
double  result  of  increasing  the  normal  flying  speed  of  the 
aeroplane  together  with  its  climbing  powers.  Nor  is  the 
fact  surprising,  but  merely  emphasises  our  contention  that 
since  highly  efficient  propellers  can  be  constructed,  it  will 
be  just  as  well  to  use  them. 

In  order  to  gain  an  idea  of  the  relative  importance  of 
increasing  the  pitch  ratio  when  this  ratio  has  already  a 
certain  value,  we  may  superpose  in  a  single  diagram 
(fig.  20),  on  the  aeroplane  curve,  all  the  power-plant  curves 
representing  the  various  propellers,  well  adapted,  used  with 
the  same  50-h.p.  motor  turning  at  1200  revolutions  per 
minute,  according  to  Table  VI. 

Firstly,  it  will  be  evident  that  a  pitch  ratio  of  0-5  would 
not  enable  the  aeroplane  in  question  to  maintain  horizontal 
flight,  since  the  two  curves — that  of  the  power-plant  and  of 
the  aeroplane — do  not  meet.  In  fact,  the  pitch  ratio  must 
be  between  0-5  and  0-6 — 0-54,  to  be  exact — for  the  power- 
plant  curve  to  touch  the  aeroplane  curve  at  a  single  point. 
Horizontal  flight  would  then  be  possible,  but  only  at  one 
speed  and  without  a  margin. 

But  as  soon  as  the  pitch  ratio  increases,  the  normal  flying 
speed  and  the  climbing  speed  increase  very  rapidly.  On 


FLIGHT  IN  STILL  AIR 


81 


the  other  hand,  once  the  pitch  ratio  amounts  to  0-9,  the 
advantage  of  increasing  it  still  further,  though  this  still 
exists,  becomes  negligible.  Beyond  1-0  a  further  increase 
of  pitch  ratio  (in  the  specific  case  in  question)  need  not  be 
considered.  All  of  which  are,  of  course,  theoretical  con- 
siderations, although  they  point  to  certain  definite  principles 
which  cannot  be  ignored  in  practice — a  fact  of  which 


; 

I 

7 

1 

.1 

1 

fc  

4: 

^ 

V 

£+-  . 

—  0-8 

\jti 

—  -1-00 

I 

—  —  . 

$ 

^ 

7^-0-6 
**0-S4^ 

"0-7  ^ 
Y> 

,/ 

yjr 

^0-J 

/ 

Speed 

offtiyl 

tfanffl.j. 

erSecJ 

1 

1 

0          / 

] 

J         2 
?IG.  20. 

0        2 

5  J 

0         J 

j 

constructors,    as    already    remarked,    are    now    becoming 
cognisant. 

At  the  same  time,  the  reduction  of  the  diameter  necessi- 
tated by  the  use  of  propellers  of  great  efficiency  is  not 
without  its  disadvantages,  more  especially  in  the  case 
of  monoplanes  and  tractor  biplanes  in  which  the  propeller 
is  situated  in  front.  In  these  conditions,  the  propeller 
throws  back  on  to  the  fuselage  a  column  of  air  which  be- 
comes the  more  considerable  as  the  propeller  diameter  is 

6 


82 


FLIGHT  WITHOUT  FORMULA 


reduced,  since  practically  only  the  portions  of  the  blades 
near  the  tips  produce  effective  work. 

It  is  on  this  ground  that  we  may  account  for  the  fact 
that  reduction  in  propeller  diameter  has  not  yet,  up  to  a 
point,  given  the  good  results  which  theory  led  one  to 
expect. 

But  when  the  propeller  is  placed  in  rear  of  the  machine 


70 


6C 


50 


4C 


30 


20 


20 


Sj  teed  oj  flight 


•Sec) 


30 


40 


35 
FIG.  21. 

The  figures  at  the  side  of  the  curve  indicate  the  lift. 


and  the  backward  flowing  air  encounters  no  obstacle,  there 
is  every  advantage  in  selecting  a  high  pitch  ratio,  and  we 
have  already  seen  that  M.  Tatin,  in  consequence,  on  his 
Torpille  fitted  a  propeller  with  a  pitch  exceeding  the 
diameter.* 

*  It  may  also  be  noticed  that  the  need  for  reducing  the  diameter 
gradually  disappears  as  the  power  of  the  motor  increases,  because  the 
diameter  of  propellers  well  adapted  to  a  motor  increases  with  the  power 
of  the  latter. 


FLIGHT  IN  STILL  AIR 


83 


The  use  of  propellers  of  high  efficiency,  therefore,  obviously 
increases  the  speed  variation  obtainable  with  any  particular 
aeroplane. 

The  lower  limit  of  this  speed  variation  has  already  been 
seen  to  be  the  economical  speed  of  the  aeroplane. 

Now,  it  should  be  noted  that,  in  designing  high-speed 
machines,  the  use  of  planes  of  small  camber  and  with  a 
very  heavy  loading  has  the  result  of  increasing  the  value 
of  the  economical  speed.  Thus,  the  Torpille,  already 
referred  to,  appeared  to  be  capable  of  attaining  a  speed  of 
160  km.  per  hour  ;  *  but  its  economical  speed  would  have 
been  about  28  m.  per  second  or  100  km.  per  hour.  Fig.  21 
shows,  merely  for  the  sake  of  comparison,  the  curve  of  an 
aeroplane  of  this  type  (weight,  450  kg.  ;  area,  12-50  sq.  m.  ; 
detrimental  surface,  0-30  sq.  m.)  plotted  from  the  following 
table. 


TABLE  VII. 


+3 

a 

Speed  Value. 

fei 

1  §  £;? 

C?    c3    ^ 

1* 

11! 

1 

gi  13  .3^ 

H  * 

**  't?  . 

1 

1*1 

"  5fi    gn^, 
f°   8   X   o 

^•s 

i| 

ill 

fs 

m.p.s. 

km.p.h. 

"ill 

ir 

ill 

&i 

i*5 

Q     £ 

3-x 

p<2~ 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

o-oio 

60 

216 

0-0007 

31kg. 

87kg. 

118  kg. 

94  h.p. 

0-020 

42-4 

158 

0-0013 

29 

43 

72 

40 

0-030 

34-6 

125 

0-0020 

31 

29 

60 

28 

0-040 

30 

108 

0-0034 

38 

22 

60 

24 

0-050 

26-8 

97 

0-0055 

49 

18 

67 

24 

0-058 

24-9 

90 

0-0100 

77 

16 

93 

31 

*  If  we  allow  it  a  detrimental  surface  of  0'30  sq.  metre,  which  is 
certainly  not  enough. 


84 


FLIGHT  WITHOUT  FORMULA 


The  speed  variation  of  such  a  machine  would  be  60  km. 
per  hour =38  per  cent. 

If  it  could  fly  in  the  second  condition  of  flight,  i.e.  at 
90  km.  per  hour,  the  speed  variation  would  be  70  km.  per 
hour,  or  44  per  cent. 

In  a  machine  o£  similar  type,  able  to  attain  a  speed  of 
200  km.  per  hour  (weight,  500  kg.  ;  area,  9  sq.  m.  ;  detri- 


*f 

I 

^ 

5 

/ 

/ 

? 

•^ 

3 

CO 
"5 

o 

o 

«o    , 

/ 

5 

0 

Ll 

0 

«• 
o  ./ 

/ 

V6_ 

Jx 

Speed  c 

fflykl 

{in  Tn/x.rS 

y 

30 


35 


45 


50 


40 

FIG.  22. 

The  figures  by  the  side  of  the  curve  indicate  the  lift. 

mental  surface,  0-03  sq.  m.),  whose  characteristic  curve  is 
plotted  in  fig.  22,  according  to  Table  VIII.,  the  economical 
speed  would  be  34  m.  per  second,  or  125  km.  per  hour, 
giving  a  speed  variation  of  75  km.  per  hour,  or  38  per  cent. 
If  it  could  attain  the  second  condition  of  flight,  i.e.  110  km. 
per  hour,  the  variation  would  be  90  km.  per  hour,  or  45 
per  cent. 

Fortunately,  as  may  be  seen,  the  high-speed  machine  of 


FLIGHT  IN  STILL  AIR 


85 


the  future  should  possess  a  high  degree  of  speed  variation. 
And  in  the  case  of  really  high  speeds  even  the  smallest 
advantage  in  this  respect  becomes  of  great  importance.  It 
may  well  be  that  the  necessity  for  achieving  the  greatest 

TABLE  VIII. 


"S 

Speed  Value. 

hi 

01    X  '*-' 

C  ~C5   di  ^. 

iil 

|j 

||| 

56 

s.-s  g 

PHjg     0<I< 

'So  ^ 

rp 

fe3^ 

I 

j/J 

g,ix| 

ill 

!» 

III 

m.p.s. 

km.p.h. 

$J! 

«l^ 

l| 

p    c2 

PS*- 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

o-oio 

74-8 

270 

0-0007 

35kg. 

134  kg. 

169  kg. 

168  h.p. 

0-020 

53 

190 

0-0013 

33 

68 

101 

72 

0-030 

43-1 

155 

0-0020 

35 

45 

80 

46 

0-040 

37-4 

135 

0-0034 

43 

34 

77 

39 

0-050 

33-4 

120 

0-0055 

55 

27 

82 

37 

0-058 

31 

111 

o-oioo 

86 

24 

110 

46 

possible  speed  variation  will  induce  pilots  of  the  extra  high 
speed  machines  of  the  future  to  attempt,  for  alighting,  to 
fly  at  the  second  condition  of  flight.*  In  this  they  will 
only  imitate  a  bird,  which,  when  about  to  alight,  places  its 
wings  at  a  coarse  angle  and  tilts  up  its  body. 

Fig.  20  further  shows  that  when  the  pitch  ratio  is  less 
than  0-8  the  highest  point  of  the  power-plant  curve  lies  to 
the  left  of  the  aeroplane  curve.  It  only  lies  to  the  right  of 
it  when  the  pitch  ratio  is  equal  to  or  greater  than  0-9.  If 
the  pitch  ratio  were  0-85,  the  highest  point  of  the  power- 
plant  curve  would  just  touch  the  aeroplane  curve,  and  would 
hence  correspond  to  normal  flight. 

*  Attention  is,  however,  drawn  to  the  remarks  at  the  bottom  of  p.  74. 


86        .          FLIGHT  WITHOUT  FORMULA 

In  Chapter  IV.  it  was  shown  that  the  highest  point  of 
the  power-plant  curve  corresponds — the  propeller  being 
supposedly  well  adapted  to  the  motor — to  a  rotational 
velocity  of  1200  revolutions  per  minute,  the  normal  number 
of  revolutions  at  which  it  develops  full  power.  If,  there- 
fore, this  highest  point  lies  to  the  left  of  the  aeroplane 
curve,  the  motor  is  turning  at  over  1200  revolutions  per 
minute  when  the  aeroplane  is  flying  at  normal  speed.  On 
the  other  hand,  if  the  highest  point  lies  to  the  right  of  the 
aeroplane  curve,  in  normal  flight  the  motor  will  be  running 
at  under  1200  revolutions  per  minute. 

In  neither  case  will  it  develop  full  power.  Moreover, 
there  is  danger  in  running  the  motor  at  too  high  a  number 
of  revolutions,  particularly  if  it  is  of  the  rotary  type.  Only 
a  propeller  with  a  pitch  ratio  of  0-85  could  enable  the 
motor  to  develop  its  full  power  (in  the  special  case  in 
question). 

This  immediately  suggests  the  expedient  of  keeping  the 
motor  running  at  1200  revolutions  per  minute  while  allow- 
ing the  propeller  to  turn  at  the  speed  productive  of  its 
maximum  efficiency  through  some  system  of  gearing. 
Thus  we  are  brought  by  a  logical  chain  of  reasoning  to  the 
geared-down  propeller,  a  solution  adopted  in  very  happy 
fashion  in  the  first  successful  aeroplane — that  of  the  brothers 
Wright. 

Let  us  suppose  that  an  aeroplane  whose  curve  is  shown 
by  the  thin  line  in  fig.  23  has  a  power-plant  curve  repre- 
sented by  the  thick  line  in  the  same  figure,  the  propeller 
direct-driven,  having  a  pitch  ratio  of  1-15,  and  hence  possess- 
ing (according  to  Commandant  Dorand's  experiments)  84 
per  cent,  maximum  efficiency. 

Evidently,  however  good  this  power-plant  might  be 
when  considered  by  itself,  it  would  be  very  badly  adapted 
to  the  aeroplane  in  question,  since,  firstly,  it  would  only 
enable  the  machine  to  obtain  the  low  speed  Orx ;  and, 
secondly,  the  maximum  surplus  of  useful  power,  the  measure 
of  an  aeroplane's  climbing  properties,  would  fall  to  a  very 


FLIGHT  IN  STILL  AIR 


87 


low  figure.  Hence,  the  machine  would  only  leave  the 
ground  with  difficulty,  and  would  fly  without  any  margin. 
And  all  this  simply  and  solely  because  the  best  speed,  Om, 
suited  to  the  power-plant  would  be  too  high  for  the  aero- 
plane. 

Now  let  the  direct-driven  propeller  be  replaced  by  another 
of  the  same  type,  but  of  larger  diameter,  and  geared  down 
in  such  fashion  that  the  best  speed  suited  to  this  power- 
plant  corresponds  to  the  normal  flying  speed  O'15  of  the 
aeroplane  (see  fig.  23). 


FIG.  23. 

The  maximum  useful  power  developed  by  this  power- 
plant  remains  in  theory  the  same  as  before,  since  the  pro- 
peller, being  of  the  same  type,  will  still  have  a  maximum 
efficiency  of  84  per  cent.  The  new  power-plant  curve  will 
therefore  be  of  the  order  shown  by  the  dotted  line  in  the 
figure. 

It  is  clear  that  by  gearing  down  we  first  of  all  obtain  an 
increase  of  the  normal  flying  speed,  and  secondly,  a  very 
large  increase  in  the  maximum  surplus  of  useful  power — 
that  is,  in  the  machine's  climbing  capacity.  In  practice, 
however,  this  is  not  a  perfectly  correct  representation  of 


88  FLIGHT  WITHOUT  FORMULA 

the  case,  since  gearing  down  results  in  a  direct  loss  of 
efficiency  and  an  increase  in  weight.  Whether  or  not  to 
adopt  gearing,  therefore,  remains  a  question  to  be  decided 
on  the  particular  merits  of  each  case.  Speaking  very 
generally,  it  can  be  said  that  this  device,  which  always 
introduces  some  complication,  should  be  mainly  adopted  in 
relatively  slow  machines  designed  to  carry  a  heavy  load. 

In  the  case  of  high-speed  machines  it  seems  better  to 
drive  the  propeller  direct,  though  even  here  it  may  yet 
prove  desirable  to  introduce  gearing. 

This  study  of  the  power-plant  may  now  be  rounded  off 
with  a  few  remarks  on  static  propeller  tests,  or  bench  tests. 
These  consist  hi  measuring,  with  suitable  apparatus,  on  the 
one  hand,  the  thrust  exerted  by  the  propeller  turning  at  a 
certain  speed  without  forward  motion,  and,  on  the  other, 
the  power  which  has  to  be  expended  to  obtain  this  result. 

Experiment  has  shown  that  a  propeller  of  given  diameter, 
driven  by  a  given  expenditure  of  power,  exerts  the  greatest 
static  thrust  if  its  pitch  ratio  is  in  the  neighbourhood  of 
0-65.*  On  the  other  hand,  we  have  seen  that  the  highest 
thrust  efficiency  hi  flight  is  obtained  with  propellers  of  a 
pitch  ratio  slightly  greater  than  unity.  Hence  one  should 
not  conclude  that  a  propeller  would  give  a  greater  thrust 
hi  flight  simply  from  the  fact  that  it  does  so  on  the  bench. 
Thus,  the  propeller  mounted  on  the  Tatin  Torpille,  already 
referred  to,  which  gave  an  excellent  thrust  hi  flight,  would 
probably  have  given  a  smaller  thrust  on  the  bench  than  a 
propeller  with  a  smaller  pitch. 

Consequently,  a  bench  test  is  by  no  means  a  reliable 
indication  of  the  thrust  produced  by  a  propeller  hi  flight. 
Besides,  it  is  usually  made  not  only  with  the  propeller 
alone  but  with  the  complete  power-plant,  in  which  case  the 
result  is  even  more  unreliable  owing  to  the  fact  that  the 
power  developed  by  an  internal  combustion  engine  varies 
with  its  speed  of  rotation. 

For  instance,  suppose  that  a  motor  normally  turning  at 
*  From  Commandant  Dorand's  experiments. 


FLIGHT  IN   STILL  AIR  89 

1200  revolutions  per  minute  is  fitted  with  a  propeller  of 
1-15  pitch  ratio  which,  when  tested  on  the  bench  by  itself, 
already  develops  a  smaller  thrust  than  a  propeller  of  0-65 
pitch  ratio  ;  the  motor  would  then  only  turn  at  900  revolu- 
tions per  minute,  whereas  the  propeller  of  0-65  pitch  ratio 
would  let  it  turn  at  1000  revolutions  per  minute,  and  hence 
give  more  power.  The  propeller  with  a  high  pitch  ratio 
would  therefore  appear  doubly  inferior  to  the  other,  and 
this  notwithstanding  the  fact  that  its  thrust  in  flight  would 
undoubtedly  be  greater. 

A  propeller  exerting  the  highest  thrust  in  a  bench  test  must 
not  for  that  reason  be  regarded  as  the  best. 


CHAPTER   VI 
STABILITY  IN  STILL  AIR 

LONGITUDINAL  STABILITY 

AT  the  very  outset  of  the  first  chapter  it  was  laid  down 
that  the  entire  problem  of  aeroplane  flight  is  not  solved 
merely  by  obtaining  from  the  "  relative  "  air  current  which 
meets  the  wings,  owing  to  their  forward  speed,  sufficient 
lift  to  sustain  the  weight  of  the  machine  ;  an  aeroplane,  in 
addition,  must  always  encounter  the  relative  air  current  in 
the  same  attitude,  and  must  neither  upset  nor  be  thrown 
out  of  its  path  by  a  slight  aerial  disturbance.  In  other 
words,  it  is  essential  for  an  aeroplane  to  remain  in  equi- 
librium ;  more,  in  stable  equilibrium.* 

We  may  now  proceed  to  study  the  equilibrium  of  an 
aeroplane  in  still  air  and  the  stability  of  this  equilibrium. 

Since  a  knowledge  of  some  of  the  main  elementary 
principles  of  mechanics  is  essential  to  a  proper  understand- 
ing of  the  problems  to  be  dealt  with,  these  may  be  briefly 
outlined  here. 

*  The  very  fact  that  an  aeroplane  remains  in  flight  presupposes,  as 
we  have  seen,  a  first  order  of  equilibrium,  which  has  been  termed  the 
equilibrium  of  sustentation,  which  jointly  results  from  the  weight  of  the 
machine,  the  reaction  of  the  air,  and  the  propeller-thrust.  The  mainten- 
ance of  this  state  of  equilibrium,  which  is  the  first  duty  of  the  pilot, 
causes  an  aeroplane  to  move  forward  on  a  uniform  and  direct  course. 

We  are  now  dealing  with  a  second  order  of  equilibrium,  that  of  the 
aeroplane  on  its  flight-path.  Both  orders  of  equilibrium  are,  of  course, 
closely  interconnected,  for  if  in  flight  the  machine  went  on  turning  and 
rolling  about  in  every  way,  its  direction  of  flight  could  clearly  not  be 
maintained  uniformly. 


STABILITY  IN  STILL  AIR 


01 


The  most  important  of  these  is  that  relating  to  the 
centre  of  gravity. 

If  any  body,  such  as  an  aeroplane,  for  instance  (fig.  24), 
is  suspended  at  any  one  point,  and  a  perpendicular  is 
drawn  from  the  point  of  suspension,  it  will  always  pass, 
whatever  the  position  of  the  body  in  question,  through  the 
same  point  G,  termed  the  centre  of  gravity  of  the  body. 

The  effect  of  gravity  on  any  body,  in  other  words,  the 


FIG.  24. 

force  termed  the  weight  of  the  body,  therefore  always 
passes  through  its  centre  of  gravity,  whatever  position  the 
body  may  assume. 

Another  principle  is  also  of  the  greatest  importance  in 
considering  stability ;  namely,  the  turning  action  of 
forces. 

When  a  force  of  magnitude  F  (fig.  25),  exerted  in  the 
direction  XX,  tends  to  make  a  body  turn  about  a  fixed 
point  G,  its  action  is  the  stronger  the  greater  the  distance, 
Gx,  between  the  point  G  and  the  line  XX.  In  other  words, 
the  turning  action  of  a  force  relatively  to  a  point  is  the 
greater  the  farther  away  the  force  is  from  the  point. 

Further,  it  will  be  readily  understood  that  a  force  F', 
double  the  force  F  in  magnitude  but  acting  along  a  line 
YY  separated  from  the  fixed  point  G  by  a  distance  Gy, 


92  FLIGHT  WITHOUT  FORMULA 

which  is  just  half  of  Gx,  would  have  a  turning  force  equal 
to  F.  In  short,  it  is  the  well-known  principle  of  the 
lever. 

The  product  of  the  magnitude  of  a  force  by  the  length 
of  its  lever  arm  from  a  point  or  axis  therefore  measures 
the  turning  action  of  the  force.  In  mechanics  this  turning 
action  is  usually  known  as  the  moment  or  the  couple. 

When,  as  in  fig.  25,  two  turning  forces  are  exerted  in 
inverse  direction  about  a  single  point  or  axis,  and  their 


X/ 


FIG.  25. 

turning  moment  or  couple  is  equal,  the  forces  are  said  to  be 
in  equilibrium  about  the  point  or  axis  in  question. 

For  a  number  of  forces  to  be  in  equilibrium  about  a  point 
or  axis,  the  sum  of  the  moments  or  couples  of  those  acting 
in  one  direction  must  be  equal  to  the  sum  of  the  couples  of 
those  acting  in  the  opposite  direction. 

It  should  be  noted  that  in  measuring  the  moment  of  a 
force,  only  its  magnitude,  its  direction,  and  its  lever  arm 
are  taken  into  account.  The  position  of  the  point  of  its 
application  is  a  matter  of  indifference.  And  with  reason, 
for  the  point  of  application  of  a  force  cannot  in  any  way 
influence  the  effect  of  the  force  ;  if,  for  instance,  an  object 


STABILITY  IN  STILL  AIR  93 

is  pushed  with  a  stick,  it  is  immaterial  which  end  of  the 
stick  is  held  in  the  hand,  providing  only  that  the  force  is 
exerted  in  the  direction  of  the  stick. 

Before  venturing  upon  the  problem  of  aeroplane  stability 
a  fundamental  principle,  derived  from  the  ordinary  theory 
of  mechanics,  must  be  laid  down. 

FUNDAMENTAL  PRINCIPLE. — So  far  as  the  equilibrium 
of  an  aeroplane  and  the  stability  of  its  equilibrium  are  con- 
cerned, the  aeroplane  may  be  considered  as  being  suspended 
from  its  centre  of  gravity  and  as  encountering  the  relative 
wind  produced  by  its  own  velocity. 

This  principle  is  of  the  utmost  importance  and  absolutely 
essential ;  by  ignoring  it  grave  errors  are  bound  to  ensue, 
such,  for  instance,  as  the  idea  that  an  aeroplane  behaves  in 
flight  as  if  it  were  in  some  fashion  suspended  from  a  certain 
vaguely-defined  point  termed  the  "  centre  of  lift,"  usually 
considered  as  situated  on  the  wings.  An  idea  of  this  sort 
leads  to  the  supposition  that  a  great  stabilising  effect  is 
produced  by  lowering  the  centre  of  gravity,  which  is  thus 
likened  to  a  kind  of  pendulum. 

Now,  it  will  be  seen  hereafter  that  in  certain  cases  the 
lowering  of  the  centre  of  gravity  may,  in  fact,  produce  a 
stabilising  effect,  but  this  for  a  very  different  reason. 

The  "  centre  of  lift  "  does  not  exist.  Or,  if  it  exists,  it  is 
coincident  with  the  centre  of  gravity,  which  is  the  one  and 
only  centre  of  the  aeroplane. 

The  three  phases  of  stability,  which  is  understood  to 
comprise  equilibrium,  to  be  considered  are  : 

Longitudinal  stability. 

Lateral  stability. 

Directional  stability. 

First  comes  longitudinal  stability,  which  will  be  dealt 
with  in  this  chapter  and  the  next. 

Every  aeroplane  has  a  plane  of  symmetry  which  remains 
vertical  in  normal  flight.  The  centre  of  gravity  lies  in 
this  plane.  The  axis  drawn  through  the  centre  of  gravity 
at  right  angles  to  the  plane  of  symmetry  may  be  termed 


94  FLIGHT  WITHOUT  FORMULA 

the  pitching  axis  and  the  equilibrium  of  the  aeroplane 
about  its  pitching  axis  is  its  longitudinal  equilibrium. 

Hereafter,  and  until  stated  otherwise,  it  will  be  assumed 
that  the  direction  of  the  propeller-thrust  passes  through 
the  centre  of  gravity  of  the  machine.  Consequently, 
neither  the  propeller-thrust  nor  the  weight  of  the  aeroplane, 
which,  of  course,  also  passes  through  the  centre  of  gravity, 
can  have  any  effect  on  longitudinal  equilibrium,  for,  hi 
accordance  with  the  fundamental  principle  set  out  above, 
the  moments  exerted  by  these  two  forces  about  the  pitch- 
ing axis  are  zero. 

Hence,  in  order  that  an  aeroplane  may  remain  in  longi- 
tudinal equilibrium  on  its  flight-path,  that  is,  so  that  it 
may  always  meet  the  air  at  the  same  angle  of  incidence, 
all  that  is  required  is  that  the  reaction  of  the  air  on  the 
various  parts  of  the  aeroplane  should  be  in  equilibrium 
about  its  centre  of  gravity. 

Now,  in  normal  flight  all  the  reactions  of  the  air  must 
be  forces  situated  in  the  plane  of  symmetry  of  the  machine. 
These  forces  may  be  compounded  into  a  single  resultant 
(see  Chapter  II.),  which,  for  the  existence  of  longitudinal 
equilibrium,  must  pass  through  the  centre  of  gravity. 

We  may  therefore  state  that :  when  an  aeroplane  is 
flying  in  equilibrium,  the  resultant  of  the  reaction  of 
the  air  on  its  various  parts  passes  through  the  centre  of 
gravity. 

This  resultant  will  be  called  the  total  pressure. 

Let  us  take  any  aeroplane,  maintained  in  a  fixed  position, 
such,  for  instance,  that  the  chord  of  its  main  plane  were  at 
an  angle  of  incidence  of  10°,  and  let  us  assume  that  a  hori- 
zontal air  current  meets  it  at  a  certain  speed. 

The  air  current  will  act  upon  the  various  parts  of  the 
aeroplane  and  the  resultant  of  this  action  will  be  a  total 
pressure  of  a  direction  shown  by,  say,  P10  (fig.  26).  Without 
moving  the  aeroplane  let  us  now  alter  the  direction  of  the 
air  current  (blowing  from  left  to  right)  so  that  it  meets 
the  planes  at  an  ever-decreasing  angle,  passing  successively 


STABILITY  IN  STILL  AIR 


95 


from  10°  to  8°,  6°,  4°,  etc.  In  each  case  the  total  pressure 
will  take  the  directions  indicated  respectively  by  P8,  P6,  P4, 
etc.  Let  G  be  the  centre  of  gravity  of  the  aeroplane. 

Only  one  of  the  above  resultants — P6,  for  instance — will 
pass  through  the  centre  of  gravity.     From  this  it  may  be 
deduced  that  equili- 
brium is  only  possible 
in    flight    when    the 
main  plane  is  at  an 
angle  of  incidence  of 
6°. 

Thus,  a  perfectly 
rigid  unalterable 
aeroplane  could  only 
in  practice  fly  at  a 
single  angle  of  in- 
cidence. 

If  the  centre  of 
gravity  could  be 
shifted  by  some  means 
or  other,  to  the  posi- 
tion P4,  for  instance, 
the  one  angle  of  in- 
cidence at  which  the 
machine  could  fly 
would  change  to  4°. 
But  this  method  for 
varying  the  angle  of 
incidence  has  not 
hitherto  been  success- 
fully applied  in 
practice.* 

The  same  result,  however,  is  obtained  through  an  auxil- 
iary movable  plane  called  the  elevator. 

It  is  obvious  that  by  altering  the  position  of  one  of  the 

*  It  will  be  seen  hereafter  that,  if  the  method  can  be  applied,  it  would 
have  considerable  advantages. 


FIG.  2fi. 


96 


FLIGHT  WITHOUT  FORMULA 


planes  of  the  machine  the  sheaf  of  total  pressures  is  altered. 
Thus,  figs.  27  and  28  represent  the  total  pressures  in  the 
case  of  one  aeroplane  after  altering  the  position  of  the 


FIG.  27. 


elevator  (the  dotted  outline  indicating  the  main  plane). 
If  G  is  the  centre  of  gravity,  the  normal  angle  of  incidence 
passes  from  the  original  4°  to  2°  by  actuating  the  elevator. 


STABILITY  IN  STILL  AIR 


97 


Therefore,   as   stated   in   Chapter   I.,   by    means  of  the 
elevator    the    position    of    longitudinal    equilibrium    of   an 


FIG.  28. 

aeroplane,  and  hence  its  incidence,  can  be  varied  at 
will. 

The  action  of  the  elevator  will  be  further  considered  in 
the  next  chapter. 

But  the  longitudinal  equilibrium  of  an  aeroplane  must 

7 


98 


FLIGHT  WITHOUT  FORMULA 


also  be  stable  ;   in  other  words,  if  it  should  accidentally  lose 

its  position  of  equilibrium,  the  action  of  the  forces  arising 

through  the  air  current  from  the  very  fact  of  the  change 

in  its  position  should  cause 
it  to  regain  this  position 
instead  of  the  reverse. 

If  we  examine  once 
again  the  sheaf  of  total 
pressures  we  may  be  able 
to  gain  an  idea  of  how 
this  condition  of  affairs 
can  be  brought  about. 

Returning  again  to  fig. 
26,  let  us  suppose  that  by 
an  oscillation  about  its 
pitching  axis — the  move- 
ment being  counter-clock- 
wise —  the  angle  of  the 
planes,  which  is  normally 
6°  since  the  total  pressure 
P6  passes  through  the 
centre  of  gravity,  decreases 
to  4°,  the  resultant  of 
pressure  on  the  aeroplane 
in  its  new  position  will 
have  the  direction  P4 ; 
hence  this  resultant  will 
have,  relatively  to  the 
pitching  axis,  a  moment 
acting  clockwise,  which 

will    therefore  be  a  righting  couple  since   it   opposes   the 

oscillation  which  called  it  into  being. 

The  same  thing  would  come  to  pass  if  the  oscillation  was 

in  the  opposite  direction. 

In  this  case,  therefore,  equilibrium  is  stable. 

On  the  other  hand,  if  the  sheaf  of  pressures  was  arranged 

as  in   fig.  29,  the   pressure  P4  would   exert  an   upsetting 


FIG.  29. 


STABILITY   IN  STILL  AIR 


99 


En  te.rt.rty  Ectgre. 


0-1 


0-2 


0-3 


0-4 


0-5 


couple  relatively  to  the  pitching  axis,  and  equilibrium 
would  be  unstable. 

The  stability  or  instability  of  longitudinal  equilibrium 
therefore  depends  on  the  relative  positions  of  the  sheaf  of 
total  pressures  and  of  the  centre  of  gravity,  and  it  may  be  laid 
down  that  when  the  line 
of  normal  pressure  is  in- 
tersected by  those  of  the 
neighbouring  total  pres- 
sures at  a  point  about 
the  centre  of  gravity, 
equilibrium  is  stable, 
whereas  it  is  unstable  in 
the  reverse  case. 

Several  experimenters, 
and  among  them  notably 
M.  Eiffel,  have  sought  to 
determine  by  means  of 
tests  with  scale  models 
the  position  of  the  total 
pressures  corresponding 
to  ordinary  angles  of 
incidence.  Hitherto  M. 
Eiffel's  researches  have 
been  confined  to  tests  on 
model  wings  and  not  on 
complete  machines,  .but 
the  latter  are  now  being 
employed.  Moreover, 
the  results  do  not  indi-  v  on  ,  .  ,,, 

FIG.  30. — Angles  t  of  the  chord  and  the  wind. 

cate  the  actual  position 

and  distribution  of  the  pressure  itself,  but  only  the  point 
at  which  its  effect  is  applied  to  the  plane,  this  point  being 
known  as  the  centre  of  pressure. 

The  results  of  these  tests  have  been  plotted  in  two  series 
of  curves  which  give  the  position  of  the  centre  of  pressure 
with  a  change  in  the  angle  of  incidence.  Figs.  30  and  31 


0-6 


0-7 


0-8 


0-9 


10 


Irt 


-400-300-20°-IO°  0°  10°  20°  30 


40 


100 


FLIGHT  WITHOUT  FORMULAE 


reproduce,  by  way  of  indicating  the  system,  the  two  series 
of  curves  relating  to  a  Bleriot  XI.  wing. 

It  has  already  been  remarked  that  the  point  from  which 
a  force  is  applied  is  of  no  importance  ;  accordingly,  a  centre 


-30V 


-is* 


FIG.  31. 


of  pressure  is  of  value  only  in  so  far  as  it  enables  the  direc- 
tion of  the  pressures  themselves  to  be  traced. 

By  comparing  the  curve  shown  in  fig.  31  with  the  polar 
curves  already  referred  to  in  previous  chapters,  one  obtains 


STABILITY  IN  STILL  AIR 


101 


a  means  of  reproducing  both  the  position  and  the  magnitude, 
relatively  to  the  wing  itself,  of  the  pressures  it  receives  at 
varying 


FIG.  32. — Sheaf  of  pressures  on  a  flat  plane. 

Figs.  32,  33,  and  34  show  the  sheaf  of  these  pressures  in 
the  case,  respectively,  of  : 
A  flat  plane. 

A  slightly  cambered  plane  (e.g.  Maurice  Farman). 
A  heavily  cambered  plane  (Bleriot  XL). 
These  diagrams,  be  it  repeated,  relate  only  to  the  plane 
by  itself  and  not  to  complete  machines. 

*  A  description  of  the  method  may  be  found  in  an  article  published 
by  the  author  in  La  Technique  Aeronautique  (January  15,  1912). 


102 


FLIGHT  WITHOUT  FORMULAE 


Comparison  of  these  three  diagrams  brings  out  straight 
away  a  most  important  difference  between  the  flat  and  the 
two  cambered  planes.  That  relating  to  the  flat  plane, 
in  fact,  is  similar  in  its  arrangement  to  that  shown  in 


FIG.  33. — Sheaf  of  pressures  on  a  Maurice  Farman  plane. 

fig.  26,  which  served  to  illustrate  a  longitudinally  stable 
aeroplane. 

The  diagrams  relating  to  cambered  planes,  on  the  other 
hand,  are  analogous,  so  far  as  the  usual  flying  angles  are 
concerned,  to  fig.  29,  which  depicted  the  case  of  a  longi- 
tudinally unstable  aeroplane. 

Thus  we  can  state  that,  considered  by  itself,  a  flat  plane 
is  longitudinally  stable,  a  cambered  plane  unstable  (the 


STABILITY  IN  STILL  AIR 


103 


A -HHffA- 

A  [in  / 


B 


FIG.  34. — Sheaf  of  pressures  on  a  Bleriot  XI.  plane. 


104  FLIGHT  WITHOUT  FORMULA 

latter  statement,  however,  as  will  subsequently  be  seen,  is 
not  always  absolutely  correct).  On  the  other  hand,  every 
one  knows  nowadays  that  flat  planes  are  very  inefficient, 
producing  little  lift  with  great  drag. 

Hence  the  necessity  for  finding  means  to  preserve  the 
valuable  lifting  properties  of  the  cambered  plane  while 
counteracting  its  inherent  instability.  The  bird,  inciden- 
tally, showed  that  it  is  possible  to  fly  with  cambered  wings. 
And  it  was  by  adopting  this  example  and  improving  upon 
it  that  the  problem  was  solved,  by  providing  the  aeroplane 
with  a  tail. 

An  auxiliary  plane,  of  small  area  but  placed  at  a  con- 
siderable distance  from  the  centre  of  gravity  of  the  aero- 
plane, and  therefore  possessing  a  big  lever  arm  relatively 
to  the  centre  of  gravity,  receives  from  the  air,  when  in 
flight  the  aeroplane  comes  to  oscillate  in  either  direction, 
a  pressure  tending  to  restore  it  to  its  original  attitude. 
Since  this  pressure  is  exerted  at  the  end  of  a  long  lever 
arm,  the  couples,  which  are  always  righting  couples,  are  of 
considerably  greater  magnitude  than  the  upsetting  couples 
arising  from  the  inherent  instability  of  the  cambered  type 
itself. 

The  adoption  of  this  device  has  rendered  it  possible  to 
utilise  the  great  advantage  possessed  by  cambered  planes. 
Of  course  it  is  true  that  a  machine  with  perfectly  flat  planes 
would  be  doubly  stable,  by  virtue  both  of  its  main  planes 
and  of  its  tail,  but  to  propel  a  machine  of  this  type  would 
mean  an  extravagant  waste  of  power. 

Provided  the  tail  is  properly  designed,  there  is  nothing 
to  fear  even  with  an  inherently  unstable  plane,  and  the 
full  lifting  properties  of  the  camber  are  nevertheless 
retained. 

Subsequently  it  will  be  shown  that  the  use  of  a  tail 
entirely  changes  the  nature  of  the  sheaf  of  pressures,  which, 
in  an  aeroplane  provided  with  a  tail,  and  even  though  its 
planes  are  cambered,  assumes  the  stable  form  corresponding 
to  a  flat  plane. 


STABILITY   IN  STILL  AIR  105 

The  aeroplane  therefore  really  resolves  itself  into  a  main 
plane  and  a  tail.* 

Assuming,  once  and  for  all,  that  the  propeller-thrust 
passes  through  the  centre  of  gravity,  the  longitudinal 
equilibrium  of  an  aeroplane  about  the  centre  of  gravity 
can  be  represented  diagrammatically  by  one  of  the  three 
figs.,  35,  36,  and  37. 

In  fig.  35  the  tail  CD  is  normally  subjected  to  no  pressure 
and  cuts  the  air  with  its  forward  edge.  In  this  case,  equi- 
librium exists  if  the  pressure  Q  (in  practice  equal  to  the 
weight  of  the  machine)  on  the  main  plane  AB  passes  through 
the  centre  of  gravity  G. 

In  fig.  36  the  tail  CD  is  a  lifting  tail,  that  is,  normally 
it  meets  the  air  at  a  positive  angle  and  therefore  is  sub- 
jected to  a  pressure  q  directed  upwards.  For  equilibrium 
to  be  possible  in  this  case  the  pressure  Q  on  the  main  plane 
AB  must  pass  in  front  of  the  centre  of  gravity  G  of  the 
aeroplane,  so  that  its  couple  about  the  point  G  is  equal  to 
the  opposite  couple  q  of  the  tail. 

The  pressures  Q  and  q  must  be  inversely  proportional  to 
the  length  of  their  lever  arms.  When  compounded  they 
produce  a  resultant  or  total  pressure  equal  to  their  sum 
(and  to  the  weight  of  the  aeroplane),  which,  as  we  know, 
would  pass  through  the  centre  of  gravity. 

Lastly,  in  fig.  37  the  tail  CD  is  struck  by  the  air  on  its 
top  surface  and  receives  a  downward  pressure  q.  To  obtain 
equilibrium  the  pressure  Q  on  the  main  plane  AB  must 
pass  behind  the  centre  of  gravity  G,  the  couples  exerted 
about  this  point  by  the  pressures  Q  and  q  being,  as  before, 
equal  and  opposite.  Once  again,  the  pressures  Q  and  q 
must  be  inversely  proportional  to  the  length  of  their  lever 
arms.  If  compounded  they  would  produce  a  resultant 
total  pressure  equal  to  their  difference  (and  to  the  weight 

*  In  the  case  of  a  biplane  both  the  planes  will  be  considered  as  forming 
only  a  single  plane,  a  proceeding  which  is  quite  permissible  and  could, 
if  necessary,  be  easily  justified. 


106  FLIGHT  WITHOUT  FORMULA 


G        B  CD 

FIG.  35. 


c     D 


FIG.  36. 


P-Q-W    /Q 


B 


V 

* 


FIG.  37. 


STABILITY   IN  STILL  AIR 


107 


of  the  aeroplane),  which  would  again  pass  through  the 
centre  of  gravity. 

A  fourth  arrangement  (fig.  38),  and  the  first  to  be  adopted 
in  practice — since  the  1903  Wright  and  the  1906  Santos- 
Dumont  machines  were  of  this  type — is  also  possible.  It 
has  lately  been  made  use  of  again  hi  machines  of  the 
"  Canard  "  type  (e.g.  in  the  Voisin  hydro-aeroplane),  and 
consists  in  placing  the  tail,  which  must  of  course  be  a 
lifting  tail,  in  front  of  the  main  plane.  The  conditions  of 
equilibrium  are  the  same  as  in  fig.  36. 

In  an  aeroplane,  to  whichever  type  it  belongs,  the  term 


FIG.  38. 

longitudinal  dihedral,  or  Fee,  is  usually  applied  to  the  angle 
formed  between  the  chords  of  the  main  and  tail  planes. 

Hitherto  the  relative  positions  of  the  main  plane  and 
the  tail  have  been  considered  only  from  the  point  of  view 
of  equilibrium.  We  have  now  to  consider  the  stability  of 
this  equilibrium.  For  this  purpose  we  must  return  to  the 
sheaf  of  pressures  exerted,  not  on  the  main  plane  alone, 
but  on  the  whole  machine,  that  is,  we  have  to  consider  the 
sheaf  of  total  pressures. 

This  is  shown  in  fig.  39,*  which  relates  to  a  Bleriot  XI. 

*  At  the  time  when  this  treatise  was  first  published,  no  experiments 
had  been  made  to  determine  the  actual  sheaf  of  pressures  as  it  exists  in 
practice.  The  accompanying  diagrams  were  drawn  up  on  the  basis  of 
the  composition  of  forces. 


108 


FLIGHT  WITHOUT  FORMULA 


Pf 


FIG.  39. — Sheaf  of  total  pressures  on  a  complete  Bleriot  XI.  monoplane. 


wing  provided  with  a  tail  plane  of  one-tenth  the  area  of 
the  main  plane,  making  relatively  to  the  main  plane  a  longi- 


STABILITY  IN  STILL  AIR  109 

tudinal  Vee  or  dihedral  of  6°,  and  placed  at  a  distance 
behind  the  main  plane  equal  to  twice  the  chord  of  the 
latter. 

Let  it  be  assumed  that  the  normal  angle  of  incidence  of 
the  machine  is  6°,  which  would  be  the  case  if  its  centre 
of  gravity  coincided  with  the  pressure  P6,  at  G15  for  in- 
stance. 

An  idea  of  the  longitudinal  stability  of  the  machine  in 
these  conditions  may  be  guessed  from  calculating  the  couple 
caused  by  a  small  oscillation,  such  as  2°. 

Since  the  normal  incidence  is  6°,  the  length  of  the 
pressure  P6  is  equivalent  to  the  weight  of  the  machine. 
By  measuring  with  a  rule  the  length  of  P4  and  P8,  it  will 
be  found  to  be  equal  respectively  to  P6xO-74  and  to 
P6Xl-23.  The  values  of  P4  and  P8  therefore  are  the  pro- 
ducts of  the  weight  of  the  aeroplane  multiplied  by  0-74 
and  1-23  respectively. 

Further,  the  lever  arms  of  these  pressures  will,  on  measure- 
ment, be  found  to  be  respectively  0-043  and  0-025  times 
the  chord  of  the  main  plane. 

By  multiplying  and  taking  the  mean  of  the  results  ob- 
tained, which  only  differ  slightly,  it  will  be  found  that  an 
oscillation  of  2°  produces  a  couple  equal  to  0-031  times  the 
weight  of  the  aeroplane  multiplied  by  its  chord. 

This  couple  produced  by  an  oscillation  of  2°  can  obviously 
be  compared  to  the  couple  which  would  be  produced  by  an 
oscillation  of  2°  imparted  to  the  arm  of  a  pendulum  or 
balance  of  a  weight  equal  to  that  of  the  aeroplane. 

For  these  two  couples  to  be  equal,  the  pendulum  arm 
must  have  a  length  of  0-88  of  the  chord,  or,  if  the  latter  be 
2m.,  for  instance,  the  arm  would  have  to  measure  1-76  m. 
Hence,  the  longitudinal  stability  of  the  machine  under 
consideration  could  be  compared  to  that  of  an  imaginary 
pendulum  consisting  of  a  weight  equal  to  that  of  the  aero- 
plane placed  at  the  end  of  a  1-76  m.  arm.  It  is  evident 
that  the  measure  of  stability  possessed  by  such  a  pendulum 
is  really  considerable. 


110  FLIGHT  WITHOUT  FORMULA 

Having  laid  down  this  method  of  calculating  the  longi- 
tudinal stability  of  an  aeroplane,  fig.  39  may  once  again  be 
considered. 

To  begin  with,  it  is  evident  that  if  the  centre  of  gravity 
is  lowered,  though  still  remaining  on  the  pressure  line  P6, 
the  longitudinal  stability  of  the  machine  will  be  increased 
since,  the  pressure  lines  being  spaced  further  apart,  then- 
lever  arms  will  intersect.  Therefore,  under  certain  condi- 
tions, the  lowering  of  the  centre  of  gravity  may  increase 
longitudinal  stability,  though  this  has  nothing  whatsoever 
to  do  with  a  fictitious  "  centre  of  lift."  Besides,  in  practice 
the  centre  of  gravity  can  only  be  lowered  to  a  very  small 
extent,  and  the  possible  advantage  derived  therefrom  is 
consequently  slight,  while,  on  the  other  hand,  it  entails 
disadvantages  which  will  be  dealt  with  hi  the  next 
chapter. 

Finally,  the  use  of  certain  plane  sections  robs  the  lower- 
ing of  the  centre  of  gravity  of  any  advantages  which  it 
may  otherwise  possess,  a  point  which  will  be  referred  to  in 
detail  hereafter. 

Returning  to  fig.  39 — the  normal  angle  of  incidence  being 
6°,  and  the  non-lifting  tail  forming  this  same  angle  with  the 
chord  of  the  main  plane,  the  tail  plane  will  normally  be 
parallel  with  the  wind  (see  fig.  35). 

If  the  centre  of  gravity,  instead  of  being  at  Gl5  were  at 
G2,  on  the  pressure  line  P8,  the  tail  would  become  a  lifting 
tail  (see  fig.  36),  having  a  normal  angle  of  incidence  of  2°. 
Calculating  as  before,  the  length  of  the  arm  of  the  imaginary 
equivalent  pendulum  is  found  to  be  only  0-63  of  the  chord, 
or  1-26  m.  if  the  chord  measures  2  m. 

The  aeroplane  is  therefore  less  stable  than  in  the  previous 
example. 

On  the  contrary,  if  the  centre  of  gravity  were  situated  at 
G3,  corresponding  to  a  normal  incidence  of  4°,  so  that  the 
tail  is  struck  by  the  wind  on  its  top  surface  at  an  angle  of 
2°  (in  other  words,  is  placed  at  a  "  negative  "  angle  of  2°, 
see  fig.  37),  the  equivalent  pendulum  would  have  to  have 


STABILITY   IN  STILL  AIR  111 

an  arm  3-50  m.  long,*  or  about  twice  as  long  as  when  the 
normal  incidence  is  6°. 

From  this  one  would  at  first  sight  be  tempted  to  conclude 
that  the  longitudinal  stability  of  an  aeroplane  is  the  greater 
the  smaller  its  normal  flying  angle,  or,  in  other  words,  the 
higher  its  speed  ;  but,  although  this  may  be  true  in  certain 
cases,  it  is  not  so  in  others.  Thus,  if  the  alteration  in  the 
angle  of  incidence  were  obtained  by  shifting  the  centre  of 
gravity,  the  conclusion  would  be  true,  since  the  sheaf  of 
total  pressures  would  remain  unaltered. 

But  if  the  reduction  of  the  angle  is  effected  either  by 
diminishing  the  longitudinal  dihedral  or,  and  this  is  really 
the  same  thing,  by  actuating  the  elevator,  the  conclusion  no 
longer  holds  good,  for  the  sheaf  of  total  pressures  does 
change,  and  in  this  case,  as  the  following  chapter  will  show, 
so  far  from  increasing  longitudinal  stability,  a  reduction 
of  the  angle  of  incidence  may  diminish  stability  even  to 
vanishing  point. 

It  should  further  be  noted  that  the  arrangement  shown 
diagrammatically  in  fig.  37,  which  consists  hi  disposing 
the  tail  plane  so  that  it  meets  the  wind  with  its  top  surface 
in  normal  flight,  is  productive  of  better  longitudinal  stability 
than  the  use  of  a  lifting  tail.f  This  conclusion  will  be 
found  to  be  borne  out  by  fig.  40,  showing  the  pressures 
exerted  on  the  main  plane  by  itself. 

By  measuring  the  couples,  it  is  clear  that  if  the  centre  of 
gravity  is  situated  at  G1?  for  instance,  the  plane  is  unstable, 
as  we  already  knew  ;  but  if  the  centre  of  gravity  were 
placed  far  enough  forward  relatively  to  the  pressures,  at  G2, 
for  instance,  a  variation  in  the  angle  may  set  up  righting 
couples  even  with  a  cambered  plane.  The  couple  resulting 
from  a  variation  of  this  kind  is  the  difference  between  the 

*  Actually,  the  arm  is  longer  if  the  oscillation  is  in  the  sense  of  a  dive 
than  in  the  case  of  stalling,  which  is  quite  in  agreement  with  the  con- 
clusions which  will  be  set  out  later. 

t  It  will  be  seen  later  that  this  arrangement  also  seems  to  be  excellent 
from  the  point  of  view  of  the  behaviour  of  a  machine  in  winds. 


112  FLIGHT  WITHOUT  FORMULAE 

PlS 


PIO 


A 


1 


FIG.  40. 


B 


STABILITY  IN  STILL  AIR 


113 


couples  of  the  pressure,  before  and  after  the  oscillation, 
about  the  centre  of  gravity. 

Cambered  planes  in  themselves  may  therefore  be  rendered 
stable  by  advancing  the  centre  of  gravity. 

This  is  not  difficult  to  understand  ;  as  a  plane  is  further 
removed  from  the  centre  of  gravity  it  begins  to  behave 


P. 5 


FIG.  41. — Sheaf  of  total  pressures  on  a  Maurice  Farman  aeroplane. 

more  and  more  like  the  usual  tail  plane.  In  these  conditions 
the  stability  of  an  aeroplane  becomes  very  good  indeed, 
since  it  is  assisted  by  main  and  tail  planes  alike. 

This  explains  why  the  tail-foremost  arrangement  (see 
fig.  38)  can  be  stable,  for  in  this  arrangement  the  tail, 
situated  in  front,  really  performs  the  function  of  an  "  un- 
stabiliser,"  which  is  overcome  by  the  inherent  stability  of 

8 


114  FLIGHT  WITHOUT  FORMULA 

the  main  plane  owing  to  the  fact  that  the  latter  is  situated 
far  behind  the  centre  of  gravity. 

Fig.  40  (which  relates  to  the  pressures  on  the  main 
plane)  further  shows  that  if  the  centre  of  gravity  is  low 
enough,  at  G\,  for  instance,  a  Bleriot  XI.  wing  would  become 
stable  from  being  inherently  unstable.  This  is  the  reason 
for  the  stabilising  influence  of  a  low  centre  of  gravity, 
which  the  examination  of  the  sheaf  of  total  pressures 
already  revealed. 

For  the  sake  of  comparison,  fig.  41  is  reproduced,  showing 
the  sheaf  of  total  pressures  belonging  to  an  aeroplane  of 
the  type  previously  considered,  but  with  a  Maurice  Farman 
plane  instead  of  a  Bleriot  XI.  section. 

The  pressure  lines  are  almost  parallel. 

Lowering  the  centre  of  gravity  in  a  machine  of  this  type 
would  produce  no  appreciable  advantage. 

It  will  be  seen  that  the  pressure  lines  draw  ever  closer 
together  as  the  incidence  increases,  and  become  almost 
coincident  near  90°.  This  shows  that  if,  by  some  means  or 
other,  flight  could  be  achieved  at  these  high  angles — which 
could  only  be  done  by  gliding  down  on  an  almost  vertical 
path,  the  machine  remaining  practically  horizontal,  which 
may  be  termed  "  parachute  "  flight,  or,  more  colloquially, 
a  "  pancake  " — longitudinal  stability  would  be  precarious 
in  the  extreme,  and  that  the  machine  would  soon  upset, 
probably  sliding  down  on  its  tail.  Parachute  flight  and 
"  pancake  "  descents  would  therefore  appear  out  of  the 
question,  failing  the  invention  of  special  devices. 


CHAPTER  VII 
STABILITY  IN  STILL  AIR 

LONGITUDINAL  STABILITY  (cone 


IN  the  last  chapter  it  was  shown  that  the  longitudinal 
stability  of  an  aeroplane  depends  on  the  nature  of  the  sheaf 
of  total  pressures  exerted  at  various  angles  of  incidence  on 
the  whole  machine,  and  that  stability  could  only  exist  if 
any  variation  of  the  incidence  brought  about  a  righting 
couple. 

But  this  is  not  all,  for  the  righting  couple  set  up  by 
an  oscillation  may  not  be  strong  enough  to  prevent  the 
oscillation  from  gradually  increasing,  by  a  process  similar 
to  that  of  a  pendulum,  until  it  is  sufficient  to  upset  the 
aeroplane. 

The  whole  question,  indeed,  is  the  relation  between  the 
effect  of  the  tail  and  a  mechanical  factor,  known  as  the 
moment  of  inertia,  which  measures  in  a  way  the  sensitive- 
ness of  the  machine  to  a  turning  force  or  couple. 

A  few  explanations  in  regard  to  this  point  may  here  be 
useful. 

A  body  at  rest  cannot  start  to  move  of  its  own  accord. 
A  body  in  motion  cannot  itself  modify  its  motion. 

When  a  body  at  rest  starts  to  move,  or  when  the  motion 
of  a  body  is  modified,  an  extraneous  cause  or  force  must 
have  intervened. 

Thus  a  body  moving  at  a  certain  speed  will  continue  to 
move  in  a  straight  line  at  this  same  speed  unless  some  force 
intervenes  to  modify  the  speed  or  deflect  the  trajectory. 


116 


FLIGHT   WITHOUT    FORMULA 


The  effect  of  a  force  on  a  body  is  smaller,  the  greater  the 
inertia  or  the  mass  of  the  latter. 

Similarly,  if  a  body  is  turning  round  a  fixed  axis,  it  will 
continue  to  turn  at  the  same  speed  unless  a  couple  exerted 
about  this  axis  comes  to  modify  this  speed. 

This  couple  will  have  the  smaller  effect  on  the  body,  the 
more  resistance  the  latter  opposes  to  a  turning  action,  that 
is,  the  more  inertia  of  rotation  it  possesses.  It  is  this 
inertia  which  is  termed  the  moment  of  inertia  of  the  body 
about  its  axis.  The  moment  of  inertia  increases  rapidly  as 
the  masses  which  constitute  the  body  are  spaced  further 
apart,  for,  in  calculating  the  moment  of  inertia,  the  dis- 
tances of  the  masses  from  the  axis  of  rotation  figure,  not 


in  simple  proportion,  but  as  their  square.  An  example  will 
make  this  principle,  which  enters  into  every  problem  con- 
cerning the  oscillations  of  an  aeroplane,  more  clear. 

At  O,  on  the  axis  AB  (fig.  42)  of  a  turning  handle  a  rod 
XX  is  placed,  along  which  two  equal  masses  MM  can  slide, 
their  respective  distances  from  the  point  O  always  remain- 
ing equal.  Clearly,  if  the  rod,  balanced  horizontally,  were 
forced  out  of  this  position  by  a  shock,  the  effect  of  this 
disturbing  influence  would  be  the  smaller,  the  further  the 
masses  MM  were  situated  from  the  point  O,  in  other  words, 
the  greater  the  moment  of  inertia  of  the  system. 

If  the  rod  were  drawn  back  to  a  horizontal  position  by 
means  of  a  spring  it  would  begin  to  oscillate  ;  these  oscilla- 
tions will  be  slower  the  further  apart  the  masses  ;  but,  on 
the  other  hand,  they  will  die  away  more  slowly,  for  the 


STABILITY  IN  STILL  AIR  117 

system  would  persist  longer  in  its  motion  the  greater  its 
moment  of  inertia. 

These  elementary  principles  of  mechanics  show  that  an 
aeroplane  with  a  high  moment  of  inertia  about  its  pitching 
axis,  that  is,  whose  masses  are  spread  over  some  distance 
longitudinally  instead  of  being  concentrated,  will  be  more 
reluctant  to  oscillate,  while  its  oscillations  will  be  slow,  thus 
giving  the  pilot  time  to  correct  them.  On  the  other  hand, 
they  persist  longer  and  have  a  tendency  to  increase  if  the 
tail  plane  is  not  sufficiently  large. 

This  relation  between  the  stabilising  effect  of  the  tail 
and  the  moment  of  inertia  in  the  longitudinal  sense  has 
already  been  referred  to  at  the  beginning  of  this  chapter. 
It  may  be  termed  the  condition  of  oscillatory  stability. 

In  practice  most  pilots  prefer  to  fly  sensitive  machines 
responding  to  the  slightest  touch  of  the  controls.  Hence 
the  majority  of  constructors  aim  at  reducing  the  longi- 
tudinal moment  of  inertia  by  concentrating  the  masses. 

It  should  be  added  that  the  lowering  of  the  centre  of 
gravity  increases  the  moment  of  inertia  of  an  aeroplane 
and  hence  tends  to  set  up  oscillation,  one  of  the  disadvan- 
tages of  a  low  centre  of  gravity  which  was  referred  to  in 
the  last  chapter. 

By  concentrating  the  masses  the  longitudinal  oscillations 
of  an  aeroplane  become  quicker  and,  although  not  so  easy 
to  correct,  present  one  great  advantage  arising  from  their 
greater  rapidity. 

For,  apart  from  its  double  stabilising  function,  the  tail 
damps  out  oscillations,  forms  as  it  were  a  brake  in  this 
respect,  and  the  more  effectively  the  quicker  the  oscillations. 
The  reason  for  this  is  simple  enough.  Just  as  rain,  though 
falling  vertically,  leaves  an  oblique  trace  on  the  windows 
of  a  railway-carriage,  the  trace  being  more  oblique  the 
quicker  the  speed  of  travel,  so  the  relative  wind  caused  by 
the  speed  of  the  aeroplane  strikes  the  tail  plane  at  a 
greater  or  smaller  angle  when  the  tail  oscillates  than  when 
it  does  not,  and  this  with  all  the  greater  effect  the  quicker 


118  FLIGHT  WITHOUT  FORMULAE 

the  oscillation.  It  is  a  question  of  component  speeds 
similar  to  that  which  will  be  considered  when  we  come  to 
deal  with  the  effect  of  wind  on  an  aeroplane. 

The  oscillation  of  the  tail  therefore  sets  up  additional 
resistance,  which  has  to  be  added  to  the  righting  couple  due 
to  the  stability  of  the  machine,  as  if  the  tail  had  to  move 
through  a  viscous,  sticky  fluid,  and  this  effect  is  the  more 
intense  the  quicker  the  oscillation.  It  is  a  true  brake  effect. 

In  this  respect  the  concentration  of  the  masses  possesses 
a  real  practical  advantage. 

According  to  the  last  chapter,  an  entirely  rigid  aeroplane, 
none  of  whose  parts  could  be  moved,  could  only  fly  at  a 
single  angle,  that  at  which  the  reactions  of  the  air  on  its 
various  parts  are  in  equilibrium  about  the  centre  of  gravity. 
In  order  to  enable  flight  to  be  made  at  varying  angles  the 
aeroplane  must  possess  some  movable  part — a  controlling 
surface. 

Leaving  aside  for  the  moment  the  device  of  shifting  the 
centre  of  gravity  (never  hitherto  employed),  the  easiest 
method  would  be  to  vary  the  angle  formed  by  the  main 
plane  and  the  tail,  i.e.  the  longitudinal  dihedral. 

The  method  was  first  adopted  by  the  brothers  Wright, 
and  is  even  at  the  present  time  employed  in  several 
machines.  Very  powerful  in  its  effect,  the  variations  in 
the  angle  of  the  tail  plane  affect  the  angle  of  incidence  by 
more  than  then'  own  amount,  and  this  hi  greater  measure 
the  bigger  the  angle  of  incidence. 

Figs.  43  and  44  represent  two  different  positions  of  the 
sheaf  of  total  pressures  on  an  aeroplane  with  a  Bleriot  XI. 
plane,  and  a  non-lifting  tail  of  an  area  one-tenth  that  of 
the  mam  plane  and  situated  in  rear  of  it  at  a  distance  equal 
to  twice  the  chord.  In  fig.  43  the  tail  plane  forms  an 
angle  of  8°  with  the  chord  of  the  main  plane  ;  in  fig.  44 
this  angle  is  only  6°. 

If  the  centre  of  gravity  is  situated  at  Gx,  the  normal 
angle  of  incidence  passes  from  4°  in  the  first  case  to  2°  in 
the  second.  This  variation  in  the  angle  of  incidence  is 


STABILITY   IN  STILL  AIR 


119 


FIG.  43. — Sheaf  of  total  pressures  on  a  Bleriot  XI.  monoplane  with  a 
longitudinal  V  of  8°. 


120 


FLIGHT  WITHOUT  FORMULA 


PlO 
P8 

PS 


Po 


ill 


FIG.  44. — Sheaf  of  total  pressures  on  a  Bleriot  XI.  monoplane  with  a 
longitudinal  V  of  6°. 


STABILITY  IN  STILL  AIR  121 

therefore  integrally  the  same  as  that  of  the  angle  of  the 
tail  plane. 

If  the  centre  of  gravity  is  at  G2,  the  normal  angle  of 
incidence  would  pass  from  6°  to  3|°,  and  would  therefore 
vary  by  2|°  for  a  variation  in  the  angle  of  the  tail  of 
only  2°. 

Lastly,  if  the  centre  of  gravity  is  at  G3,  the  normal  angle 
of  incidence  would  pass  from  8°  to  5°,  a  variation  equal  to 
one  and  a  half  times  that  of  the  angle  of  the  tail. 

A  comparison  of  figs.  43  and  44  further  shows  that  the 
lines  of  total  pressure  are  spaced  further  apart  the  greater 
the  longitudinal  dihedral.  Now,  other  things  being  equal, 
the  farther  apart  the  lines  of  pressure  the  greater  the  longi- 
tudinal stability  of  an  aeroplane.  Hence  the  value  of  the 
longitudinal  dihedral  is  most  important  from  the  point  of 
view  of  stability. 

If  the  tail  plane  (non-lifting)  is  normally  parallel  to  the 
relative  wind,  the  longitudinal  dihedral  is  equal  to  the 
normal  angle  of  incidence.  But  if  a  lifting  tail  is  employed, 
the  longitudinal  dihedral  must  necessarily  be  smaller  than 
the  angle  of  incidence  (this  is  clearly  shown  in  fig.  36). 
If  the  normal  angle  of  incidence  is  small,  as  in  the  case  of 
large  biplanes  and  high-speed  machines,  the  longitudinal 
dihedral  is  very  small  indeed  and  stability  may  reach  a 
vanishing  point. 

But  if,  in  normal  flight,  the  tail  plane  meets  the  wind 
with  its  upper  surface  (i.e.  flies  at  a  negative  angle),  the 
longitudinal  dihedral,  however  small  the  normal  angle  of 
incidence,  will  always  be  sufficient  to  maintain  an  excellent 
degree  of  stability.  This  conclusion  may  be  compared 
with  that  put  forward  in  the  previous  chapter  in  regard 
to  the  advantage  of  causing  the  tail  to  fly  at  a  negative 
angle. 

The  foregoing  shows  that  the  reduction  of  the  angle  of 
incidence  by  means  of  a  movable  tail  plane — i.e.  by  alter- 
ing the  longitudinal  dihedral — has  the  disadvantage  that 
every  alteration  in  the  position  of  the  tail  plane  brings 


122  FLIGHT  WITHOUT  FORMULAE 

about  a  variation  in  the  condition  of  stability  of  the 
aeroplane. 

By  plotting  the  sheaf  of  total  pressures  corresponding 
to  very  small  values  of  the  longitudinal  dihedral,  it  would 
soon  be  seen  that  if  the  latter  is  too  small,  equilibrium 
may  become  unstable. 

A  machine  with  a  movable  tail  and  normally  possessing 
but  little  stability — such,  for  instance,  as  a  machine  whose 
tail  lifts  too  much — may  lose  all  stability  if  the  angle  of 
incidence  is  reduced  for  the  purpose  of  returning  to  earth. 
This  effect  is  particularly  liable  to  ensue  when,  at  the 
moment  of  starting  a  glide,  the  pilot  reduces  his  incidence, 
as  is  the  general  custom. 

Losing  longitudinal  stability,  the  machine  tends  to 
pursue  a  flight-path  which,  instead  of  remaining  straight, 
curls  downwards  towards  the  ground,  and  at  the  same  time 
the  speed  no  longer  remains  uniform  and  is  accelerated. 

The  glide  becomes  ever  steeper.  The  machine  dives, 
and  frequently  the  efforts  made  by  the  pilot  to  right  it  by 
bringing  the  movable  tail  back  into  a  stabilising  position 
are  ineffectual  by  reason  of  the  fact  that  the  tail  becomes 
subject,  at  the  constantly  accelerating  speed,  to  pressures 
which  render  the  operation  of  the  control  more  and  more 
difficult. 

In  the  author's  opinion,  the  use  of  a  movable  tail  is 
dangerous,  since  the  whole  longitudinal  equilibrium  depends 
on  the  working  of  a  movable  control  surface  which  may 
be  brought  into  a  fatal  position  by  an  error  of  judgment, 
or  even  by  too  ample  a  movement  on  the  part  of  the  pilot. 

For,  apart  from  the  case  just  dealt  with,  should  the 
movable  tail  happen  to  take  up  that  position  in  which 
the  one  angle  of  incidence  making  for  stability  is  that 
corresponding  to  zero  lift,  i.e.  when  the  main  plane  meets 
the  wind  along  its  "  imaginary  chord  "  (see  Chapter  I.), 
longitudinal  equilibrium  would  disappear  and  the  machine 
would  dive  headlong. 

In  this  respect,  therefore,  the  movements  of  a  movable 


STABILITY  IN  STILL  AIR  123 

tail  should  be  limited  so  that  it  could  never  be  made  to 
assume  the  dangerous  attitude  corresponding  to  the  rupture 
or  instability  of  the  equilibrium. 

A  better  method  is  to  have  the  tail  plane  fixed  and  rigid, 
and,  hi  order  to  obtain  the  variations  in  the  angle  of  in- 
cidence required  in  practical  flight,  to  make  use  of  an 
auxiliary  surface  known  as  the  elevator. 

Take  a  simple  example,  that  of  the  aeroplane  diagram- 
matically  shown  in  fig.  45,  possessing  a  non-lifting  tail 


C        D    £ 

FIG.  45. 


plane  CD,  normally  meeting  the  wind  edge-on,  to  which  is 
added  a  small  auxiliary  plane  DE,  constituting  the  elevator, 
capable  of  turning  about  the  axis  D. 

So  long  as  this  elevator  remains,  like  the  fixed  tail, 
parallel  to  the  flight-path,  the  equilibrium  of  the  aeroplane 
will  remain  undisturbed.  But  if  the  elevator  is  made  to 
assume  the  position  DE  (fig.  46),  the  relative  wind  strikes 
its  upper  surface  and  tends  to  depress  it.  Hence  the 
incidence  of  the  main  plane  will  be  increased  until  the 
couple  of  the  pressure  Q  exerted  about  the  centre  of  gravity, 
and  the  couple  of  the  pressure  q'  exerted  on  the  elevator, 
together  become  equal  to  the  opposite  moment  of  the 
pressure  q  on  the  fixed  tail. 

Again,  if  the  elevator  is  made  to  assume  the  position 


124 


FLIGHT  WITHOUT  FORMULAE 


DE2  (fig.  47),  the  incidence  decreases  until  a  fresh  condition 
of  equilibrium  is  re-established. 

Each  position  of  the  elevator  therefore  corresponds  to 


FIG.  46. 

one  single  angle  of  incidence  ;  hence  the  elevator  can  be 
used  to  alter  the  incidence  according  to  the  requirements 
of  the  moment. 


FIG.  47. 


It  will  be  obvious  that  the  effectiveness  of  an  elevator 
depends  on  its  dimensions  relatively  to  those  of  the  fixed 
tail,  and,  further,  that  if  small  enough  it  would  be  incapable, 
even  in  its  most  active  position,  to  reduce  the  angle  of 


STABILITY  IN  STILL  AIR  125 

incidence  to  such  an  extent  as  to  break  the  longitudinal 
equilibrium  of  the  aeroplane. 

This,  in  the  author's  opinion,  is  the  only  manner  in 
which  the  elevator  should  be  employed,  for  the  danger  of 
increasing  the  elevator  relatively  to  the  fixed  tail  to  the 
point  even  of  suppressing  the  latter  altogether  has  already 
been  referred  to  above. 

In  the  position  of  longitudinal  equilibrium  corresponding 
to  normal  flight,  the  elevator,  in  a  well-designed  and  well- 
tuned  machine,  should  be  neutral  (see  fig.  45).  It  follows 
that  all  the  remarks  already  made  with  reference  to  the 
important  effect  on  stability  of  the  value  of  the  longitudinal 
dihedral  apply  with  equal  force  when  the  movable  tail 
has  been  replaced  by  a  fixed  tail  plane  and  an  elevator. 

The  extent  of  the  longitudinal  dihedral  depends  on  the 
design  of  the  machine,  and  more  especially  on  the  position 
of  the  centre  of  gravity  relatively  to  the  planes,  and  on 
its  normal  angle  of  incidence,  which,  again,  is  governed  by 
various  factors,  and  in  chief  by  the  motive  power. 

The  process  of  tuning-up,  just  referred  to,  consists  prin- 
cipally in  adjusting  by  means  of  experiment  the  position  of 
the  fixed  tail  so  that  normally  the  elevator  remains  neutral. 
Tuning-up  is  effected  by  the  pilot ;  in  the  end  it  amounts  to 
a  permanent  alteration  of  the  longitudinal  dihedral ;  where- 
fore attention  must  be  drawn  to  the  need  for  caution  in 
effecting  it. 

There  are  certain  pilots  who  prefer  to  maintain  the 
longitudinal  dihedral  rather  greater  than  actually  necessary 
(i.e.  with  the  arms  of  the  V  close  together),  with  the  con- 
sequence that  their  machines  normally  fly  with  the  elevator 
slightly  placed  in  the  position  for  coming  down,  or  meeting 
the  wind  with  its  upper  surface.  In  the  case  of  machines 
with  tails  lifting  rather  too  much,  the  practice  is  one  to 
be  recommended,  for  machines  of  this  description  are 
dangerous  even  when  possessing  a  fixed  tail,  since  if  the 
elevator  is  moved  into  the  position  for  descent  the  longi- 
tudinal dihedral  is  still  diminished,  though  in  a  lesser 


126  FLIGHT  WITHOUT  FORMULA 

degree,  and  if  it  were  already  very  small,  stability  would 
disappear  and  a  dive  ensue. 

Therefore  the  tuning-up  process  referred  to  has  this 
advantage  in  the  case  of  an  aeroplane  with  a  fixed  tail 
exerting  too  much  lift,  that  it  reduces  the  amplitude  of 
dangerous  positions  of  the  elevator  and  increases  the 
amplitude  of  its  righting  positions. 

If  the  size  of  the  elevator  is  reduced,  with  the  object  of 
preventing  loss  of  longitudinal  equilibrium  or  stability, 
to  such  a  pitch  as  to  cause  fear  that  it  would  no  longer 
suffice  to  increase  the  angle  of  incidence  to  the  degree 
required  for  climbing,  an  elevator  can  be  designed  which 
would  act  much  more  strongly  for  increasing  the  angle 
than  for  reducing  it,  by  making  it  concave  upwards  if 
situated  in  the  tail,  or  concave  downwards  if  placed  in 
front  of  the  machine. 

For  it  may  be  placed  either  behind  or  in  front,  and 
analogous  diagrams  to  those  given  in  figs.  46  and  47  would 
show  that  its  effect  is  precisely  the  same  in  either  case. 

But  it  should  also  be  noted  that  if  an  elevator  normally 
possessing  no  angle  of  incidence  is  moved  so  as  to  produce 
a  certain  variation  in  the  angle  of  incidence  of  the  main 
plane,  of  2°,  for  instance,  the  angle  through  which  it  must 
be  moved  will  be  smaller  in  the  case  of  a  front  elevator 
than  in  that  of  a  rear  elevator,  the  difference  between  the 
two  values  of  the  elevator  angle  being  double  (i.e.  4°  in  the 
above  case)  that  of  the  variation  in  the  angle  of  incidence 
(assuming,  of  course,  that  front  and  rear  elevators  are  of 
equal  area  and  have  the  same  lever  arm). 

This  is  easily  accounted  for  by  the  fact  that  a  variation 
in  the  angle  of  incidence,  which  inclines  the  whole  machine, 
is  added  to  the  angular  displacement  of  a  front  elevator, 
whereas  it  must  be  deducted  from  that  of  the  rear 
elevator. 

Thus,  if  we  assume  that  the  elevator  must  be  placed  at 
an  angle  of  10°  to  cause  a  variation  in  the  incidence  of  2°, 
the  elevator  need  only  be  moved  through  8°  if  placed  in 


STABILITY  IN  STILL  AIR  127 

front,  whereas  it  would  have  to  be  moved  through  12°  if 
placed  in  rear. 

A  front  elevator,  therefore,  is  stronger  in  its  action  than 
a  rear  elevator.  But  it  is  also  more  violent,  as  it  meets  the 
wind  first,  which  may  tend  to  exaggerated  manoeuvres. 
Finally,  referring  to  the  remarks  in  the  previous  chapters 
regarding  the  "  tail-first  "  arrangement,  the  longitudinal 
stability  of  an  aeroplane  is  diminished  to  a  certain  degree 
when  the  elevator  is  situated  in  front.  These  are  no  doubt 
the  reasons  that  have  led  constructors  to  an  ever-increasing 
extent  to  give  up  the  front  elevator.* 

All  these  facts  plainly  go  to  show,  as  already  stated,  that 
stability  does  not  necessarily  increase  with  speed.  Aero- 
planes subject  to  a  sudden  precipitate  diving  tendency  only 
succumb  to  it  when  their  incidence  decreases  to  a  large 
extent  and  their  speed  exceeds  a  certain  limit,  sometimes 
known  as  the  critical  speed,  at  which  longitudinal  stability, 
far  from  increasing,  actually  disappears  altogether.  The 
term  critical  speed  is  not,  however,  likely  to  survive  long, 
if  only  because  it  refers  to  a  fault  of  existing  machines 
which,  let  us  hope,  will  disappear  in  the  future.  And  it 
would  disappear  all  the  more  rapidly  if  the  variations  in 
the  angle  of  incidence  required  in  practical  flight  could  be 
brought  about,  not  by  a  movable  plane  turning  about  a 
horizontal  axis,  but  by  shifting  the  position  of  the  centre  of 
gravity  relatively  to  the  planes,  which  could  be  done  by 
displacing  heavy  masses  (such  as  the  engine  and  passengers' 
seats,  for  example)  on  board  or,  also,  by  shifting  the  planes 
themselves. 

In  this  case,  as  we  have  seen,  the  variations  of  the  in- 
cidence would  have  no  effect  on  the  longitudinal  dihedral, 
so  that  the  sheaf  of  total  pressures  would  not  change,  and 
then  it  would  be  true  that  stability  increased  with  the 
speed.  Then,  also,  there  would  be  no  critical  speed. 

*  The  placing  of  the  propeller  in  front  and  the  production  of  tractor 
machines — though,  in  the  author's  opinion,  an  unfortunate  arrangement 
— has  also  formed  a  contributory  cause. 


128  FLIGHT  WITHOUT  FORMULA 

As  stated  previously,  the  horizontal  flight  of  an  aeroplane 
is  a  perpetual  state  of  equilibrium  maintained  by  con- 
stantly actuating  the  elevator.  The  idea  of  controlling 
this  automatically  is  nearly  as  old  as  the  aeroplane  itself. 
But,  as  this  question  of  automatic  stability  chiefly  arises 
through  the  presence  of  aerial  disturbances  and  gusts,  its 
discussion  will  be  reserved  for  the  final  chapter,  which 
deals  with  the  effects  of  wind  on  an  aeroplane. 

Hitherto  it  has  been  assumed  that  the  propeller-thrust 
passes  through  the  centre  of  gravity,  and  therefore  has 
no  effect  on  longitudinal  equilibrium.  The  angle  of  inci- 
dence corresponding  to  a  given  position  of  the  elevator 
therefore  remains  the  same  in  horizontal,  climbing,  or 
gliding  flight. 

But  if  the  propeller-thrust  does  not  pass  through  the 
centre  of  gravity,  it  will  exert  at  this  point  a  couple  which, 
according  to  its  direction,  would  tend  either  to  increase  or 
diminish  the  incidence  which  the  aeroplane  would  take  up 
as  a  glider  (assuming  that  the  elevator  had  not  been  moved). 
In  that  case  any  variation  in  the  propeller- thrust,  more 
particularly  if  it  ceased  altogether  either  by  engine  failure 
or  through  the  pilot  switching  off,  would  alter  the  angle  of 
incidence. 

Thus  if  the  thrust  passed  below  the  centre  of  gravity 
the  stopping  of  the  engine  would  cause  the  angle  of  in- 
cidence to  diminish,  and  thus  produce  a  tendency  to  dive. 
On  the  other  hand,  if  the  thrust  is  above  the  centre  of 
gravity,  the  stopping  of  the  engine  would  increase  the 
angle  of  incidence,  and  therefore  tend  to  make  the  machine 
stall. 

Practical  experience  with  present-day  aeroplanes  teaches 
that  in  case  of  engine  stoppage  it  is  better  to  decrease  the 
angle  of  incidence  than  to  leave  it  unchanged,  and,  above 
all,  than  to  increase  it. 

The  reason  for  this  is  that  the  transition  from  horizontal 
flight  to  gliding  flight  is  not  instantaneous  as  is  often 
thought  from  purely  theoretical  considerations.  An  aero- 


STABILITY  IN  STILL  AIR  129 

plane  moving  horizontally  tends,  through  its  inertia,  to 
maintain  this  direction.  Since  there  is  now  no  longer  any 
propeller-thrust  to  balance  the  head-resistance  of  the 
machine,  it  loses  speed,  which  is  to  be  avoided  at  all 
costs  by  reason  of  the  ensuing  dive.  Therefore  a  pilot 
reduces  his  angle  of  incidence  in  order  to  diminish  the 
drag  of  the  aeroplane,  and  hence  to  maintain  speed  as  far 
as  possible. 

This  action  usually  produces  the  desired  effect,  as  the 
normal  angle  of  incidence  of  most  aeroplanes  is  greater 
than  their  optimum  angle  ;  but  this  would  not  be  the  case  if 
the  optimum  angle,  or  a  still  smaller  angle,  constituted  the 
normal  flying  angle. 

The  reduction  of  the  angle  of  incidence  at  the  moment 
the  engine  stops  has  the  additional  effect  of  producing  the 
flattest  gliding  angle,  which,  as  has  already  been  shown, 
corresponds  to  the  use  of  the  optimum  angle.  On  the 
other  hand,  stability  increases  through  the  reduction  of 
the  incidence  (which  is  here  equivalent  to  an  increase 
in  speed)  so  long  as  this  does  not  reduce  the  longitudinal 
dihedral. 

Bearing  these  various  considerations  in  mind,  it  would 
seem  preferable,  in  contradiction  to  a  very  general  view 
which  at  one  time  the  author  shared,  to  make  the  propeller- 
thrust  pass  below  rather  than  above  the  centre  of  gravity, 
at  any  rate  in  the  case  of  machines  normally  flying  at  a 
fairly  large  angle  of  incidence. 

As  a  general  rule  the  propeller-thrust  passes  approxi- 
mately through  the  centre  of  gravity,  and  this,  perhaps,  is 
the  best  solution  of  all. 

Since  the  direction  of  the  propeller-thrust  is  under  con- 
sideration, it  may  be  as  well  to  note  that  this  direction  need 
not  necessarily  be  that  of  the  flight-path  of  the  aeroplane. 
Take  the  case  where  the  thrust  passes  through  the  centre 
of  gravity  ;  it  will  be  readily  understood  that  if  the  direction 
of  the  thrust  is  altered  this  cannot  have  any  effect  on 
longitudinal  equilibrium.  Hence  there  is  no  theoretical 

9 


130  FLIGHT  WITHOUT  FORMULAE 

reason  why  an  aeroplane  with  an  inclined  propeller  shaft 
should  not  fly  horizontally. 

The  only  effect  on  the  flight  of  an  aeroplane  by  tilting 
the  propeller  shaft  up  at  an  angle  would  be  to  reduce  the 
speed,  because  the  thrust  doing  its  share  in  lifting,  the  planes 
need  only  exert  a  correspondingly  smaller  amount  of  lift. 
Therefore  the  lifting  of  the  propeller  shaft  virtually  amounts 
to  diminishing  the  weight  of  the  aeroplane,  thereby,  other 
things  being  equal,  reducing  the  speed. 

If  the  thrust  became  vertical,  the  planes  could  be  dispensed 
with,  horizontal  speed  would  disappear,  and  the  aeroplane 
would  become  a  helicopter. 

It  can  easily  be  shown  that  the  most  advantageous 
direction  to  give  to  the  propeller-thrust  is  that  wherein  the 
shaft  is  slightly  inclined  upwards,  as  is  done  hi  the  case  of 
certain  machines,  though  in  others  the  thrust  is  normally 
horizontal. 

To  wind  up  these  remarks  on  longitudinal  stability,  we 
will  describe  various  types  of  little  paper  gliders  which 
will  afford  in  practical  fashion  some  interesting  information 
concerning  certain  aspects  of  longitudinal  equilibrium  and 
of  gliding  flight.  The  results,  of  course,  are  only  approxi- 
mate in  the  widest  sense,  since  such  paper  gliders  are  very 
erratic  as  they  do  not  preserve  their  shape  for  any  length 
of  time. 

Experiments  with  these  little  paper  models  are  most 
instructive  and  are  to  be  highly  recommended  to  every 
reader  ;  however  childish  they  may  at  first  appear,  they 
will  not  be  waste  of  time.  By  experimenting  oneself  with 
such  miniature  flying-machines  one  can  learn  many  valuable 
lessons  in  regard  to  points  of  detail,  only  a  few  of  which 
can  here  be  set  out.  To  make  these  little  models  it  is  best 
to  use  the  hardest  obtainable  paper,  though  it  must  not  be 
heavy  ;  Bristol-board  will  serve  the  purpose.  Even  better 
is  thin  sheet  aluminium  about  one- tenth  of  a  millimetre  in 
thickness,  but  in  this  case  the  dimensions  given  hereafter 
should  be  slightly  increased. 


STABILITY   IN  STILL  AIR  131 

TYPE  I. 

An  ordinary  rectangular  piece  of  paper,  in  length  about 
twice  the  breadth  (12  cm.  by  6  cm.,  for  instance),  folded 
longitudinally  down  the  centre  (see  fig.  48)  so  as  to  form  a 
very  open  angle  (the  function  of  this,  which  affects  lateral 
stability,  will  be  explained  in  the  next  chapter). 

Reference  to  fig.  32,  Chapter  VI.,  will  show  that  for  a 
single  flat  plane  to  assume  one  of  the  ordinary  angles  of 
incidence  (roughly,  from  2°  to  10°),  its  centre  of  gravity 
must  be  situated  at  a  distance  of  from  one-third  to  one- 
quarter  of  the  fore-and-aft  dimension  of  the  plane  from  the 
forward  edge.  This  is  easily  obtained  by  attaching  to 


FIG.  48. — Perspective. 

the  paper  a  few  paper  clips  or  fasteners,  fixed  near  one  of 
the  ends  of  the  central  fold  at  a  slight  distance  from  the 
edge  (about  |  cm.). 

If  the  ballasted  paper  is  held  horizontally  by  its  rear  end 
and  is  thrown  gently  forward,  it  will  behave  in  one  of  the 
three  following  ways  : — 

(a)  The    paper   inclines   itself   gently   and   glides   down 
regularly  without  longitudinal  oscillations. 

This  is  the  most  favourable  case,  for  at  the  first  attempt 
the  ballast  has  been  placed  in  the  position  where  the  corre- 
sponding single  angle  of  incidence  was  one  of  the  usual 
angles.  Practice  therefore  confirms  theory,  which  taught 
that  a  single  flat  plane  is  longitudinally  stable. 

(b)  The  paper  dips  forward  and  dives. 

The  centre  of  gravity  is  too  far  forward  and  in  front 
of  the  forward  limit  of  the  centre  of  pressure.  To  obtain 


132  FLIGHT  WITHOUT  FORMULA 

a  regular  glide  the  ballast  must  be  moved  slightly  toward 
the  rear.  In  effecting  this,  it  will  probably  be  moved  too 
far  back  and  the  paper  will  in  that  case  behave  in  the 
opposite  manner,  which  is  about  to  be  described. 

(c)  The  paper  at  first  inclines  itself,  but,  after  a  dive 
whose  proportions  vary  with  several  factors,  and  chiefly 
with  the  force  with  which  the  model  has  been  thrown,  it 
rears  up,  slows  down,  and  starts  another  dive  bigger  than 
the  first,  and  thus  continues  its  descent  to  the  ground,  stall- 
ing and  diving  in  succession  (see  fig.  49). 


FIG.  49. 


As  a  matter  of  fact,  the  dive  following  the  first  stalling 
may  be  final  and  become  vertical  if  during  the  accompany- 
ing oscillation  the  paper  should  meet  the  air  edge-on,  so 
that  actually  it  has  no  angle  of  incidence,  for  such  a  glider 
if  dropped  vertically,  leading  edge  down,  has  no  occasion 
to  right  itself  and  continues  to  fall  like  any  solid  body. 

The  above  experiment  is  quite  instructive.  It  corresponds 
to  the  case  where  the  single  angle  of  incidence  at  which 
flight  is  possible,  owing  to  the  centre  of  gravity  being  too 
far  back,  is  greater  than  the  usual  angles  of  incidence. 

As  it  begins  its  descent  the  sheet  of  paper,  having  been 
thrown  forward  horizontally,  has  a  small  angle  of  incidence, 
and  hence  tends  to  acquire  the  fairly  high  speed  correspond- 
ing to  this  small  angle.  But  the  pressure  of  the  air,  passing 


STABILITY   IN  STILL  AIR  133 

in  front  of  the  centre  of  gravity,  produces  a  stalling  couple 
which  increases  the  incidence.  Owing  to  its  inertia,  the 
paper  will  tend  to  maintain  its  speed,  which  has  now  be- 
come higher  than  that  corresponding  to  its  large  angle 
of  incidence,  and  so  the  pressure  of  the  air  becomes  greater 
than  the  weight,  on  account  of  which  the  flight-path  becomes 
horizontal  again  and  even  rises. 

The  same  thing,  in  fact,  always  happens  if  for  some 
reason  or  other  a  glider  or  an  aeroplane  should  attain  to 
a  higher  speed  than  that  corresponding  to  the  incidence 
given  it  by  the  elevator,  and  also  if  the  angle  of  the  planes 
is  suddenly  increased.  This  rising  flight-path  by  an  in- 
crease in  the  angle  of  incidence  is  constantly  followed  by 
birds,  and  especially  by  birds  of  prey  such  as  the  falcon, 
which  uses  it  to  seize  its  prey  from  underneath. 

Pilots  also  use  it  in  flattening  out  after  a  steep  dive  or 
vol  pique,  though  the  manoeuvre  is  distinctly  dangerous, 
since  it  may  produce  in  the  machine  reactions  of  inertia 
which  may  cause  the  failure  of  certain  parts  of  the 
structure. 

Returning  to  the  ballasted  sheet  of  paper  :  as  the  flight- 
path  rises,  the  glider  loses  speed  ;  in  fact,  it  may  stop 
altogether.  It  is  then  in  the  same  condition  as  if  it  were 
released  without  being  thrown  forward,  and  falls  in  a 
steep  dive  which,  as  already  stated,  may  prove  final. 

There  are  many  variants  of  the  three  phenomena  described. 

Thus,  the  stalling  movement  may  become  accentuated  to 
such  an  extent  as  to  cause  the  sheet  of  paper  to  turn  right 
over  and  "  loop  the  loop."  *  Again,  the  paper  may  start  to 
glide  down  backwards  and  do  a  "  tail-slide." 

These  variants  depend  mainly  on  how  far  back  the 
centre  of  gravity  is  situated,  that  is,  on  the  value  of  the 
single  angle  of  incidence  at  which  the  sheet  can  fly.  If 

*  It  is  interesting  to  note  that  this  and  many  of  the  following 
mano3uvres  are  precisely  those  practised  by  Pegoud  and  his  imitators, 
although  the  above  was  written  long  before  they  were  attempted  in 
practice. — TKANSLATQR. 


134  FLIGHT  WITHOUT  FORMULA 

this  angle  is  only  slightly  greater  than  the  usual  angles  of 
incidence,  the  stability  of  the  glider — which  is  less,  of 
course,  at  large  angles  than  at  small  ones — will  still  be 
sufficient  to  prevent  the  effect  of  inertia  of  oscillation  from 
bringing  it  into  a  position  where  it  is  liable  to  dive,  to  turn 
over  on  its  back,  or  slide  backwards.  It  will  therefore 
follow  a  sinuous  flight-path  consisting  of  successive  stalling 
and  diving,  but  will  not  actually  upset. 

But  if  the  centre  of  gravity  is  brought  further  back  and 
the  angle  of  incidence  corresponding  to  this  position  is 
much  greater  than  the  usual  angles  of  incidence,  the  stabilis- 
ing couples  no  longer  suffice  to  overcome  the  effects  of 
inertia  to  turning  forces,  the  condition  of  stability  in 
oscillation  is  no  longer  fulfilled,  and  the  glider  behaves  in 
one  of  the  ways  already  described. 

It  should,  however,  be  pointed  out  that  a  rectangular 
sheet  of  paper  has  a  far  larger  moment  of  inertia  in  respect 
to  pitching  than  a  glider  generally  conforming,  as  our  next 
models  will  do,  to  the  shape  of  an  aeroplane. 

To  prevent  these  occurrences  from  taking  place,  all  that 
is  required  is  to  bring  the  ballast  further  forward  and  to 
adjust  the  incidence  by  cutting  off  thin  strips  from  the 
forward  edge.  By  these  means  it  is  possible  eventually 
to  obtain  a  regular  gliding  path  without  longitudinal 
oscillations. 

If  thin  strips  of  paper  are  thus  cut  off  with  sufficient 
care,*  the  various  properties  of  gliding  flight  set  forth  in 
Chapter  II.  can  be  very  easily  followed. 

It  will  be  seen  that  by  gradually  reducing  the  angle 
of  incidence  by  cutting  back  the  forward  edge,  the  glide 
becomes  both  longer  and  faster.  Next,  when  the  angle 
has  become  smaller  than  the  optimum  angle  of  this  embryo 
glider,  the  length  of  the  glide  diminishes,  the  path  becomes 
steeper,  and  the  glider  tends  to  dive. 

Towards  the  end  the   process   of  adjustment   becomes 

*  In  case  the  ballast  should  be  in  the  way,  the  paper  can  be  cut  away 
diagonally  and  equally  on  either  side,  as  shown  in  fig.  50. 


STABILITY   IN  STILL  AIR  135 

exceptionally  delicate,  for  since  the  optimum  angle  of  a 
model  of  this  nature  is  very  small  indeed,  by  reason  of  the 
fact  that  its  detrimental  surface  is  almost  zero  relatively 
to  its  lifting  area,  the  slightest  shifting  of  the  centre  of 
gravity  is  enough  to  cause  a  large  variation  in  the  gliding 
angle  and  to  upset  longitudinal  stability. 

Now  let  us  suppose  that,  the  ballast  being  so  placed  that 
the  glider  tends  to  dive,  we  proceed  to  rectify  by  cutting 
away  pieces  of  the  trailing  edge  as  in  fig.  50.  If  the  outer 
rear  tips  thus  symmetrically  formed  are  bent  upwards, 


FIG.  50. 

the  glider  will  no  longer  tend  to  dive  and  will  assume  a 
position  of  equilibrium. 

By  bending  these  outer  tips  through  various  degrees,  and 
also,  if  necessary,  bending  up  the  inner  portion  of  the 
trailing  edge,  all  the  various  forms  of  gliding  flight  can  be 
reproduced  which  were  previously  obtained  by  shifting  the 
ballast  and  cutting  back  the  forward  edge.* 

But  to  whatever  degree  the  tips  may  be  bent  up,  hence- 
forward the  stalling  movement  will  not  be  followed  by  a 
dive,  nor  will  the  glider  loop  the  loop  or  do  a  tail-slide. 

This  is  due  to  the  fact  that  instead  of  being  constituted 
by  a'single  flat  plane,  the  glider  now  possesses  a  tail,  which 
gives  it  much  better  longitudinal  stability.  The  effects  of 

*  The  rear  tips  may  not  be  bent  exactly  equally  on  either  side,  with 
the  result  that  the  glider  may  tend  to  swerve  to  left  or  right.  To  counter- 
act this,  the  tip  on  the  side  towards  which  the  paper  swerves  should  be 
bent  up  a  little  more. 


136  FLIGHT  WITHOUT  FORMULA 

inertia  are  now  overcome  by  the  stabilising  moments  arising 
from  the  tail.  Moreover,  a  glider  of  this  description  when 
dropped  vertically  rights  itself.  It  can  no  longer  dive 
headlong. 

If  the  tips  are  bent  back  to  their  original  horizontal 
position,  it  is  evident  that  the  sheet  of  paper  will  dive  once 
more,  and  to  an  even  greater  extent  if  the  tips  were  bent 
down  instead  of  up.  This  plainly  shows  the  danger  of 
allowing  the  elevator  to  constitute  the  solitary  tail  plane, 
for,  unless  its  movement  is  limited,  it  could  cause  equili- 
brium to  be  lost. 

TYPE  II. 

1.  Fold  a  sheet  of  paper  in  two,  and  from  the  folded 
paper  cut  out  the  shape  shown  in  fig.  51. 

2.  Fold  back  the  wings  and  the  tail  plane  along  the 
dotted  lines.     The  wings  should  make  a  slight  lateral  V  or 
dihedral. 

3.  Ballast  the  model  somewhere  about  the  point  L — the 
exact  spot  must  be  found  by  experiment — with  one  or 
more  paper  fasteners. 

This  model  approaches  more  nearly  to  the  usual  shape  of 
an  aeroplane.  By  finding  the  correct  position  for  the 
ballast,  so  that  the  centre  of  gravity  is  situated  on  the 
total  pressure  line  corresponding  approximately  to  the 
optimum  angle,  this  little  glider  can  be  made  to  perform 
some  very  pretty  glides.* 

The  ballast  may  be  brought  further  forward  or  additional 
paper  fasteners  may  be  affixed  without  making  the  model 
dive  headlong. 

It  will  dive,  and  on  this  account  may  be  brought  to  fall 
headlong  if  the  height  above  the  ground  is  only  slight ;  but 
if  there  is  room  enough  it  will  recover  and,  though  coming 
down  steeply,  will  not  fall  headlong.  It  is  still  gliding, 

*  Should  it  tend  to  swerve  to  either  side,  bend  up  slightly  the  rear 
tip  of  the  wing  on  the  opposite  side  of  that  towards  which  the  aeroplane 
tends  to  turn. 


STABILITY   IN  STILL  AIR  137 

since  during  its  descent  the  air  still  exerts  a  certain  amount 
of  lift.  Longitudinal  equilibrium  is  not  upset,  and  if  the 
glider  does  not  lose  its  proper  shape  on  account  of  its  high 
speed,  it  cannot  fall  headlong,  whatever  the  excess  of  load 
carried,  by  reason  of  the  fact  that  the  main  and  tail  planes 
are  placed  at  an  angle  to  one  another. 

The  reduction  in  the  angle  of  incidence  by  bringing  the 
centre  of  gravity  further  forward  therefore  maintains 
stability,  and  even  increases  it  as  the  speed  grows.  And 
this  because  the  longitudinal  dihedral  has  not  been  touched. 

By  shifting  the  ballast  toward  the  rear,  the  model  will 


FIG.  51. 

also  follow  a  steep  downward  path,  but  this  time  the  angle 
of  incidence  is  large,  the  speed  slow,  and  therefore  the  glider 
remains  almost  horizontal  and  "  pancakes."  This  shows 
conclusively  that  the  same  gliding  path  can  be  followed  at 
two  different  normal  angles  of  incidence  and  at  two  different 
speeds. 

By  still  shifting  the  ballast  farther  back,  the  model  may 
be  made  to  glide  as  if  it  belonged  to  the  tail-foremost  or 
"  Canard  "  type  (cf.  the  third  model  described  hereafter). 
Flight  at  large  angles  of  incidence  is  now  possible  and 
will  not  cause  the  model  to  overturn  as  in  the  case  of  the 
single  sheet  of  paper,  as  the  moment  of  pitching  inertia 
is  much  feebler  than  in  the  former  case.  The  stability  of 


138  FLIGHT  WITHOUT  FORMULA 

oscillation  is  therefore  still  adequate  at  large  angles  of 
incidence. 

Now  let  us  shift  the  ballast  back  again  so  that  the  glide 
becomes  normal  once  more  ;  at  the  rear  of  the  tail  plane, 
bend  down  either  the  whole  or  half  the  trailing  edge  to 
the  extent  of  2  mm.  This  will  give  us  an  elevator,  while 
the  fixed  tail  is  retained. 

By  moving  this  elevator  the  conditions  of  gliding  flight 
can  obviously  be  modified  ;  for  instance,  if  the  outer  halves 
of  the  rear  edge  are  evenly  bent  down  to  an  angle  of  some 
45° — that  is,  to  have  their  greatest  effect  in  reducing  the 
angle  of  incidence — the  glider  will  extend  the  length  of 
its  flight  and  travel  faster  (see  fig.  52). 


FIG.  52.— Perspective. 

But  it  will  still  be  impossible  by  the  operation  of  the 
elevator  to  make  the  model  fall  headlong.  The  fixed  tail 
will  prevent  this,  and  will  overcome  the  action  of  the 
elevator  because  the  latter  is  small  in  extent.  Hence,  an 
elevator  small  enough  relatively  to  the  tail  plane  cannot  make 
an  aeroplane  dive  headlong. 

If  the  whole  of  the  trailing  edge  is  bent  down  it  might 
possibly  cause  longitudinal  equilibrium  to  be  upset  and 
make  the  glider  dive.  And  should  this  not  prove  to  be 
the  case,  it  could  be  done  without  fail  by  increasing  the 
depth  of  the  elevator. 

The  experiment  shows  that  the  size  of  the  elevator 
should  not  be  too  large  ;  it  should  merely  be  sufficient  to 
cause  the  alterations  of  the  angle  of  incidence  required  for 
ordinary  flight  and  should  never  be  able  to  upset  stability. 


STABILITY   IN  STILL  AIR  139 

TYPE  III. 

1.  Cut  out  from  a  sheet  of  paper  folded  in  two  a  piece 
shaped  as  in  fig.  53. 

2.  Fold  back  the  wings  along  the  dotted  lines. 

3.  Fold  the  wing- tips  upwards  along  the  outer  dotted 
line. 

This  tail-first  glider  will  be  stable  without  ballast  and 


FIG.  53. 

glides  very  prettily  on  account  of  its  lightness.     It  will  be 
referred  to  again  in  connection  with  directional  stability.* 

TYPE  IV. 

1.  Cut  out  from  a  sheet  of  paper  folded  in  two  the  shape 
shown  in  fig.  54. 

2.  Cut  away  from  the  outer  edge  of  the  fold  two  portions 
about  1  mm.  deep,  and  of  the  length  shown  at  AB  and  CD. 

3.  Inside  the  fold  fix  with  glue — 

(a)  At  AB  a  strip  of  cardboard  or  cut  from  a  visiting 
card  ;  5  cm.  long,  1  cm.  broad.  The  inner  end 
of  the  strip  is  shown  by  the  dotted  line  at  AB. 

(6)  At  CD  glue  a  similar  strip  as  shown. 

*  If  it  tends  to  swerve,  slightly  bend  the  whole  of  the  front  tail  in 
the  opposite  sense. 


140 


FLIGHT  WITHOUT  FORMULAE 


4.  Fold  back  the  wings  and  the  tail  plane  along  the 
dotted  lines. 


ciL 

n  fi 

_i  4-^  ^\  

y 

A^—  J  B  c  L  —  1 

^7  a 

FIG.  54. 


FIG.  55. — Perspective. 

5.  Ballast  the  model  with  a  paper  clip  placed  at  the  end  of 
the  strip  AB,  and  with  another  in  the  neighbourhood  of  L. 


STABILITY  IN  STILL  AIR  141 

The  exact  positions  are  to  be  found  by  experiment,  and  it 
may  therefore  be  as  well  to  turn  the  cardboard  about  its 
glued  end  before  the  glue  has  set. 

If  this  glider  is  thrown  upwards  towards  the  sky,  it  will 
right  itself  and  glide  away  in  the  attitude  shown  in  fig.  55. 
Now  the  centre  of  gravity  of  a  glider  of  this  kind  lies  some- 
where about  G. 

On  the  other  hand,  the  point  sometimes  termed  the 
"  centre  of  lift  "  is  situated  on  the  plane  at  the  spot  which, 
in  equilibrium,  is  on  the  perpendicular  from  the  centre  of 
gravity  and  shown  at  S.  This  point  S  lies  below  the  centre 
of  gravity. 

Now,  if  an  aeroplane  ought  to  be  considered  as  suspended 
in  space  from  a  so-called  "  centre  of  lift,"  its  centre  of 
gravity  could  not,  perforce,  be  anywhere  but  below  this 
"  centre  of  lift." 

In  the  case  just  mentioned  the  opposite  took  place,  which 
shows  very  clearly  that  this  idea  of  a  "  centre  of  lift "  is 
erroneous. 

An  aeroplane  has  one  centre  only,  its  centre  of  gravity. 


CHAPTER  VIII 
STABILITY  IN  STILL  AIR 

LATERAL  STABILITY 

FOR  the  complete  solution  of  the  problem  of  aviation  the 
aeroplane  must  possess,  in  addition  to  stable  longitudinal 
equilibrium,  stable  lateral  equilibrium  or,  more  briefly, 
lateral  stability. 

The  fundamental  principle  laid  down  hi  Chapter  VI.  is 
equally  applicable  to  lateral  equilibrium.* 

But  hi  the  case  of  longitudinal  equilibrium  the  move- 
ments that  had  to  be  considered  hi  respect  of  stability 
could  be  simply  reduced  to  turning  movements  about  a 
single  axis,  the  pitching  axis.  The  matter  becomes  exceed- 
ingly complicated  hi  the  case  of  lateral  equilibrium,  for 
the  turning  movements  can  take  place  about  an  infinite 
number  of  axes  passing  through  the  centre  of  gravity  and 
situated  in  the  symmetrical  plane  of  the  machine. 

For  instance,  assume  that  the  aeroplane  diagrammatically 
shown  hi  fig.  56  were  moving  horizontally  and  that  the 
path  of  the  centre  of  gravity  G  were  along  GX.  If  the 
machine  were  to  turn  through  a  certain  angle  about  the 
path  GX,  clearly  no  change  would  take  place  in  the  manner 
in  which  the  air  struck  any  part  of  the  machine,f  and 
no  turning  moment  would  arise  tending  to  bring  the  machine 

*  From  the  point  of  view  of  equilibrium  and  stability,  the  aeroplane 
may  be  regarded  as  if  it  were  suspended  from  its  centre  of  gravity,  and 
were  thus  struck  by  the  relative  wind  created  by  its  own  speed. 

t  Assuming,  of  course,  that  the  turning  movement  does  not  alter  the 
path  of  the  centre  of  gravity. 


STABILITY   IN  STILL  AIR  143 

back  to  its  former  position  or  to  cause  it  to  depart  there- 
from still  further. 

It  can  therefore  be  stated  that  the  lateral  equilibrium 
of  an  aeroplane  is  neutral  about  an  axis  coincident  with 
the  path  of  the  centre  of  gravity. 

But  when  we  come  to  consider  turning  movements  about 
other  axes  such  as  GXj  or  GX2  which  do  not  coincide  with 
the  path  of  the  centre  of  gravity,  it  is  evident  that  such 
movements  will  have  the  effect  of  causing  the  aeroplane  to 
meet  the  air  dissymmetrically,  and  consequently  to  set  up 
lateral  moments  tending  to  increase  or  diminish  the  tilt  of 
the  machine — that  is,  upsetting  or  righting  couples. 

Before  going  further  it  is  readily  evident  that,  the  axis 


X— 


FIG.  56. 


GX  being  neutral,  axes  such  as  GXj  and  GX2,  lying  on 
opposite  sides  of  GX,  will  have  a  different  effect,  and  that 
a  turning  movement  begun  about  one  series  of  axes  will 
encounter  a  resistance  due  to  the  dissymmetrical  reaction  of 
the  air  which  it  creates,  while  any  turning  movement  begun 
about  the  other  series  of  axes,  again  owing  to  the  dis- 
symmetrical reaction  of  the  air,  will  go  on  increasing  until 
the  machine  overturns. 

The  former  series  will  be  known  as  the  stable  axes,  the 
latter  as  the  unstable  axes.  The  neutral  axis  is  that  co- 
inciding with  the  path  of  the  centre  of  gravity.  Further, 
the  term  raised  axis  will  be  used  to  denote  an  axis  with 
its  forward  extremity  raised  like  GXj  and  lowered  axis 
for  that  which,  like  GX2,  has  its  forward  extremity 
lowered. 


144  FLIGHT  WITHOUT  FORMULA 

The  shape  of  the  aeroplane  determines  which  axis  is 
unstable. 

In  many  aeroplanes,  and  in  monoplanes  in  particular,* 
the  forward  edges  of  the  wings  do  not  form  an  exact  straight 
line,  but  a  dihedral  angle  or  V  opening  upwards. 

We  shall  also  have  to  examine — though  the  arrangement 
hi  question  has  never  to  the  author's  knowledge  been 
adopted  in  practice — the  case  of  the  machine  with  wings 
forming  an  inverted  dihedral  or  A-t  Lastly,  the  forward 
edges  of  the  two  wings  may  form  a  straight  line,  and  such 
wings  will  hereafter  be  described  as  straight  wings. 

In  an  aeroplane  with  straight  wings,  a  turning  movement 
imparted  about  an  axis  situated  in  the  symmetrical  plane 
of  the  machine  increases  the  angle  of  incidence  if  the  axis 


FIG.  57. 

is  a  lowered  axis,  and  diminishes  the  angle  if  the  axis  is  a 
raised  axis.  This  can  easily  be  proved  geometrically,  and 
can  be  shown  very  simply  by  the  following  experiment. 

Make  a  diagonal  cut  in  a  cork,  as  shown  in  fig.  57  (front 
and  side  views).  In  this  cut  insert  the  middle  of  one  of 
the  longer  sides  of  a  visiting-card,  and  thrust  a  knitting- 
needle  or  the  blade  of  a  knife  into  the  centre  of  the  cork 
on  the  side  where  the  card  projects.  Now  place  this  con- 

*  In  the  case  of  large-span  biplanes  the  flexing  on  the  planes  in  flight 
forces  them  into  a  curve  which  in  its  effects  is  equivalent,  for  purposes 
of  lateral  stability,  to  a  lateral  dihedral. 

t  The  "  Tubavion  "  shown  at  the  1912  Salon  is  stated  to  have  flown 
with  wings  thus  disposed. 

TRANSLATOB'S  NOTE. — The  same  device  was  adopted  by  Cody  in  his 
earlier  machines,  and  in  the  "  June  Bug,"  the  first  machine  designed  by 
Glenn  Curtiss. 


STABILITY   IN  STILL  AIR 


145 


trivance  in  the  position  shown  in  fig.  58,  with  the  needle 
horizontal  and  at  eye-level.  If  the  needle  is  rotated  slowly, 
the  card  will  always  appear  to  have  the  same  breadth 
whatever  its  position. 

If  this  visiting-card  is  taken  to  represent  the  straight 


FIG.  58. 

wings  of  an  aeroplane  struck  by  the  wind  represented  by 
the  line  of  sight,  this  shows  that  a  turning  movement  about 
the  neutral  axis  of  an  aeroplane  with  straight  wings 
produces  no  change  in  the  angle  of  incidence,  as  already 
known. 


FIG.  59. 

But  if  the  needle  is  inserted  in  the  position  shown  in 
fig.  59,  it  will  be  found  that  by  rotating  the  needle  without 
altering  its  position,  the  breadth  of  the  card  will  appear  to 
increase,  thus  showing,  retaining  the  same  illustration,  that 
when  the  axis  of  rotation  of  a  machine  with  straight  wings 
is  a  lowered  axis,  the  incidence  increases  as  the  result  of 
the  turning  movement. 

10 


146 


FLIGHT  WITHOUT  FORMULA 


This  effect  is  the  more  pronounced  the  smaller  the  angle 
of  incidence. 

But  if  the  needle  is  inserted  as  shown  in  fig.  60,  the 
breadth  of  the  card  when  the  needle  is  rotated  will  appear 
to  diminish. 

If  the  needle  is  parallel  to  the  card,  a  turn  of  the  needle 
through  90°  brings  the  card  edge-on  to  the  line  of  sight. 

Lastly,  if  the  needle  and  the  card  are  in  converging 
positions,  a  slight  turn  of  the  needle  brings  the  card  edge-on, 
and  beyond  that  its  upper  surface  alone  is  in  view. 

From  this  we  may  conclude  that  if  the  axis  of  rotation 
of  an  aeroplane  with  straight  wings  is  a  raised  axis,  the 
angle  of  incidence  diminishes  as  the  result  of  a  turning 


FIG. 


movement,  and  if  the  axis  is  raised  to  a  sufficient  degree, 
the  angle  of  incidence  may  become  zero  and  even  negative. 

This  effect  is  the  more  pronounced  the  larger  the  angle  of 
incidence. 

It  should  be  noted  that  in  neither  case  is  the  action 
dissymmetrical  and  that  both  wings  are  always  equally 
affected.  In  other  words,  should  a  machine  with  straight 
wings  turn  about  an  axis  lying  within  its  plane  of  symmetry, 
no  righting  or  upsetting  couple  is  produced  by  the  turning 
movement. 

On  the  other  hand,  if  the  eye  looks  down  vertically  upon 
the  cork  from  above,  it  will  be  seen  that  a  turning  move- 
ment about  a  lowered  axis  has  the  effect  of  causing  the 
rising  wing  to  advance,  while  in  the  case  of  a  raised  axis 
a  turning  movement  causes  it  to  recede  (fig.  61).  Now,  by 


STABILITY  IN  STILL  AIR 


147 


advancing  a  Aving,  the  centre  of  pressure  is  slightly  shifted ; 
this  may  produce  a  couple  tending  to  raise  the  advancing 
wing. 

Should  the  advancing  wing  be  the  lower  one,  which 
corresponds  to  the  case  of  a  raised  axis,  this  couple  is  a 
righting  couple.  In  the  reverse  case  it  is  an  upsetting 
couple. 

In  this  respect,  for  aeroplanes  with  straight  wings  a 
raised  axis  is  stable,  a  lowered  axis  unstable. 

This  effect  in  itself  is  very  slight,  but  it  represents  the 
nature  of  the  lateral  equilibrium  of  an  aeroplane  with 


Raised  Axis. 


FIG.  61. 


straight  wings  ;  for  if  it  were  not  present,  a  machine  with 
straight  wings  would  be  hi  neutral  equilibrium  and  possess 
no  stability. 

But  as  soon  as  the  wings  form  a  lateral  dihedral,  whether 
upwards  or  downwards,  this  effect  practically  disappears 
and  becomes  negligible.  This  is  the  case  next  to  be 
examined. 

Let  us  suppose,  to  begin  with,  that  the  wings  form  an 
upward  lateral  dihedral,  or  open  V-  Each  of  the  wings 
may  be  considered  in  the  light  of  one-half  of  a  set  of  straight 
wings  which  has  begun  to  turn  about  the  axis  represented 
by  the  apex  of  the  V>  the  movement  of  each  whig  being 


148 


FLIGHT  WITHOUT  FORMULAE 


in  the  opposite  direction,  i.e.  while  one  is  falling  the  other 

is  rising. 

The  considerations  set  forth  above  show  that  a  turning 

movement  about  a  raised  axis  causes  the  incidence  of  the 

rising  wing  to  diminish 
while  that  of  the  fall- 
ing wing  increases  ;  the 
contrary  takes  place  in 
the  case  of  a  lowered 
axis. 

This  is  easily  demon- 
strated   by    tilting    up- 

FI<J.  62.—  Stable.    Lateral  V  and  raised  axis.  Ward  the  two   halves   of 

the  visiting-card  used  in 

the  previous  experiment.  If  the  contrivance  is  looked  at 
as  before,  so  that  the  axis  of  the  cork  is  horizontal  and 
on  a  level  with  the  eye,  it  will  be  found  that  any  rotation 
about  the  needle,  when  this  is  directed  upwards,  causes  the 
rising  wing  to  appear  to 
diminish  in  surface  while 
the  falling  wing  in- 
creases (see  fig.  62). 
But  if  the  needle  points 
downwards,  the  opposite 
takes  place  (fig.  63). 

In  the  first  case,  there- 
fore, the  turning  move- 
ment produces  a  righting 
couple,  in  the  second  case 
an  upsetting  couple. 

This  effect  is  the  more 
pronounced  the  larger 
the  angle  of  incidence. 

Therefore  in  the  case  of  wings  forming  a  lateral  dihedral, 
a  raised  axis  is  stable,  a  lowered  axis  unstable,  and  the 
more  so  the  greater  the  angle  of  incidence. 

This  effect  is  added  to  the  secondary  effect  already  referred 


FIG.  63.— Unstable.    Lateral  V  with  lowered 
axis. 


STABILITY  IN  STILL  AIR 


149 


to  in  the  case  of  straight  wings  ;  but  as  soon  as  the  dihedral 
is  appreciable,  the  former  effect  becomes  by  far  the  stronger. 
Now  consider  the  case  of  wings  forming  an  inverted 
dihedral  or  A-  The  same  line  of  reasoning  shows  (see  figs. 
64  and  65)  that : 

In  the  case  of  wings  forming  an  inverted  lateral  dihedral 
a  raised  axis  is  un- 
stable, a  lowered  axis 
stable,  and  this  the  more 
so  the  smaller  the  angle 
of  incidence. 

In       this     case     the 
secondary     effect     acts 

in     opposition,     but     it  Fic"  ^-^fsed  wif6™1  Awith 
becomes     negligible     as 
soon  as  the  inverted  dihedral  is  appreciable. 

These  various  effects  are  increasingly  great,  it  will 
be  readily  understood,  as  the  span  is  increased  in  size, 
for  the  upsetting  or  righting  couples  have  lever  arms 
directly  proportional  to  the  span.  Besides,  but  quite 
apart  from  the  value  of  the  incidence  in  a  given  case, 

it  is  clear  that  the 
righting  couples  are 
greater  the  higher  the 
speed  of  flight,  since 
they  are  proportional 
to  the  square  of  the 
speed.  Broadly  speak- 
ing, therefore,  though 
with  certain  reserva- 
tions into  which  we  need  not  here  enter  in  detail,  it  may 
be  stated  that  the  higher  the  flying  speed  the  greater  is 
lateral  stability. 

Although  the  stability  or  instability  of  any  axis  depends 
chiefly  on  the  main  planes,  other  parts  of  the  aeroplane  can 
affect  it  to  a  certain  extent,  hence  their  effect  should  be 
taken  into  account  as  well. 


150  FLIGHT  WITHOUT  FORMULAE 

The  tail  plane,  which  is  usually  straight,  only  affects 
lateral  stability  to  an  inappreciable  extent. 

But  it  should  be  noted,  as  already  stated,  that  any  turning 
movement  about  an  axis  other  than  the  neutral  axis  will 
affect  the  incidence  at  which  the  tail  plane  meets  the  air  ; 
and,  since  such  a  turning  movement  also  affects,  as  already 
known,  the  incidence  of  the  main  plane,  this  dual  effect 
must  needs  disturb  the  longitudinal  equilibrium  of  the 
machine.  Hence,  we  arrive  at  the  general  proposition  that 
rolling  begets  pitching. 

As  regards  the  remaining  parts  of  the  aeroplane — fuselage, 
chassis,  vertical  surfaces,  etc. — they  experience  from  the 
relative  wind,  when  the  aeroplane  turns  about  an  axis 
in  the  median  plane,  certain  reactions  which  may  be  dis- 
symmetric and  would  thus  affect  the  equilibrium  of  the 
machine  on  its  flight-path.  More  particularly  when  the 
parts  in  question  are  excentric  relatively  to  the  turning 
axis  can  they  influence — though  usually  only  to  a  small 
extent — lateral  equilibrium. 

For  the  sake  of  convenience  and  in  a  manner  similar  to 
that  previously  adopted  in  the  case  of  the  detrimental 
surface,  the  effects  of  all  these  parts  may  be  concentrated 
and  assumed  to  be  replaced  by  the  effect  of  a  single  fictitious 
vertical  surface,  which  may  be  termed  the  keel  surface, 
which  would,  as  it  were,  be  incorporated  in  the  symmetrical 
plane  of  the  machine. 

Certain  parts  of  the  aeroplane,  such  as  the  vertical  rudder, 
the  sides  of  a  covered-in  fuselage,  vertical  fins,  form  actual 
parts  of  the  keel  surface. 

Evidently,  according  to  whether  the  pressure  exerted  on 
the  keel  surface,  by  reason  of  a  turning  movement  about 
a  given  axis,  passes  to  one  side  or  the  other  of  this  axis,  the 
couple  set  up  will  be  either  a  righting  or  upsetting  couple. 

It  is  easily  shown  that  a  keel  surface  which  is  raised 
relatively  to  the  axis  of  rotation  can  be  compared,  pro- 
portions remaining  the  same,  to  a  plane  with  an  upward 
dihedral,  or  V,  and  that  a  keel  surface  which  is  low  relatively 


STABILITY   IN  STILL  AIR 


151 


to  the  axis  of  rotation  to  a  plane  with  a  downward  dihedral 
or  A- 

For  this  purpose,  the  cork,  visiting-card,  and  needle 
previously  employed  may  be  discarded  in  favour  of  a 
visiting-card  fixed  flag- wise  to  a  knitting-needle.  It  is 
clear,  as  shown  in  fig.  66,  that  when  the  axis  of  rotation 
is  raised,  a  high  keel  surface  renders  this  axis  stable  and  a 
low  keel  surface  renders  it  unstable,  while  the  reverse  is  the 
case  if  the  axis  of  rotation  is  lowered  (see  fig.  67). 


Unstable.     Raised  axis  and  low  kt 
FIG.  66. 

But  this  effect,  as  previously  explained,  is  of  small 
importance  as  compared  with  that  due  to  the  shape  of  the 
main  plane  ;  for,  while  the  pressures  on  the  keel  surface  are 
never  far  removed  from  the  axis  of  rotation,  the  differential 
variations  in  the  pressure  exerted  on  the  two  wings  of  a 
plane  folded  into  a  dihedral  have,  relatively  to  the  axis,  a 
lever  arm  equal  to  half  the  span  of  the  wing,  and  accord- 
ingly these  variations  are  considerable. 

The  effect  of  the  dihedral  of  the  main  plane  is  therefore 
not  equivalent  in  magnitude  to  that  of  the  keel  surface 
formed  by  the  projected  dihedral  (fig.  68).  The  dihedral 


152 


FLIGHT  WITHOUT  FORMULA 


has  a  much  greater  effect  on  lateral  stability  than  a  similar 
keel  surface. 

We  now  know  the  position  of  the  stable  and  the  un- 
stable axes  of  rotation  according  to  the  particular  struc- 


Unstable.     Lowered  axis  and  high  keel. 
\ 


Stable.     Lowered  axis  and  low  keel. 
FIG.  67. 

ture  of  the  aeroplane,  and  we  have  found  that  the  same 
machine  can  be  stable  laterally  for  one  axis  of  rotation, 
and  unstable  for  another. 

This  is  scarcely  reassuring  and  inevitably  leads  to  the 


FIG.  68. 

question  :    About  which  axis  can  an  aeroplane,  flying  freely 
in  space,  be  brought  to  turn  ? 

In  the  first  place,  the  position  of  the  axes  obviously 
depends  on  the  causes  which  can  bring  about  the  turning 
movement.  But  these  causes  are  known  :  so  far  as  lateral 


STABILITY  IN  STILL  AIR 


153 


equilibrium  is  concerned,  they  can  only  consist  in  excess  of 
pressure  on  one  wing  or  on  the  keel  surface. 

Here,  then,  we  have  one  important  element  of  the  ques- 
tion already  settled.  Nevertheless,  the  problem  cannot 
be  solved  in  its  entirety  without  having  recourse  to  ordinary 
mechanics  and  calculations,  though  the  results  thus  obtained 
may  well  be  called  into  question,  since  the  calculations  have 
to  be  based  on  hypotheses  which  are  not  always  certain  in 
the  present  state  of  aerodynamical  knowledge. 

Without  attempting  to  examine  this  difficult  problem  in 
all  its  details,  we  may  never- 
theless remark  that  in  its 
solution  the  most  important 
part  is  played  by  the  dis- 
tribution of  the  masses 
constituting  the  aeroplane 
or,  in  other  words,  by  its 
structure  considered  from 
the  point  of  view  of  inertia. 

Let  us  take  a  long  iron 
rod  AB  (fig.  69),  ballasted 
with  a  mass  M,  and  sus- 
pend it  from  its  centre  of 
gravity  G  ;  add  a  small 
pair  of  very  light  wings  in  the  neighbourhood  of  the  centre 
of  gravity. 

If,  with  a  pair  of  bellows,  pressure  is  created  beneath  one 
of  the  wings,  the  device  will  start  to  oscillate  laterally,  and 
these  oscillations  will  obviously  take  place  about  the  axis 
of  the  iron  bar.  If  this  is  placed  in  the  position  shown  in 
fig.  69,  the  axis  of  rotation  will  be  a  raised  axis  ;  if  in  the 
position  illustrated  in  fig.  70,  it  will  be  a  lowered  axis. 

Now  every  aeroplane,  and  every  long  body  in  fact,  has  a 
certain  axis  passing  through  the  centre  of  gravity,  about 
which  axis  we  can  assume  the  masses  to  be  distributed,  as 
in  the  case  of  the  present  device  they  are  about  the  axis  of 
the  iron  bar. 


FIG.  69. 


154 


FLIGHT  WITHOUT  FORMULA 


Lateral  oscillations  tend  to  take  place  about  this  axis, 
which  may  be  termed  the  rolling  axis.  The  term,  it  is 
true,  is  not  absolutely  accurate,  and  lateral  oscillations  do 

not  take  place  mathe- 
matically about  this 
axis  ;  but  at  the  same 
time,  as  further  investi- 
gations would  show,  the 
true  rolling  axes  only 
differ  from  it  to  a  very 
slight  extent,  and  are 
always  slightly  more 

.-,,„  raised  than   the   rolling 

M  ^rj{       FlG'  70'  axis.  This  brings  us  to  the 

moment  of  rolling  inertia. 

In  Chapter  VII.  was  defined  the  moment  of  inertia  of 
a  body  about  any  axis  ;  in  the  examination  of  longitudinal 
stability  the  moment  of  inertia  of  an  aeroplane  about  its 
pitching  axis  was  considered  as  the  moment  of  pitching 
inertia.  But  in  the  present  case  we  have  only  to  deal 
with  the  moment  of  inertia  of  an  aeroplane  about  its  rolling 
axis — that  is,  its  moment  of  rolling  inertia. 

As  a  matter  of  fact,  the  true  axis  of  lateral  oscillations 
coincides  more  closely  with  the  rolling  axis  as,  on  the  one 
hand,  the  incidence  of  the  main  plane  is  nearer  to  the  lest 
incidence  (see  Chapter  III.)  and  the  corresponding  drag-to- 
lift  ratio  is  smaller,  and,  on  the  other  hand,  as  the  ratio 
between  the  moment  of  rolling  inertia  and  the  moment 
of  pitching  inertia  is  smaller. 

Owing  to  the  fact  that  this  latter  ratio  is  very  small  in 
the  diagrammatic  case  just  considered,  the  lateral  oscilla- 
tions of  this  device  take  place  almost  exactly  about  the 
rolling  axis,  i.e.  about  the  axis  of  the  iron  bar.* 

*  The  moment  of  rolling  inertia  is  very  slight,  since  those  parts  which 
are  at  any  distance  from  the  rolling  axis,  i.e.  the  wings,  are  very  light, 
while  the  moment  of  pitching  inertia  is  great,  owing  to  the  length  and 
the  weight  of  the  iron  bar. 


STABILITY   IN  STILL  AIR  155 

From  all  this  it  is  clear  that,  according  to  the  position  of 
the  aeroplane  in  flight,  its  natural  axis  of  lateral  oscillation, 
or  approximately  its  rolling  axis,  will  be  either  a  raised  or 
a  lowered  axis.  For  an  aeroplane  to  possess  lateral  stability, 
its  natural  axes  of  oscillation  must  obviously  be  stable  axes. 

Thus,  if  the  wings  of  an  aeroplane  form  an  upward 
dihedral  or  y,  or  if  the  machine  has  a  high  keel  surface,  its 
natural  axes  of  oscillation  must  be  raised  axes,  if  lateral 
stability  is  to  be  ensured.  This  condition  is  complied  with 
if  the  rolling  axis  of  the  aeroplane  is  itself  a  raised  axis, 
and  even  when  the  rolling  axis  is  slightly  lowered,  since 
the  natural  axes  of  oscillation  are  relatively  slightly  raised. 

It  is  also  clear  that  the  stability  will  be  better  the  greater 
the  angle  of  incidence. 

On  the  other  hand,  if  the  main  planes  form  a  downward 
dihedral  or  A>  the  machine  will  be  unstable  laterally  if  the 
rolling  axis  is  a  raised  one  or  even  if  it  is  only  slightly 
lowered.  But  the  aeroplane  can  be  made  stable  if  its 
rolling  axis  is  lowered  to  a  sufficient  extent,  and  the  more 
so  the  smaller  the  angle  of  incidence. 

This  conclusion  is  distinctly  interesting  since  it  is  directly 
at  variance  with  the  views  held  by  the  late  Captain  Ferber, 
whose  great  scientific  attainments  lent  him  all  the  force  of 
authority,  to  the  effect  that  an  upward  dihedral  was  essential 
to  lateral  stability. 

But  it  is  even  more  important  by  reason  of  the  fact — 
which  will  be  duly  discussed  in  the  final  chapter, — already 
noted  by  Ferber  himself,  that  whereas  the  upward  dihedral 
or  V  is  disadvantageous  in  disturbed  air,  the  downward 
dihedral  has  distinct  advantages  in  this  respect. 

On  the  whole,  however,  Ferber's  view  is  correct  at  present, 
since  in  the  majority  of  aeroplanes  of  to-day  the  rolling 
axis  is  practically  identical  with  the  trajectory  of  the 
centre  of  gravity  or  only  very  slightly  lowered.  But  in 
an  aeroplane  with  a  rolling  axis  lowered  to  an  appreciable 
extent,  the  upward  dihedral  might  be  highly  injurious  from 
the  point  of  view  of  lateral  stability,  whereas  the  inverted 


156  FLIGHT  WITHOUT    FORMULA 

dihedral  or  A  would,  contrary  to  general  opinion,  be 
eminently  stable. 

How  is  this  arrangement  to  be  carried  out  in  practice  ? 

The  rolling  axis  is  a  line  which  passes  through  the  centre 
of  gravity  and  lies  close  to  the  masses  situated  at  the  end 
of  the  fuselage,  such  as  the  tail  plane  and  controlling 
surfaces.  When  the  centre  of  gravity  is  normal,  this  line 
consequently  lies  along  the  axis  of  the  fuselage.  But  if 
the  centre  of  gravity  is  situated  low  relatively  to  the  wings, 
the  rolling  axis  is  also  lowered.  The  same  would  occur  if 
the  machine  was  so  arranged  as  to  fly  with  its  tail  high,  so 
that  the  axis  of  its  fuselage  would  form  an  angle,  distinctly 
greater  than  the  normal  incidence,  with  the  chord  of  the 
main  plane. 

On  the  other  hand,  a  low  centre  of  gravity,  if  unduly 
exaggerated,  presents  certain  disadvantages. 

The  best  method  of  obtaining  a  rolling  axis  such  that 
the  inverted  dihedral  of  the  main  plane  produces  lateral 
stability  would  seem  to  be  by  combining  both  devices,  i.e. 
by  slightly  lowering  the  centre  of  gravity  and  raising  the 
tail  in  flight. 

This  conclusion  was  formed  by  the  author  several  years 
ago  ;  and  in  1909,  somewhat  fearful  of  running  counter  to 
the  authoritative  views  of  Captain  Ferber,  the  opinion  was 
sought  of  the  eminent  engineer,  M.  Rodolphe  Soreau,  another 
recognised  authority,  in  regard  to  the  position  of  the  axis 
about  which  an  aeroplane's  natural  lateral  oscillations  take 
place.  In  1910  in  a  previous  work,*  the  author  first  enun- 
ciated in  definite  form  the  proposition  that  an  aeroplane 
with  its  main  planes  arranged  to  form  an  inverted  dihedral 
could,  under  given  conditions,  remain  stable  laterally. 
Since  then  the  point  has  been  dealt  with  in  an  article  in 
La  Technique  Aeronautique  and  in  a  paper  read  before  the 
Academic  des  Sciences.f 

*  The  Mechanics  of  the  Aeroplane  (Longmans,  Green  &  Co.). 
f  La  Technique  Aeronautique,  December  15,  1910 ;    Comptes  Rendus, 
May  15,  1911. 


STABILITY  IN  STILL  AIR  157 

Summing  up  : 

( 1 )  In  aeroplanes  of  the  shape  hitherto  generally  employed 

a  straight  plane  produces  no  lateral  stability,  apart 
from  the  very  slight  stabilising  effect  produced  by 
the  secondary  cause,  already  referred  to. 

(2)  In  such  aeroplanes  a  dihedral  angle  of  the  wings  or 

the  use  of  a  high  keel  surface  produces  lateral 
stability,  and  this  in  an  increasing  degree  as  the 
angle  of  incidence  is  greater. 

(3)  If  the  centre  of  gravity  of  the  aeroplane  is  low,  or  if 

its  tail  hi  normal  flight  is  high  (or  if  both  these 
features  are  incorporated  in  the  machine),  an 
inverted  dihedral  or  A  of  the  wings  with  a  low 
keel  surface  may  produce  lateral  stability,  and  this 
to  an  increasing  extent  the  smaller  the  angle  of 
incidence. 

Lateral  stability,  therefore,  depends  on  several  different 
parts  of  the  structure,  but  it  can  never  attain  the  same 
magnitude  as  longitudinal  stability,  which  is  easily  explained. 
For,  whereas  in  the  case  of  longitudinal  stability  any 
angular  displacement  in  the  sense  of  diving  or  stalling 
affects  to  its  full  extent  the  angle  of  the  main  and  the 
tail  planes,  as  regards  lateral  stability  a  great  angular 
displacement  in  the  sense  of  rolling  is  required  to  pro- 
duce even  a  slight  difference  in  the  incidence  of  the  two 
wings. 

The  righting  couples  are  therefore  much  smaller  in 
the  lateral  than  the  longitudinal  sense  for  any  given 
oscillations.  If,  as  hi  Chapter  VI.,  the  degree  of  lateral 
stability  of  an  aeroplane  is  represented  by  the  length  of 
a  pendulum  arm,  it  will  be  found  that  even  with  the 
most  stable  machines  this  length  is  hardly  in  excess  of 
0'5  m.,  while  attaining  2-5  and  even  3  m.  in  the  case  of 
longitudinal  stability. 

As  with  longitudinal  stability,  so  here  again  there  exists 
a  condition  of  stability  of  oscillation — that  is,  a  definite 


158  FLIGHT  WITHOUT  FORMULA 

proportion  must  exist  between  the  stabilising  effect  of 
the  shape  of  the  machine  and  the  value  of  its  moment  of 
rolling  inertia,  so  that  the  lateral  oscillations  can  never 
increase  to  the  point  of  making  the  aeroplane  turn  turtle. 
For  this  reason,  since  lateral  stability  is  relatively  small, 
the  moment  of  rolling  inertia  should  not  be  too  great. 
On  the  other  hand,  an  increase  in  span,  which  increases 
this  moment  of  inertia,  also  gives  the  stabilising  effect 
a  long  lever  arm.  Hence,  a  middle  course  had  best  be 
adopted. 

Aeroplanes  with  a  large  rolling  inertia  oscillate  slowly, 
so  that  there  is  time  to  correct  the  oscillations,  but  these 
tend  to  persist. 

So  far  as  the  wind  is  concerned,  it  would  appear  an 
advantage  to  concentrate  the  masses,  thus  keeping  the 
moment  of  inertia  small  (see  Chapter  X.). 

A  low  centre  of  gravity,  as  already  shown,  increases  to  a 
considerable  extent  the  moment  of  inertia  both  to  pitching 
and  to  rolling.  Hence,  if  unduly  low,  it  may  set  up  lateral 
oscillations,  which  constitute  the  disadvantage  previously 
referred  to.  If,  therefore,  a  low  centre  of  gravity  is  resorted 
to  with  the  object  of  inclining  the  rolling  axis  to  permit  the 
use  of  wings  with  an  inverted  dihedral  or  A,  care  'should 
be  taken  that  it  be  not  too  low,  and  it  would  seem  in  every 
respect  preferable  to  obtain  the  same  result  by  raising 
the  tail.* 

Aeroplanes  with  little  rolling  inertia  oscillate  more 
quickly  than  the  others.  If  this  is  slightly  disadvantageous 
since  these  oscillations  cannot  be  so  easily  corrected,  quick 
oscillations,  on  the  other  hand,  possess  the  advantage  of 
being  accompanied  by  a  damping  effect  similar  to  that 
existing  in  the  case  of  longitudinal  oscillations  and  referred 
to  above.  For,  if  a  plane  oscillates  laterally,  the  wind 
strikes  it  at  either  a  greater  or  smaller  angle  than  when 
it  is  motionless,  and  this  becomes  the  more  marked  the 
quicker  the  oscillation. 

*  Such  a  tail  should  obviously  offer  as  little  resistance  as  possible. 


STABILITY  IN  STILL  AIR  159 

The  small  degree  of  lateral  stability  possessed  by  aero- 
planes, especially  of  those  with  straight  planes,  would, 
generally  speaking,  usually  not  suffice  to  prevent  the 
upsetting  of  the  machine  owing  to  atmospheric  disturb- 
ances, the  more  so  since,  as  Chapter  X.  will  show,  the  very 
shapes  and  arrangements  which  produce  lateral  stability 
may  at  times  interfere  with  the  flying  qualities  of  the 
machine  in  disturbed  air. 

Hence  it  is  necessary  to  give  the  pilot  a  means  of  power- 
ful control  over  lateral  balance  in  order  to  counteract  the 
effects  of  air  disturbances. 

This  means  consists  in  warping,  which  was  probably 
first  conceived  by  Mouillard,  and  first  carried  out  in  practice 
by  the  brothers  Wright.  Other  devices,  such  as  ailerons, 
have  since  been  brought  out,  the  object  in  each  case  being 
to  produce,  differentially  or  not,  an  excess  of  pressure  on 
one  wing. 

The  pilot  therefore  controls  the  lateral  balance  of  his 
machine,  and  this  has  to  be  constantly  corrected  and 
maintained  by  him. 

Naturally,  the  idea  of  providing  some  automatic  device 
to  replace  this  controlling  action  by  the  pilot  has  arisen, 
but  this  question  will  be  left  for  discussion  in  the  last 
chapter,  which  deals  with  the  effects  of  wind  on  the 
aeroplane. 

The  rotation  of  a  single  propeller  causes  a  reaction  in 
an  aeroplane  tending  to  tilt  it  laterally  to  some  extent. 
This  could  easily  be  corrected  by  slightlj7  overloading  the 
wing  that  shows  the  tendency  to  rise  ;  but  in  this  event  the 
reverse  effect  would  take  place  when  the  engine  stopped, 
either  unintentionally  or  through  the  pilot's  action  when 
about  to  begin  a  glide — that  is,  at  the  very  moment  when 
longitudinal  balance  is  already  disturbed. 

Lateral  balance  is  bound  to  be  disturbed  in  some  degree 
owing  to  the  propeller  ceasing  to  revolve,  but  it  would  seem 
preferable  that  at  the  moment  when  this  occurs  both  wings 
should  be  evenly  loaded. 


160  FLIGHT  WITHOUT   FORMULAE 

For  this  reason  constructors  generally  leave  it  to  the 
pilot  to  correct  the  effect  referred  to  by  means  of  the  warp 
(which  term  includes  all  the  different  devices  producing 
lateral  stability).  Probably  the  effect  is  responsible  for 
the  tendency  which  most  aeroplanes  possess  of  turning 
more  easily  in  one  direction  than  the  other.* 

*  Another  effect  due  to  the  rotation  of  the  propeller,  the  gyroscopic 
effect,  will  be  briefly  considered  in  the  following  chapter. 


CHAPTER  IX 
STABILITY  IN  STILL  AIB 

LATERAL  STABILITY  (concluded) — DIRECTIONAL 
STABILITY — TURNING 

OUR  examination  of  lateral  stability  may  well  be  brought 
to  a  conclusion  by  considering  the  interesting  lessons  that 
may  be  learned  from  experiments  with  little  paper  gliders. 
First,  we  will  take  some  of  those  gliders  which  have  been 
described  in  previous  chapters  and  examine  them  in  regard 
to  lateral  stability. 

Type  1  (see  Chapter  VII.). — This,  it  will  be  remembered, 
is  a  simple  rectangular  piece  of  paper.  It  has  already  been 
explained  that  it  was  necessary  to  bend  it  so  as  to  form  a 
lateral  V- 

This  arrangement  is  essential  for  obtaining  lateral  stability 
with  this  particular  glider,  since  its  rolling  axis,  which 
corresponds  approximately  with  the  fold  along  the  centre, 
is  a  raised  axis,  for  the  reason  that  the  path  followed  by 
the  centre  of  gravity  must  be  at  a  lesser  angle  than  this 
central  fold,  in  order  to  give  the  gliders  an  angle  of  incidence. 
Practice  here  will  be  seen  to  confirm  theory. 

Cut  out  a  rectangular  sheet  of  very  stiff  paper  and,  without 
folding  it,  load  it  with  ballast  as  shown  in  Chapter  VII. 

During  the  process  of  finding,  by  experiment,  the  correct 
position  for  the  ballast,  it  will  be  found  that  the  flight  of 
such  a  glider  is  accompanied  by  considerable  lateral 
oscillations.  More,  these  oscillations  are  both  lateral  and 
directional ;  in  other  words,  the  path  followed  by  the 

161 


162  FLIGHT  WITHOUT  FORMULA 

centre  of  gravity  is  a  sinuous  one,  and  the  glider  not  only 
tilts  up  on  to  one  wing  and  the  other  in  succession,  but 
each  time  it  tends  to  change  its  course  and  swerve  round 
towards  the  lower  whig,  and  thus  it  is  virtually  always 
skidding  or  yawing  sideways. 

In  this  way  it  appears  to  oscillate  not  about  an  axis 
passing  through  the  centre  of  gravity,  but  about  a  higher 
axis. 

The  reason  for  this,  which  will  be  entered  into  more  fully 
in  connection  with  directional  stability,  is  the  extremely 
small  keel  surface  of  such  a  glider.  This  might  at  first 
appear  to  conflict  with  the  fundamental  principle,*  but  the 
anomaly  is  simply  due  to  the  fact  that  the  lateral  oscillations 
which,  as  always,  do  indeed  occur  about  an  axis  passing 
through  the  centre  of  gravity,  are  combined  with  the  zig- 
zag movement  due  to  the  small  keel  surface,  which  is 
moreover  the  outcome  of  the  oscillations. 

The  tendency  to  roll  is  the  result  of  the  very  slight 
lateral  stability  of  a  straight  plane,  which  possesses  practi- 
cally no  keel  surface,  and  this  tendency  is  counteracted  by 
nothing  but  the  small  secondary  damping  effect  referred 
to  in  Chapter  VIII. 

Oscillatory  stability  is  therefore  almost  absent,  and  the 
first  rolling  movement  would  increase  until  the  glider  was 
overturned,  but  for  the  fact  that,  the  air  pressure  being  no 
longer  directed  vertically  upwards,  the  path  followed  by 
the  centre  of  gravity  is  deflected  sideways  and  the  glider 
tends  to  turn  bodily  towards  its  down-tilted  side. 

The  glider  promptly  obeys  this  tendency,  for  its  mass  is 
feeble  while  it  possesses  practically  no  keel  surface  offer- 
ing lateral  resistance  ;  hence  the  centre  of  pressure  moves 
towards  the  side  in  which  movement  is  taking  place  and 
thus  creates  a  righting  couple.  Consequently,  in  a  measure, 
the  yawing  saves  the  glider  from  overturning. 

This  tendency  to  yaw  which  is  displayed  by  machines  with 

*  That  an  aeroplane  should  be  considered  as  being  suspended  from 
its  centre  of  gravity  (see  p.  93). 


STABILITY  IN  STILL  AIR  163 

straight  wings  and  a  small  keel  surface  is  to  be  observed, 
for  it  would  seem  to  furnish  the  reason  for  the  side-slips  to 
which  aeroplanes  devoid  of  a  lateral  dihedral  are  prone. 

Now,  if  the  sheet  of  paper  is  slightly  folded  upwards 
from  the  centre,  these  various  movements  decrease,  and, 
finally,  if  folded  up  still  further,  disappear  altogether. 
The  dihedral  angle  increases  lateral  stability  and  oscillatory 
stability,  while  the  considerable  keel  surface  which  the 
glider  now  possesses  stops  all  tendency  to  yaw. 

Since  the  stabilising  effect  of  the  dihedral  in  the  example 
chosen  is  due  to  the  rolling  axis  being  a  raised  axis,  it  is 
to  be  expected  that,  when  launched  upside  down,  the 
glider  will  prove  to  be  laterally  unstable.  This,  in  fact,  is 
what  occurs  if  the  dihedral  is  pronounced  enough.  The 
glider  immediately  turns  right  side  up. 

If  the  glider  has  no  dihedral,  or  only  a  slight  one,  and  if 
the  span  is  reduced  (in  this  case  either  the  ballast  must  be 
moved  back  or — and  this  is  preferable — the  wing-tips  must 
be  turned  up  aft,  for  the  weight  of  the  ballast  is  now  dis- 
proportionate to  the  weight  of  the  paper  so  that  the  centre 
of  gravity  has  moved  forward),  it  may  be  observed  that 
the  lateral  oscillations  become  quicker,  which  is  due  to  the 
moment  of  rolling  inertia  having  diminished. 

Type,  2  (see  Chapter  VII.). — This  model  represents  the 
normal  shape  of  an  aeroplane  (fig.  51).  It  has  already 
been  explained  that  it  should  be  given  a  slight  dihedral, 
which,  in  any  case,  it  will  tend  to  assume  of  its  own  accord 
owing  to  the  combined  forces  of  gravity  and  air  pressure. 

This  glider  will  be  found  to  possess  good  lateral  stability, 
its  rolling  axis  coinciding  approximately  with  the  central 
fold,  so  that  it  is  a  raised  axis. 

Oscillatory  stability  is  good  and  rolling  almost  absent. 
If  the  glider  is  bent  into  a  downward  dihedral  or  A  (this 
fold  should  be  somewhat  emphasised  in  view  of  the  tendency 
of  the  glider  to  assume  an  ordinary  V  of  its  own  accord), 
it  will  overturn,  which  is  quite  in  accord  with  theory,  as 
the  natural  rolling  axis  is  a  raised  axis. 


164  FLIGHT  WITHOUT  FORMULA 

Type  3  (see  Chapter  VII.).— This  is  the  "  Canard  "  or  tail- 
first  type  (fig.  53).  The  wing-tips  being  bent  vertically 
upward,  form  a  high  keel  surface,  while,  as  in  the  previous 
case,  the  glider  naturally  tends  to  assume  a  V- 

Hence  it  is  laterally  stable,  and  the  rolling  axis,  coincid- 
ing with  the  central  fold,  is  a  raised  axis. 

There  are  no  appreciable  oscillations.  If  it  is  bent 
downward  into  a  f\,  and  this  to  a  pronounced  extent  owing 
to  the  stabilising  effect  of  the  fins,  or  if  these  latter  are 
folded  down,  the  glider  overturns. 

These  three  types,  therefore,  are  in  accordance  with  the 
principle  laid  down  by  Captain  Ferber,  to  the  effect  that 
a  lateral  V  is  necessary  for  lateral  stability. 

Examination  of  the  following  two  models,  on  the  other 
hand,  shows  them  to  be  in  contradiction  with  this  principle, 
and  bears  out  the  author's  contention  that  lateral  stability 
may  be  obtained  in  an  aeroplane  possessing  a  downward 
dihedral  or  A- 

Type  5* — 1.  Cut  out  from  a  sheet  of  paper  folded  in  two 
the  outline  shown  in  fig.  71. 

2.  Cut  away,  hi  the  dimensions  shown,  the  folded  edge 
at  AB  and  CD. 

3.  Glue  to  the  inside  of  the  fold  :    (a)  at  AB,  a  small 
strip  of  cardboard  cut  from  a  visiting-card  (5  to  6  cm. 
long  and  1  cm.  broad),  (b)  at  CD  a  rectangular  piece  of 
paper  (4  cm.  by  15  mm.). 

4.  Fold  back  the  wings  and  the  tail  plane  along  the  thick 
dotted  lines.     The  wings  should  be  folded  so  as  to  form  a 
lateral  A-      (If  any  difficulty  is  experienced  in  maintaining 
this  shape,  a  thin  strip  of  cardboard,  4  to  5   mm.  wide, 
may  be  glued  along  the  forward  edge.) 

5.  Affix  the  ballast,   consisting  of  one  or  more  paper 
fasteners,  to  the  end  of  the  paper  strip  in  front.     (The 
correct   position   must   be   found   by   experiment,    and   it 
may  be  useful,  for  this  purpose,  to  adjust   the  forward 

*  This  number  was  given  so  as  not  to  break  the  numerical  sequence. 
Type  4  was  dealt  with  in  Chapter  VII. 


STABILITY   IN  STILL  AIR 


165 


strip  of  cardboard  to  the  correct  position  before  the  glue 
is  quite  dry.) 


FIG.  71. 

Type  6.—\.  Cut  out  from  a'sheet'of  paper  folded  in  two 
the  outline  shown  in  fig.  72. 


Fold  along  this  line. 


FIG.  72. 

2.  Fold  back  the  wings  and  the  tail  plane  along  the 
thick  dotted  lines.     The  wings  are  folded  so  as  to  form  an 


166  FLIGHT  WITHOUT  FORMULAE 

inverted  dihedral  or  A>  the  edge  of  the  fold  being   upper- 
most in  this  model. 

3.  Glue  to  the  inside  of  the  fold  :    (a)  in  front  and  so  as 
to  form  a  continuation  of  the  fold,  a  strip  of  cardboard  cut 
from  a  visiting-card,  and  measuring  5  or  6  cm.  by  1  cm.  ; 
(b)  in  the  rear  and  at  right  angles  to  the  fold,  another  strip 
of  cardboard  measuring  4  cm.  by  15  mm. 

4.  Affix  ballast  in  the  shape  of  two  or  three  paper  clips 
at  the  extremity  of  the  foremost  cardboard  strip. 

These  models  belonging  to  types  5  and  6  have  to  be 
adjusted  with  great  care  and  will  probably  turn  over  at 
the  first  attempt,  until  balance  is  perfect,  but  this  need  not 
discourage  further  attempts. 

If  they  display  a  marked  tendency  to  side-slip  or  yaw 
or  to  turn  to  one  side,  the  trailing  edge  of  the  opposite 
whig-tip  should  be  slightly  turned  up,  until  balance  is 
obtained. 

But  if  the  model  rolls  in  too  pronounced  a  fashion, 
such  oscillations  may  be  caused  to  disappear  either  by 
shifting  the  ballast  or  even  by  turning  up  or  down  the 
rear  edge  of  the  tail  plane.  In  some  cases  the  same  result 
may  be  obtained  simply  by  emphasising  the  A  of  the 
wings. 

Once  they  are  properly  adjusted,  these  gliders  assume  on 
their  flight-path  the  attitudes  shown  respectively  in  figs. 
73  and  74.  These  are  the  attitudes  imposed  by  the  laws 
of  equilibrium  ;  and  if  the  gliders  are  thrown  skyward 
anyhow,  they  will  always  resume  these  positions,  provided 
they  are  at  a  sufficient  height  above  the  ground. 

Model  5  displays  a  slight  tendency  to  roll,  but  model  6 
follows  its  proper  flight-path,  which  can  be  made  perfectly 
straight,  in  quite  a  remarkable  manner. 

This  is  all  in  accordance  with  the  theory  put  forward  in 
Chapter  VIII.  Because  the  rolling  axis  is  a  lowered  axis 
— since  in  model  5  the  centre  of  gravity  is  situated  very  low 
and  in  model  6  the  tail  is  very  high — the  inverted  dihedral 
or  A  of  the  wings  produces  stable  lateral  equilibrium. 


STABILITY  IN  STILL  AIR 


167 


On  the  other  hand,  in  model  5  the  centre  of  gravity  is 
exceptionally  low  ;    hence  the  moment  of  rolling  inertia  is 


FIG.  73.— Perspective. 


PIG.  74. — Perspective. 

great,  so  that  oscillatory  stability  is  not  quite  perfect  and 
there  remains  a  tendency  to  swing  laterally,  whereas  in 


168  PLIGHT  WITHOUT  FORMULA 

model  6  this  defect  is  absent,  since  the  centre  of  gravity  is 
only  slightly  lowered. 

The  latter  arrangement  is  therefore  the  one  to  be  adopted 
in  designing  a  full-size  aeroplane  of  this  type. 

In  both  cases,  by  increasing  the  A  the  tendency  to 
oscillate  is  reduced,  owing  to  the  fact  that,  up  to  a  certain 
limit,  the  value  of  the  righting  couples  is  hereby  increased 
likewise.  The  same  is  true  of  a  decrease  in  the  angle  of 
incidence,  effected  either  by  displacing  the  ballast  farther 
forward  or  by  adjusting  the  tail,  because,  as  has  been 
shown  previously,  any  decrease  in  the  incidence  augments 
lateral  stability  if  the  wings  are  placed  at  a  A- 

Our  theory  would  be  even  more  conclusively  proved 
correct,  if,  when  the  wings  were  turned  up  into  a  V>  the 
glider  overturned. 

As  a  matter  of  fact  this  does  occur  sometimes,  especially 
with  model  6,  but  not  always,  and  with  its  wings  so  arranged 
the  model  may  still  retain  a  certain  amount  of  lateral 
stability. 

This  apparent  conflict  of  practice  and  theory  may  be 
explained  by  the  fact  that,  by  turning  up  the  wings  of 
such  a  model  the  centre  of  gravity  is  raised,  since  the 
wings  constitute  an  important  part  of  the  weight  of  these 
little  gliders  ;  consequently  the  rolling  axis  is  also  raised, 
and  since,  as  previously  stated,  lateral  oscillation  occurs 
not  precisely  about  the  rolling  axis  but  about  a  higher  axis 
still,  the  true  rolling  axis  may  prove  to  be  a  stable  axis 
for  V-shaped  wings.  This  is  borne  out  further  by  the 
fact  that  in  many  cases,  and  especially  with  model  6,  this 
does  not  occur  and  that  the  glider  overturns. 

With  the  kind  assistance  of  M.  Eiffel,  the  author  carried 
out  hi  the  Eiffel  laboratory  a  series  of  tests  with  a  scale 
model  of  greater  size  and  so  designed  that  its  wings  could 
be  altered  to  form  either  an  upward  or  a  downward  dihedral, 
and  these  tests  appear  to  be  conclusive. 

The  model,  perfectly  stable  when  its  wings  formed  a 
A  >  showed  a  strong  tendency  to  overturn  when  the  wings 


STABILITY  IN  STILL  AIR 


169 


formed  a  V-  (The  raising  of  the  centre  of  gravity  caused 
by  upturning  the  wings  was  neutralised  by  lowering  the 
ballast  to  a  corresponding  extent.) 

But  even  if  this  further  proof  were  absent,  it  would 
nevertheless  remain  true — and  the  fact  is  most  important, 
as  will  be  shown  in  Chapter  X. — that  it  seems  possible  to 
build  aeroplanes,  with  wings  forming  an  inverted  dihedral 
angle,  which  in  spite  of  this  are  laterally  stable. 

DIRECTIONAL  STABILITY 

An  aeroplane  must  possess  more  than  longitudinal  and 
lateral  stability  ;  it  must  maintain  its  direction  of  flight, 
must  always  fly  head  to  the  relative  wind,  and  must  not 
swing  round  owing  to  a  slight  disturbance  from  without. 
This  is  expressed  by  the  term  directional  stability. 

In  other  words,  an  aeroplane  should 
behave,  in  the  wind  set  up  by  its  own 
speed  through  the  air,  like  a  good  * 

weathercock. 

In  fig.  75,  let  AB  represent,  looking 
downwards,  a  weathercock,  turning  about  \  / 

the  vertical  axis  shown  at  0,  the  direction 
of  the  wind  being  shown  by  the  arrow. 

From  our  knowledge  of  the  distribu- 
tion of  pressure  on  a  flat  plane  (fig.  32, 
Chapter  VI.),  it  is  clear  that  if  the  axis 
O  is  situated  behind  the  limit  point  of 
the  centre  of  pressure,  the  weathercock, 
in  order  to  be  in  equilibrium,  would  have 
to  be  at  an  angle  with  the  wind  such 
that  the  corresponding  pressure  passed 
through  the  point  0.  Hence,  the  weathercock  would 
assume  the  position  A'B'  or  A*B". 

It  would  be  a  bad  weathercock  because  it  formed  an 
angle  with  the  wind.  A  good  weathercock  always  lies 
absolutely  parallel  with  the  wind,  which  thus  always  meets 
it  head-on. 


A"  A 


A' 


B 


B 


FIG.  75.— Plan. 


170  PLIGHT  WITHOUT  FORMULA 

Therefore,  in  a  good  flat  weathercock  the  axis  of  rotation 
must  be  situated  in  front  of  the  limit  point  of  the  centre 
of  pressure,  i.e.  in  the  first  fourth  from  front  to  rear. 

In  so  far  as  its  direction  in  the  air  is  concerned,  an  aero- 
plane behaves  in  exactly  the  same  way  as  the  weather- 
cock which  we  have  termed  its  keel  surface,  the  axis  of 
rotation  being  approximately  a  vertical  axis  passing  through 
the  centre  of  gravity. 

It  can  therefore  be  stated  that  for  an  aeroplane  to  possess 
directional  or  weathercock  stability,  the  limit  point  of  the 
centre  of  pressure  on  its  keel  surface,  when  it  meets  the  air 
at  even  smaller  angles,  must  lie  behind  the  centre  of  gravity. 

Directional  equilibrium  is  thus  obviously  stable,  since 
any  change  of  direction  sets  up  a  righting  couple,  because 
the  pressure  on  the  keel  surface  always  passes  behind  the 
centre  of  gravity.* 

Directional  stability  is  usually  maintained  by  the  means 
already  provided  to  secure  lateral  stability,  the  rear  portion 
of  the  fuselage,  which  is  often  covered  in  with  fabric,  con- 
stituting the  rear  part  of  the  keel  surface.  Moreover,  this 
is  further  increased  by  the  presence  of  a  vertical  rudder 
still  further  aft. 

But  there  are  certain  machines  in  which  special  means 
have  to  be  taken  to  secure  directional  stability — the  tail- 
first  or  "  Canard  "  machine  is  of  this  type. 

In  Chapters  VI.  and  VII.  it  was  stated  that  the  fact  that 
this  type  of  machine  has  its  tail  plane  in  front  tends  to 
longitudinal  instability,  which  is  only  overcome  by  the 
unusually  high  stabilising  efficiency  of  the  main  planes, 

*  Reference  to  Chapters  VI.  and  VII.  will  show  that  longitudinal 
equilibrium  is  also,  in  effect,  weathercock  equilibrium.  But  in  this 
respect,  the  planes  must  always  form  an  angle  with  the  relative  wind, 
which  constitutes  the  angle  of  incidence  and  produces  the  lift.  In 
regard  to  longitudinal  stability,  the  aeroplane  should  therefore  be  a  bad 
weathercock.  Further,  it  will  be  shown  in  Chapter  X.  that,  in  con- 
sidering the  effect  of  the  wind  on  an  aeroplane,  two  classes  of  bad  weather- 
cocks have  to  be  distinguished,  and  that  an  aeroplane  should  be,  if  the 
term  be  allowed  to  pass,  a  "  good  variety  of  bad  weathercocks." 


STABILITY  IN  STILL  AIR  171 

which  are  of  relatively  great  size  and  situated  at  a  con- 
siderable distance  behind  the  centre  of  gravity. 

The  same  is  true  in  regard  to  directional  stability,  and 
the  existence  in  the  forward  part  of  the  machine  of  a  long 
fuselage,  comparable  to  a  weathercock  turned  the  wrong 
way  round,  would  speedily  cause  the  aeroplane  to  turn 
completely  round  if  it  were  not  provided  with  considerable 
keel  surface  behind  the  centre  of  gravity.  The  necessity 
for  this  arrangement  will  readily  appear  if,  in  the  little 
paper  glider  No.  3,  already  described,  the  vertical  fins  at 
the  wing-tips  are  removed.  The  glider  will  then  turn 
about  itself  without  having  any  fixed  flight-path.* 

In  Chapter  VIII.  it  was  shown  that  lateral  stability 
is  affected  by  raising  or  lowering  the  vertical  keel  surrace. 
But  even  if  it  is  neither  high  nor  low,  and  though  it  may 
appear  to  affect  only  directional  stability,  every  bit  of  keel 
surface  plays  an  important  part  in  lateral  stability.  For 
these  two  varieties  of  stability  are  not  absolutely  distinct. 
Both,  in  fact,  relate  to  the  rotation  of  the  aeroplane  about 
axes  situated  in  the  plane  of  symmetry. 

When  these  axes  are  close  to  the  flight-path  of  the  centre 
of  gravity,  only  lateral  stability  comes  in  question  ;  but 
when  they  are  more  nearly  vertical,  the  rotary  movement 
about  them  belongs  to  directional  stability. 

Nevertheless,  any  turning  movement  about  any  axis 
other  than  that  formed  by  the  path  of  the  centre  of  gravity 
plays  its  part  in  both  lateral  and  directional  stability,  and 
it  is  only  in  so  far  as  it  affects  the  one  more  than  the  other 
that  it  is  classified  as  belonging  to  lateral  or  directional 
stability.  The  line  of  cleavage  between  these  two  varieties 
of  stability  is  by  no  means  clear. 

From  this  it  follows,  in  the  author's  opinion,  that  the 
means  for  obtaining  lateral  stability  gain  considerably  in 
effectiveness  if  they  also  produce  directional  stability.  If 

*  To  obtain  good  directional  stability,  those  paper  models  with  a 
ballasted  strip  of  cardboard  in  front  were  all  provided  with  a  vertical 
fin  in  the  rear. 


172  FLIGHT  WITHOUT  FORMULA 

aeroplanes  with  wings  forming  a  A  are  eyer  built,  they 
should  be  provided  with  a  considerable  amount  of  keel 
surface  aft  (placed  low  rather  than  high). 

In  conclusion,  it  may  be  said  that,  of  the  three  varieties 
of  stability,  directional  stability  is  at  the  present  time  the 
most  perfect,  which  is  to  be  accounted  for  on  the  ground 
that  the  pressure  on  the  keel  surface  must  always  pass 
behind  the  centre  of  gravity,  whence  arise  strong  righting 
couples. 

In  the  order  of  their  effectiveness  at  the  present  day, 
the  three  classes  of  stability  can  therefore  be  arranged  as 
follows  : — 

Directional  stability. 

Longitudinal  stability. 

Lateral  stability. 

By  careful  observation  of  the  oscillations  of  an  aeroplane 
the  truth  of  this  statement  will  be  borne  out.  Every 
aeroplane  betrays  some  tendency  to  roll ;  at  times  it  also 
tends  to  pitch,  but  it  hardly  ever  swerves  from  side  to  side 
on  its  flight-path,  zigzag  fashion. 

TURNING 

The  vertical  flight-path  of  an  aeroplane  is  controlled  by 
the  elevator  ;  but  the  pilot  must  also  be  able  to  change  his 
direction  and  to  execute  turning  movements  to  right  and 
left. 

A  few  points  of  elementary  mechanics  may  here  be 
usefully  recalled. 

If  a  body  is  freely  abandoned  to  its  own  devices  after 
having  been  launched  at  a  certain  speed  (omitting  from 
consideration  the  action  of  gravity),  it  continues  by  reason 
of  its  inertia  to  advance  in  a  straight  line  at  its  original 
speed,  and  an  outside  force  is  required  in  order  to  modify 
this  speed  or  to  alter  the  direction  followed  by  the  body. 

A  body  following  a  curved  path  therefore  only  does  so 
through  the  action  of  an  outside  force. 

If  the  body  follows  a  circular  path,  the  force  which  pre- 


STABILITY   IN  STILL  AIR  173 

vents  it  from  getting  further  away  from  the  centre  of  the 
circle,  although  its  inertia  seeks  to  propel  it  in  a  straight 
line,  to  move  away  at  a  tangent,  is  termed  centripetal  force. 

For  instance,  if  a  stone  attached  to  the  end  of  a  string 
is  whirled  round,  it  describes  a  circle  instead  of  following 
a  straight  line  only  because  the  string  resists  and  exerts 
on  it  a  centripetal  force.  If  this  force  is  stopped  and  the 
string  is  let  go,  the  stone  will  fly  off  at  a  tangent. 

On  the  other  hand,  a  body,  in  this  case  the  stone,  always 
tends  to  fly  off ;  it  thus  reacts,  exerting  in  its  turn  on  the 
cause  which  maintains  it  in  a  circular  path — in  this  case, 
on  the  string — a  force  termed  centrifugal  force,  which,  in 
accordance  with  the  well-known  principle  of  mechanics 
concerning  the  equality  of  action  and  reaction,  is  exactly 
equal  and  opposite  to  the  centripetal  force  which  causes  it. 

In  the  example  chosen,  the  value  of  the  centripetal  and 
centrifugal  forces  (the  same  in  both  cases)  could  be 
measured  by  attaching  a  spring  balance  to  the  string.  It 
would  be  found  that,  as  is  easily  shown  in  theory,  this 
value  is  proportional  to  the  square  of  the  speed  of  rotation 
and  inversely  proportional  to  the  radius  of  the  circle 
described. 

From  this  it  is  clear  that  in  order  to  curve  the  flight- 
path  of  an  aeroplane,  that  is,  to  make  it  turn,  it  is  necessary 
to  exert  upon  it  by  some  means  or  other  a  centripetal 
force  directed  from  the  side  hi  which  the  turn  is  to  be 
made.  This  can  be  done  by  creating,  through  movable 
controlling  surfaces,  a  certain  lack  of  symmetry  in  the 
shape  of  the  aeroplane  which  will  result  in  a  correspond- 
ing lack  of  symmetry  in  the  reactions  of  the  air  upon  it. 

The  most  obvious  proceeding  is  to  provide  the  aeroplane 
with  the  same  device  by  which  ships  are  steered  and  to 
equip  it  with  a  rudder.  But,  just  as  a  ship  without  a 
keel  responds  only  in  a  slight  measure  to  the  action  of  a 
rudder,  so  an  aeroplane  offering  little  lateral  resistance — 
that  is,  having  but  little  keel  surface — only  responds  to  the 
rudder  in  a  minor  degree. 


174 


FLIGHT  WITHOUT  FORMULAE 


In  order  to  make  this  clear,  we  will  take  the  case  of  an 
aeroplane  entirely  devoid  of  keel  surface,  though  this  is 
an  impossibility  on  a  par  with  the  case  of  an  aeroplane 
wholly  devoid  of  detrimental  surface,  since  the  structure 
of  an  aeroplane  must  perforce  always  offer  some  lateral 
resistance,  even  though  the  constructor  has  tried  to  reduce 
this  to  vanishing-point. 

However,  let  us  assume  that  such  an  aeroplane,  having 


Q 


/t 


FIG.  76. 


its  centre  of  gravity  at  G  (fig.  76),  is  provided  with  a 
rudder  CD. 

If  the  rudder  is  moved  to  the  position  CD',  the  aero- 
plane will  turn  about  its  centre  of  gravity  until  the  rudder 
lies  parallel  with  the  wind.  But  there  will  not  be  exerted 
on  the  centre  of  gravity  any  unsymmetrical  reaction,  any 
centripetal  force  capable  of  curving  the  flight-path. 

The  aeroplane  will  therefore  still  proceed  in  a  straight 
line,  and  the  only  effect  of  the  displacement  of  the  rudder 


STABILITY   IN  STILL  AIR 


175 


will  be  to  make  the  aeroplane  advance  crabwise,  without 
any  tendency  to  turn  on  its  flight-path. 

But  if  the  machine  is  equipped  with  a  keel  surface  AB 
(fig.  77),  directional  equilibrium  necessitates  that  this  keel 
surface  should  present  an  angle  to  the  wind,  and  become 
thereby  subjected  to  a  pressure  Q,  whose  couple  relatively 


Fro.  77.— Plan. 


to  the  centre  of  gravity  is  equal  and  opposite  to  the  pressure 
q  exerted  011  the  displaced  rudder  CD'.  Since  Q  is  con- 
siderably greater  than  q,  there  is  exerted  on  the  centre  of 
gravity,  as  the  result  of  their  simultaneous  effect,  a  resultant 
pressure  approximately  equal  to  their  difference  (which 
could  be  found  by  compounding  the  forces),  and  this  forms 
a  centripetal  reaction  capable  of  curving  the  flight-path — 
that  is,  of  making  the  machine  turn. 


176 


FLIGHT  WITHOUT  FORMULA 


It  should  be  observed  that  the  nearer  the  keel  surface 
is  to  the  centre  of  gravity  the  greater  is  the  centripetal 
force  set  up  by  the  action  of  the  rudder.  Similarly,  the 
intensity  of  this  force  also  depends  on  the  extent  of  the 
keel  surface.  And  lastly,  since  the  centripetal  force  has 
a  value  equal  to  the  difference  between  the  pressures  Q 
and  q,  it  becomes  greater  the  smaller  the  latter  pressure. 
Hence  there  is  an  advantage  in  using  a  small  rudder,  which 

must,  in  consequence, 
have  a  long  lever  arm 
in  order  to  balance  the 
effect  of  the  keel  surface. 
A  turn  might  also  be 
effected  by  lowering  a 
flap  CD,  as  shown  in 
fig.  78  at  the  extremity 
of  one  wing,  this  flap 
constituting  a  brake. 
In  this  case,  too,  a  keel 
surface  is  essential  and 
equilibrium  would  exist 
if  the  couples  set  up  by 
the  pressures  Q  and  q, 
exerted  on  the  keel  sur- 
face and  on  the  brake 
respectively,  were  equal. 
A  centripetal  reaction, 
the  resultant  of  these  pressures,  would  act  on  the  centre 
of  gravity  and  bring  about  a  turn. 

There  remains  a  third  and  last  means  of  making  an 
aeroplane  perform  a  turn,  and  this  requires  no  keel  surface. 
This  consists  in  causing  the  aeroplane  to  assume  a  permanent 
lateral  tilt. 

The  pressure  exerted  on  the  plane  (which  is  roughly 
equal  to  the  weight  of  the  machine)  is  tilted  with  the  aero- 
plane and  has  a  component  p  (fig.  79)  which  assumes  the 
part  of  centripetal  force,  and  makes  the  machine  turn. 


FIG.  78.— Plan. 


STABILITY  IN  STILL  AIR 


177 


The  machine  can  be  tilted  in  various  ways — for  instance, 
by  overloading  one  of  the  wings.  But  the  more  usual 
method  is  that  of  the  warp,  which  has  already  been  referred 
to  as  the  pilot's  means  of  maintaining  lateral  balance. 

By  increasing  the  incidence,  or  its  equivalent  the  lift,  of 
one  wing-tip  and  decreasing  that  of  the  other,  the  former 
wing  is  raised  and  the  latter  lowered,  so  that  the  machine 
is  tilted  in  the  manner  required  to  make  a  turn. 

But  in  warping,  the  wing  with  increased  lift  also  has 
an  increased  drag  or  head-resistance,  while  the  reverse 
takes  place  with  the  other  wing. 

This  secondary  effect 
is  analogous  with  that  of 
the  air  brake  just  con- 
sidered and  is  exerted  in 
the  opposite  way  to  that 
required  to  perform  the 
turn.  It  is  usually  smaller 
than  the  main  effect  of  the 
warp,  but  still  interferes 
with  its  efficacity.  On 
the  other  hand,  in  some 
aeroplanes  it  may  gain  FIG.  79.— Front  elevation, 

the  upper  hand,  as  in  the  noteworthy  case  of  the  Wright 
machines. 

In  order  to  overcome  this  defect,  the  brothers  Wright 
produced,  through  the  means  of  the  rudder  (which  played 
no  other  part),  a  couple  opposed  to  the  braking  effect, 
which  left  its  entire  efficiency  to  the  differential  pressure 
variation  exerted  on  the  wings  by  the  action  of  the  warp. 
Further,  the  warp  and  rudder  could  be  so  interconnected 
as  to  act  simultaneously  by  the  movement  of  a  single 
lever  (this  constituted  the  main  principle  of  the  Wright 
patents). 

This  detrimental  secondary  effect  could,  it  would  appear, 
be  easily  overcome  by  using  a  plane  with  wing-tips  uptilted 
in  the  rear  as  at  BC  in  fig.  80. 

12 


Centripetal  Force. 


178  FLIGHT  WITHOUT  FORMULA 

By  depressing  the  trailing  edge  BC  of  the  wings,  which 
are  purposely  made  flexible,  the  lift  is  increased  and  the 
drag  diminished  at  the  wing-tip.  By  turning  up  the  trailing 
edge  the  lift  is  decreased  and  the  drag  increased.  Both 
effects  therefore  combine  to  assist  in  making  the  turn 
instead  of  impeding  it.  Instead,  finally,  of  adopting  this 
particular  warping  method,  the  same  result  could  be  obtained 
by  using  negative-angle  ailerons. 

It  should  be  noted — and  the  fact  is  of  importance  both 
so  far  as  turning  and  lateral  balance  are  concerned — that 
the  effect  of  the  warp  is  definitely  limited.  It  is  known 
that  beyond  a  certain  incidence  (usually  in  the  neighbour- 
hood of  15°  to  20°)  the  lift  of  a  plane  diminishes  while  the 
drag  increases  rapidly. 

If  the  warp  is  therefore  used  to  an  exaggerated  extent, 
the  detrimental  secondary  effect  referred  to  above  comes 

into  play,  with  the  result 

» """'""'-— -^.^^^  .,  that  its  effect  is  the  reverse 
•"•  -Q  G  of  the  usual  one.  This  may 

prove  a  source  of   danger, 
FIG.  80. -Profile.  and    jt    might    be    weU    ^ 

certain  machines,  if  not  to  limit  the  warp  absolutely,  at 
any  rate  to  provide  some  means  of  warning  the  pilot  that 
he  is  approaching  the  danger-point. 

Since  the  rudder  sets  up  a  couple  tending  to  counteract 
this  secondary  effect,  it  should  be  resorted  to  in  case  an 
undue  degree  of  warp  causes  a  reverse  action  to  the  one 
intended. 

The  banking  of  the  planes  which,  as  already  seen, 
may  provoke  a  turn,  always  results  from  it ;  for,  as  the 
aeroplane  swings  round,  the  outer  wing  travels  faster  than 
the  inner  wing,  so  that  the  pressure  on  the  one  differs 
from  that  on  the  other,  with  the  result  that  the  outer  one 
is  raised. 

Therefore,  if  the  centripetal  force  which  causes  the 
turn  does  not  originate  from  the  intentional  banking  of 
the  planes,  this  banking  which  results  from  the  turning 


STABILITY   IN  STILL  AIR  179 

movement  produces  the  necessary  force  to  balance  the 
centrifugal  force  set  up  by  the  circular  motion  of  the 
machine. 

It  follows  that  the  amount  of  the  bank  during  a  turn 
depends  on  those  factors  which  determine  the  amount  of 
centrifugal  force.  Hence,  the  bank  is  steeper  the  faster  the 
flying  speed  (being  proportional  to  the  square  of  the  speed), 
and  the  sharper  the  turn.  It  may  therefore  be  dangerous 
to  turn  too  sharply  at  high  speeds. 

Equilibrium  between  centripetal  and  centrifugal  force  is 
important  simply  in  so  far  as  it  concerns  the  movement  of 
the  aeroplane  along  its  curved  path,  or,  in  other  words,  the 
movement  of  its  centre  of  gravity.  But,  in  addition,  the 
machine  itself  should  be  in  equilibrium  about  its  centre  of 
gravity — that  is,  the  couples  exerted  upon  it  by  the  air  in 
its  dissymmetrical  position  during  the  turn  must  exactly 
balance  one  another. 

This  position  of  equilibrium  during  a  turn  evidently 
depends  on  various  factors,  among  which  are  the  means 
whereby  the  turn  has  been  produced  and  the  distribution 
of  the  masses  of  the  machine. 

For  instance,  if  the  turn  is  caused  by  banking  it  might 
be  thought  that  so  long  as  the  cause  remained,  the  bank 
would  continue  to  grow  more  and  more  steep.  But  usually 
this  is  not  the  case,  for  if  the  aeroplane  possesses  any 
natural  stability,  the  bank  will  itself  set  up  a  righting 
couple  balancing  the  couple  which  produced  the  bank. 

The  value  of  this  righting  couple  depends,  of  course,  on 
the  shape  of  the  aeroplane  and  especially  on  the  position 
of  its  rolling  axis.  If  the  machine  has  little  natural 
stability,  the  pilot  may  have  to  use  his  controls  in  order  to 
limit  the  bank,  as  otherwise  the  machine  would  bank  ever 
more  steeply  and  the  turn  become  ever  sharper  until  the 
aeroplane  fell.* 

*  Pilots  have  often  mentioned  an  impression  of  being  drawn  towards 
the  centre  when  turning  sharply. 


180  FLIGHT  WITHOUT   FORMULA 

As  a  rule,  the  warp  is  not  used  for  producing  a  turn,  for 
the  majority  of  machines  possess  sufficient  keel  surface  to 
answer  the  rudder  perfectly. 

Often  the  rudder  aids  the  warp  in  maintaining  lateral 
balance  :  for  instance,  by  turning  to  the  left  a  downward  tilt 
of  the  right  wing  may  be  overcome. 

Possibly  in  future  the  warp  will  become  even  less  im- 
portant, so  that  this  device,  which  is  generally  thought 
to  have  been  imitated  from  birds  (which  have  no  vertical 
rudder),  may  eventually  vanish  altogether.*  The  Paulhan- 
Tatin  "  Torpille,"  referred  to  in  previous  chapters,  had  no 
warp,  neither  had  the  old  Voisin  biplane,  one  of  the  first 
aeroplanes  that  ever  flew.  This  was  due  to  the  fact  that 
in  both  cases  the  keel  surface  (a  pronounced  curved  dihedral 
in  the  "  Torpille,"  and  curtains  in  the  Voisin)  was  sufficient 
to  render  the  rudder  highly  effective. 

It  is  to  be  noted  that,  whatever  the  cause  of  the  turn,  the 
dissymmetrical  attitude  adopted  as  a  result  by  the  aeroplane 
simultaneously  causes  the  drag  to  increase  while  the  lift 
decreases  owing  to  the  bank.  At  the  same  time,  the  angle 
of  incidence  alters,  since  any  alteration  in  lateral  balance 
brings  about  an  alteration  in  longitudinal  balance,  for  rolling 
produces  pitching. 

For  these  reasons  an  aeroplane  descends  during  a  turn. 

The  pilot  feels  that  he  is  losing  air-speed  and  puts  the 
elevator  down.  Theory,  on  the  other  hand,  would  appear  to 
teach  that  he  ought  to  climb.  But,  as  already  stated,  this 
apparent  divergence  is  due  to  the  fact  that  theory  applies 
chiefly  to  a  machine  in  normal  flight.  When  an  aeroplane 
changes  its  flight  and  passes  from  one  position  to  another, 
effects  of  inertia  may  arise  during  the  transition  stage 
which  may  vitiate  purely  theoretical  conclusions,  and  in 

*  Although  the  author  has  carefully  studied  the  flight  of  large  soaring 
and  gliding  birds  in  a  wind,  he  has  never  found  them  to  warp  their  wing- 
tips  to  a  perceptible  extent  to  obtain  lateral  balance,  while,  on  the  other 
hand,  probably  for  this  very  purpose,  they  continually  twist  their  tails 
to  right  and  left. 


STABILITY   IN  STILL  AIR  181 

such  a  case  theory  must  give  way  to  practice.  In  any 
event,  practice  need  not  necessarily  remain  the  same  should 
the  shape  of  the  aeroplane  undergo  considerable  alterations 
and,  more  especially,  if  in  future  the  lift  coefficient  becomes 
very  small.* 

In  conclusion,  something  remains  to  be  said  of  the 
gyroscopic  effect  of  the  propeller.  Any  body  turning  about 
a  symmetrical  axis  tends,  for  reasons  of  inertia,  to  preserve 
its  original  movement  of  rotation. 

The  direction  of  the  axis  about  which  turning  takes 
place  remains  fixed  in  space,  and,  in  order  to  alter  it,  a  force 
must  be  applied  to  it,  which  must  be  the  greater  the  higher 
the  speed  of  rotation,  the  greater  the  movement  of  inertia, 
and  the  sharper  the  effort  to  alter  it. 

But  now  arises  the  curious  fact  that  if  it  is  sought  to 
move  the  axis  in  a  given  direction,  it  will  actually  move  in 
a  direction  at  right  angles  to  this.  This  characteristic  of 
rotating  bodies  may  be  observed  in  the  case  of  gyroscopic 
tops,  which  only  remain  in  equilibrium  and  only  adopt  a 
slow  conical  motion  when  their  axis  becomes  inclined 
towards  the  end  of  their  spinning,  for  this  very  reason. 

Now  a  propeller  which  has  a  high  moment  of  inertia, 
especially  if  of  large  diameter,  and  turning  at  a  great  speed, 
constitutes  a  powerful  gyroscope  (which  is  further  increased 
if  the  motor  is  of  the  rotary  type). 

It  follows  that  any  sudden  action  tending  to  modify  the 
direction  of  flight  results  in  a  movement  at  right  angles  to 
that  desired.  Thus,  a  sudden  swerve  to  one  side  may  pro- 

*  It  may  be  added  that  at  very  high  speeds  an  aeroplane  during  a 
sharp  turn  actually  rises  instead  of  coming  down,  but  this  is  due  to 
quite  a  different  cause.  At  the  moment  of  turning,  when  already  banked 
and  the  rudder  is  brought  into  play,  the  machine  for  a  fraction  of  time, 
owing  to  its  inertia,  slides  outward  and  upward  on  its  planes.  This 
effect  was  particularly  noticeable  during  the  Gordon-Bennett  race  in 
1913,  when,  long  before  the  turning-point  was  reached,  the  aeroplanes 
were  gradually  banked  over,  until  at  the  last  moment  a  sudden  move- 
ment of  the  rudder  bar  sent  them  skimming  round,  the  while  shooting 
sharply  upward  and  outward. — TRANSLATOR. 


182  FLIGHT  WITHOUT  FORMULA 

duce  a  tendency  either  to  dive  or  to  stall,  according  to  which 
side  the  swerve  is  made  and  to  the  direction  of  rotation  of 
the  propeller. 

Accidents  have  sometimes  been  ascribed  to  this  gyroscopic 
effect,  but  its  importance  would  appear  to  have  been  greatly 
exaggerated,  and  so  long  as  the  controls  are  not  moved 
very  sharply,  it  remains  almost  inappreciable. 


CHAPTER  X 
THE  EFFECT  OF  WIND  ON  AEROPLANES 

EVERY  previous  chapter  related  to  the  flight  of  an  aero- 
plane in  perfectly  still  air.  To  round  off  our  treatise,  the 
behaviour  of  the  aeroplane  must  be  examined  in  disturbed 
air — in  other  words,  we  now  have  to  deal  with  the  effect  of 
wind  on  an  aeroplane. 

The  atmosphere  is  never  absolutely  at  rest ;  there  is 
always  a  certain  amount  of  wind.  The  two  ever-present 
characteristic  features  of  a  wind  are  its  direction  and  its 
speed.  No  wind  is  ever  regular.  Both  its  velocity  and  its 
direction  constantly  vary  and,  save  in  a  hurricane,  these 
variations  do  not  depart  from  the  mean  beyond  certain 
limits.  Hence,  the  wind  as  it  exists  in  Nature  may  be 
regarded  as  a  normal  wind,  as  if  it  had  a  mean  speed  and 
direction,  with  variations  therefrom. 

These  variations  may  be  in  themselves  irregular  or 
regular  up  to  a  point.  Near  the  ground  the  wind  follows 
the  contour  of  the  earth,  encounters  obstacles,  and  flows 
past  them  in  eddies  ;  hence  it  is  perforce  irregular,  like  the 
flow  of  a  stream  along  the  banks. 

Eddies  are  formed  in  the  air,  as  in  water  :  valleys,  forests, 
damp  meadows  where  humidity  is  present — all  these 
produce  in  the  air  that  lies  above  them  descending  currents, 
sometimes  called  "  holes  in  the  air  "  ;  while  hills  and  bare 
ground  radiating  the  sun's  heat  produce  rising  currents 
of  air. 

These  effects  are  only  felt  up  to  a  certain  height  in  the 
atmosphere,  and  the  higher  one  flies  the  more  regular 


184  FLIGHT  WITHOUT  FORMULA 

becomes  the  wind.  In  the  upper  reaches  the  wind  seems 
to  pulsate  and  to  undulate  in  waves  comparable  to  the 
waves  of  the  sea. 

The  regular  mean  wind  which  reigns  there  may  there- 
fore be  considered  as  possessing  atmospheric  pulsations, 
propagated  at  a  speed  differing  from  the  speed  of  the  wind 
itself,  comparable  to  the  ripples  produced  by  throwing  a 
stone  in  flowing  water — ripples  which  move  at  a  speed 
differing  from  that  of  the  current  itself. 

This  comparison  of  a  regular  wind  with  a  flowing  stream 
enables  the  effect  of  such  a  wind  on  an  aeroplane  to  be 
studied  in  a  very  simple  manner. 

For  the  last  time  we  will  refer  to  that  elementary  principle 
of  mechanics  applicable  to  any  body  moving  through  a 
medium  which  itself  is  in  motion — the  principle  of  the 
composition  of  speeds. 

A  speed,  just  as  a  force,  may  be  represented  by  an  arrow 
of  a  length  proportional  to  the  speed  and  pointing  in  the 
direction  of  movement. 

For  example,  let  us  suppose  that  a  boat  is  moving 
through  calm  water  at  a  speed  represented  by  the  arrow 
OA  (fig.  81). 

Now,  if  instead  of  being  still,  the  water  were  flowing  at 
a  speed  represented  by  the  arrow  OB,  the  ship,  although 
still  heading  in  the  same  direction,  would  have  a  real  speed 
and  direction  represented  by  the  arrow  00.  This  speed  is 
the  resultant  of  the  speeds  OA  and  OB,  and  this  composition 
of  speeds,  it  will  be  seen,  is  simply  effected  by  drawing  the 
parallelogram. 

The  ship  will  appear  still  to  be  following  the  course  OA, 
which  will  be  its  apparent  course,  while  in  fact  following 
the  real  course  00. 

Instead  of  a  ship  through  flowing  water,  let  us  now  take 
the  case  of  an  airship  or  aeroplane  moving  through  a  current 
of  air  or  regular  wind.  Such  a  craft,  while  driven  for- 
ward through  the  air  by  its  own  motive  power  at  the  speed 
it  would  attain  if  the  air  were  perfectly  calm,  is  at  the 


THE   EFFECT   OF  WIND   ON  AEROPLANES         185 

same  time  drawn  along  by  the  wind  together  with  'the 
surrounding  air,  of  which  it  forms,  as  it  were,  a  part,  and 
this  without  the  pilot  being  able  to  perceive  this  motion, 
unless  he  looks  at  some  fixed  landmark  on  the  ground. 

An  aeroplane  may  be  likened  to  a  fly  in  a  railway  carriage, 
which  is  unable  to  perceive,  and  remains  unaffected  by, 
the  speed  at  which  the  train  is  moving. 

In  a  free  spherical  balloon  drifting  before  a  regular  wind 
not  a  breath  of  air  is  perceptible.  On  board  an  aeroplane 


B 


FIG.  81. 

or  airship  only  the  relative  wind  is  felt  which  is  created  by 
the  speed  of  flight,  no  matter  whether  in  still  air  or  in  wind. 

In  a  side-wind,  in  order  to  attain  to  a  given  spot,  a  pilot 
does  not  steer  straight  for  his  objective,  but  allows  for  the 
drift,  like  a  boatman  crossing  a  swift-flowing  river. 

When  the  direction  of  the  wind  coincides  with  the  path 
of  flight  the  speeds  are  either  added  to  or  subtracted  from 
one  another  ;  for  instance,  an  aeroplane  with  a  flying  speed 
of  80  km.  per  hour  in  a  calm  will  only  have  a  real  speed  of 
50  km.  per  hour  against  a  30-km.  per  hour  wind,  but  will 
attain  110  km.  per  hour  when  flying  before  it. 

In  order  to  be  dirigible,  an  aircraft  must  have  a  speed 


186  FLIGHT  WITHOUT   FORMULA 

greater  than  that  of  the  wind.  In  practice  an  aeroplane 
virtually  never  flies  in  a  wind  of  greater  velocity  than  its 
own  flying  speed,  and  hence  is  always  dirigible. 

The  wind  further  affects  the  gliding  path  of  an  aeroplane. 
For  example,  if  an  aeroplane  with  a  normal  gliding  path 
OA  in  a  calm  (fig.  82)  comes  down  against  the  wind,  its 
real  gliding  path  will  be  OC15  which  is  steeper  than  OA, 
while  with  the  wind  behind  it  will  be  flatter,  as  shown  by 
OC2.  The  arrows  OC^  and  OC2  represent  the  resultant 
speeds  of  the  gliding  speed  OA  in  calm  air  and  of  the  speeds 
of  the  wind  OBX  and  OB2. 

But  in  all  these  different  gliding  paths,  the  gliding  angle 


of  the  aeroplane  remains  the  same,  since  the  apparent  gliding 
path  relatively  to  the  wind  always  remains  the  same. 

If  the  speed  of  the  wind  is  equal  to  that  of  the  aeroplane, 
the  machine,  still  preserving  its  normal  gliding  angle, 
would  come  down  vertically  and  would  alight  gently  on 
the  earth  without  rolling  forward. 

Birds  often  soar  in  this  manner  without  any  perceptible 
forward  movement,  but,  apart  perhaps  from  the  brothers 
Wright  during  the  course  of  their  gliding  experiments  in 
1911,  no  aeroplane  pilot  would  appear  to  have  attempted 
the  feat  hitherto.* 

*  This  statement  is  no  longer  correct.  Many  pilots  have  undoubtedly 
flown  in  winds  equal  and  even  superior  to  their  own  flying  speed. 
Moreover,  this  vertical  descent  is  sometimes  made  intentionally  with 
such  machines  as  the  Maurice  Farman,  the  engine  being  stopped  and 
the  aeroplane  being  purposely  stalled  until  forward  motion  appears 
to  cease  and  the  machine  seems  to  float  motionless  in  the  air. — 
TBANSLATOB. 


THE  EFFECT  OF  WIND  ON  AEROPLANES         187 

A  regular  wind  may  be  a  rising  current.  In  this  case, 
if  sufficiently  strong,  it  may  render  the  gliding  path  hori- 
zontal. Thus,  if  an  aeroplane  in  calm  air  glides  at  a  speed 
OA  (fig.  83),  which  has  a  horizontal  component  equal 
to  15  m.  per  second,  and  follows  a  descending  path  of  1 
in  6,  a  regular  ascending  current  with  a  speed  OBX  or  OB2, 
with  a  vertical  component  equal  to  2-5  m.  per  sec.,  would 
enable  an  aeroplane  to  glide  horizontally. 

The  existence  of  such  ascending  currents  is  sometimes 
taken  in  order  to  explain  the  soaring  flight  practised  by 
certain  species  of  large  birds  over  the  great  spaces  of  the 
ocean  or  the  desert.  But  it  is  difficult  to  accept  this  as 
the  only  explanation  of  this  wonderful  mode  of  flight, 


which  often  extends  for  hours  at  a  time,  and  would  pre- 
suppose the  permanency  of  such  rising  currents.  Another 
explanation  will  be  given  hereafter. 

We  may  now  examine  the  effects  on  an  aeroplane  of 
irregularities  in  the  wind. 

Any  disturbance  in  the  air  may  at  any  time  be  character- 
ised by  the  modification  in  speed  and  direction  of  the  wind  ; 
such  modifications  could  be  measured  by  means  of  a  very 
sensitive  anemometer  mounted  on  a  universal  joint. 

The  first  effect  of  a  disturbance  is  to  tend  to  impart  its 
own  momentary  speed  and  direction  to  anything  borne 
by  the  air  which  it  affects.  Very  light  objects,  feathers, 
tissue-paper,  etc.,  immediately  yield  to  a  gust. 

If  an  aeroplane  were  devoid  of  mass,  and  therefore  of 
inertia,  it  would  behave  in  the  same  way  ;  it  would  instantly 
assume  the  new  speed  and  direction  of  the  wind  and  would 


188  FLIGHT  WITHOUT   FORMULA 

promptly  obey  its  every  whim.  In  this  case  the  pilot 
would  be  unable  to  perceive,  except  by  looking  at  the 
ground,  any  gusts  or  their  effect ;  for  him  it  would  be  the 
same  as  though  he  were  flying  in  a  regular  wind. 

But  all  aircraft  possess  considerable  mass,  and  therefore 
do  not  immediately  obey  the  modifications  resulting  from 
a  wind  gust  in  which  they  are  flying.  The  disturbance 
therefore  exerts  upon  it,  during  a  variable  period,  a  certain 
action,  also  variable,  which  can  be  likened  to  that  which 
would  be  experienced  if  the  movements  of  the  aeroplane 
were  restrained.  This  action,  which  may  be  termed  the 
relative  action  of  a  disturbance,  modifies  both  in  speed  and 
in  direction  the  relative  wind  which  the  aeroplane  normally 
encounters,  and  these  modifications  can  be  felt  by  the 
pilot  and  measured  by  an  anemometer. 

For  the  sake  of  simplicity,  let  us  suppose  that  a  wind  of 
a  certain  definite  value  is  quite  instantaneously  succeeded 
by  a  wind  of  another  value,  the  wind  being  regular  in  each 
case.  A  craft  without  mass  would  forthwith  conform  to 
the  new  wind.  The  primary  gust  effect  would  be  complete, 
its  relative  action  would  be  zero. 

For  any  craft  possessing  mass  the  primary  gust  effect 
would  at  first  be  zero  and  the  relative  action  at  a  maximum  ; 
but,  as  the  machine  gradually  yields  to  the  gust,  the  rela- 
tive action  grows  smaller  and  finally  vanishes  altogether 
when  the  aeroplane  has  completely  conformed  to  the  new 
wind.  The  greater  the  inertia  of  the  machine,  the  longer 
will  be  the  transition  period. 

Still  keeping  to  our  hypothesis  of  an  instantaneous 
change  of  condition,  an  anemometer  fixed  in  space  and 
another  carried  on  the  aeroplane  might  for  one  brief  instant 
record  the  same  indications  ;  but  while  those  of  the  fixed 
anemometer  would  be  constant,  the  other  instrument 
would  sooner  or  later,  according  to  the  aeroplane's  inertia, 
return  to  its  original  indications. 

If  it  is  remembered  that  gusts,  even  the  most  violent, 
are  never  perfectly  instantaneous,  it  seems  probable  that 


THE  EFFECT  OF  WIND   ON  AEROPLANES         189 

the  relative  action  of  a  gust  on  an  aeroplane  is  never  so 
intense  as  it  would  be  were  the  machine  fixed  in  space, 
and  that  it  dies  away  the  more  quickly  the  lighter  the 
aeroplane. 

But  the  pilot  of  a  machine  in  flight  does  not  perceive 
this  relative  action  in  the  same  way  that  he  would  if  the 
machine  were  immovable — for  instance,  if  the  aeroplane 
were  struck  by  a  gust  coming  from  the  right  at  right  angles, 
the  pilot  of  a  stationary  aeroplane  would  only  feel  the  gust 
on  his  right  cheek,  while  in  flight  he  would  only  perceive 
the  existence  of  a  gust  by  the  fact  that  the  relative  wind 
was  just  a  little  stronger  on  his  right  cheek  than  on  the 
left.  It  is  simply  a  question  of  the  composition  of 


We  have  distinguished  a  primary  gust  effect  and  a  rela- 
tive effect.  The  results  of  each  may  now  be  examined. 

The  primary  effect  modifies  in  magnitude  and  in  direction 
the  real  speed  of  the  aeroplane,  which  yields  the  more 
slowly  the  greater  its  mass  and  inertia. 

Now,  instead  of  consisting,  as  our  hypothesis  required, 
of  an  instantaneous  succession  of  two  winds  of  different 
value,  a  gust  is  a  more  or  less  gradual  and  wavelike  modi- 
fication of  the  mean  speed  of  the  wind,  lasting  usually  not 
more  than  a  few  seconds. 

Hence,  if  the  aeroplane's  inertia  be  sufficient,  the  cause 
may  cease  before  the  gust  has  exerted  its  primary  effect  on 
the  aeroplane,  the  whole  energies  of  the  gust  being  absorbed 
in  producing  the  relative  effect. 

The  direction  of  flight  and  the  real  speed  of  the  aeroplane, 
provided  it  has  enough  inertia,  may  consequently  be  only 
slightly  altered  by  the  gust  which  would  pass  like  a  wave 
past  a  floating  body.  This  is  why,  whereas  a  toy  balloon 
is  tossed  by  every  little  gust,  a  great  passenger  balloon  sails 
majestically  on  its  way  without  being  affected  in  the 
slightest  degree. 

Why,  therefore,  should  this  not  be  the  case  with  an 
aeroplane  which  has  a  mass  not  differing  widely  from  that 


190  FLIGHT  WITHOUT  FORMULA 

of  a  balloon  ?  The  cause  must  be  sought  for  in  the  relative 
effect  of  the  gust.  This  relative  effect  is  only  slight  in  the 
case  of  a  balloon  which  is  based  on  static  support  according 
to  the  Archimedean  law  ;  but  it  affects  the  very  essence  of 
the  equilibrium  of  an  aeroplane  based  on  the  dynamic 
principle  of  sustentation  by  its  speed  and  incidence. 

Any  variation  in  the  speed  or  direction  of  the  relative 
wind,  therefore,  usually  affects  the  value  of  the  pressures 
on  the  various  planes,  and  consequently  further  affects  its 
attitude  hi  the  air  which  is  determined  by  a  perpetual 
equilibrium. 

The  effects  produced  by  the  relative  action  of  a  gust  may 
be  divided  into  two  classes  :  the  displacement  effect  and  the 
rotary  effect. 

The  displacement  effect  is  that  produced  by  the  relative 
action  of  the  gust  on  the  machine  as  a  whole,  and  seen 
in  the  modification  of  the  path  followed  before  by  the 
centre  of  gravity  and  the  speed  at  which  it  moved  until 
then. 

The  displacement  effect  must  not  be  confused  with  the 
primary  gust  effect  previously  referred  to. 

For  instance,  if  an  aeroplane  in  horizontal  flight  is  struck 
head-on  by  a  horizontal  gust,  the  primary  gust  effect  takes 
the  shape  of  a  reduction  in  the  real  flying  speed,  which 
reduction  is  the  greater  the  smaller  the  inertia  of  the 
machine.  But  this  will  not  alter  the  horizontal  nature  of 
the  flight-path. 

On  the  other  hand,  the  displacement  effect  produced  by 
the  gust  will  result  in  raising  the  whole  machine  which, 
owing  to  its  inertia  and  in  increasing  measure  as  its  inertia 
is  greater,  experiences  an  increase  in  the  speed  of  the 
relative  wind,  with  the  result  that  the  lift  on  the  planes 
also  increases. 

The  rotary  effect  is  that  produced  by  the  relative  action 
of  the  gust  on  the  equilibrium  of  the  aeroplane  about  its 
centre  of  gravity.  This  is  due  to  the  fact  that  the  modi- 
fications in  the  relative  wind  destroy  the  harmony  between 


THE  EFFECT  OF  WIND  ON  AEROPLANES         191 

the  pressures  on  the  various  parts  of  the  aeroplane,  which 
balanced  one  another  and  thus  maintained  the  machine  in 
stable  equilibrium. 

Certain  rotary  effects  are  due  to  the  fact  that  no  gust  is 
instantaneous,  but  always  moves  at  a  speed  which,  however 
great,  is  still  limited.  A  gust  may  therefore  first  strike 
one  part  of  the  aeroplane  and  produce  a  first  rupture  of 
equilibrium  ;  then,  continuing,  it  may  strike  the  opposite 
side  which  may  already  have  been  shifted  out  of  position, 
and  affect  this  in  turn  either  in  the  sense  of  restoring  equili- 
brium or  the  reverse. 

The  displacement  and  rotary  effects  due  to  a  gust  will 
now  be  successively  examined,  beginning  with  those  which 
affect  equilibrium  of  sustentation  and  longitudinal  equili- 
brium, these  being  closely  interconnected.  For  the  time 
being,  therefore,  we  will  only  deal  with  gusts  moving  in 
the  plane  of  symmetry  of  the  aeroplane — that  is,  with 
straight  gusts,  which  affect  the  speed  and  the  angle  at 
which  the  relative  wind  meets  the  planes. 

First,  let  us  examine  the  displacement  effect.  It  will 
result  in  a  modification  in  the  lift  of  the  planes.  The  lift, 
normally  equal  to  the  weight  of  the  machine,  has  for  its 
value  the  lift  coefficient  of  the  planes  multiplied  by  their 
area  and  the  square  of  the  speed.  If  the  lift  coefficient 
remains  constant,  and  the  relative  wind  increases  as  a 
result  of  the  gust,  the  lift  of  the  planes  increases  ;  if  the 
speed  of  the  wind  diminishes,  so  does  the  lift. 

It  is  readily  seen  that  in  the  case  of  small  variations  in 
the  speed,  the  variations  in  the  lift  are  increasingly  large, 
the  greater  the  weight  of  the  machine  and  the  lower  its 
normal  flying  speed.  These  variations  depend  neither  on 
the  wing  area  nor  on  the  value  of  the  lift  coefficient. 

For  instance,  if  an  aeroplane  weighing  400  kg.  and  flying 
at  20  m.  per  second  or  72  km.  per  hour,  experienced,  as  the 
result  of  a  gust  from  the  rear,  a  decrease  in  the  relative 
speed  of  2  m.  per  second,  the  lift  will  decrease  by  76  kg.  If 
it  weighed  600  kg.  instead  of  400,  its  normal  flying  speed 


192  FLIGHT  WITHOUT  FORMULA 

being  still  20  m.  per  second,  the  same  decrease  in  the  speed 

600 
would  bring  about  a  reduction  in  the  lift  of  76  x =  114  kg. 

proportional  to  the  weight. 

If,  weighing  400  kg.,  its  normal  speed  were  30  m.  per 
second  instead  of  20,  the  same  decrease  of  2  m.  per  second  in 
the  speed  would  produce  a  reduction  in  the  lift  of  only 
52  kg.  instead  of  76  as  before. 

These  results  remain  true  irrespectively  of  the  plane 
area  and  the  lift  coefficient.* 

Now,  suppose  that,  the  speed  of  the  relative  wind  re- 
maining constant,  the  angle  at  which  it  meets  the  aero- 
plane changes  ;  the  value  of  the  angle  of  incidence  of  the 
planes  is  thereby  modified  and  with  it  the  lift  coefficient. 
The  lift  therefore  also  varies  in  this  case,  and  a  simple  cal- 
culation shows  that  these  variations  are  the  greater  the 
greater  the  weight  and  the  smaller  the  lift  coefficient. 

For  example,  a  machine  weighing  400  kg.  and  possessing 
a  lift  coefficient  of  0-05,  will,  if  this  lift  coefficient  is  re- 
duced by  0-005 — which  is  equivalent  to  lessening  the 
angle  of  incidence  by  one  degree — experience  a  loss  of  lift  of 
about  40  kg.  If  the  weight  were  600  kg.,  the  loss  of  lift 
would  be  60  kg. 

If  it  weighed  400  kg.  and  the  normal  lift  coefficient  were 
0-025  instead  of  0-05,  the  loss  of  lift  resulting  from  a  re- 

*  The  method  of  calculation  is  quite  simple. 

Example.— it  the  weight  is  400  kg.  and  the  speed  20  m.  per  second — 
the  square  of  the  latter  being  400, — the  product  of  the  plane  area  and 
the  lift  coefficient  remains  1  whether  the  area  be  20  sq.  m.  and  the  lift 
coefficient  0'05,  or  the  area  25  sq.  m.  and  the  lift  coefficient  0'04,  or 
whatever  be  the  combination.  This  being  so,  if  the  speed  decreases  to 
18  m.  per  second,  the  square  of  which  is  324,  it  is  clear  that  the  lift  is 
reduced  from  400  to  324  kg.,-  and  consequently  there  is  a  reduction  in 
the  lift  of  76  kg.  as  stated. 

If  the  normal  speed  were  30  m.  per  second,  the  product  of  the  area  and 

the  lift  coefficient  would  be  OArk  =  0'444;    the  decrease  in  the  speed  to 
900 

28  m.  per  second  (the  square  of  which  is  784)  would  give  the  lift  a  value 
of  0-444  x  784  =  348  kg.     The  loss  of  lif t,  therefore,  would  be  only  52  kg. 


THE  EFFECT  OF  WIND  ON  AEROPLANES         193 

duction  of  the  lift  coefficient  by  0-005  would  be  80  kg. 
instead  of  40  kg. 

These  results  hold  good  irrespectively  of  the  area  and 
the  speed. 

Finally,  if  both  the  speed  and  the  angle  of  wind  vary 
at  one  and  the  same  time,  both  results  are  added  to  one 
another. 

From  this  it  may  be  deduced  that  for  an  aeroplane  to 
experience  the  least  possible  loss  of  lift  owing  to  an  atmo- 
spheric disturbance,  it  should  be  light,  fly  at  a  high  speed, 
and  possess  a  big  lift  coefficient. 

These  two  latter  conditions  are  not  so  contradictory  as 
might  be  supposed  ;  and  if  considered  together,  further 
confirm  the  view  expressed  in  Chapter  III.,  as  the  result 
of  totally  different  considerations,  that  an  increase  in 
the  speed  of  aeroplanes  should  be  sought  for  rather  in 
the  reduction  of  their  area  than  of  their  lift  coefficient. 
Apart  from  the  question  of  weight,  which  will  be  dealt 
with  further  on,  this  may  be  one  of  the  reasons  why,  as 
a  general  rule,  monoplanes  behave  better  in  a  wind  than 
biplanes.* 

The  relative  action  of  a  gust  moving  in  the  plane  of 
symmetry  of  an  aeroplane,  results,  as  we  have  just  seen, 
in  a  modification  of  the  lift  of  the  planes.  This  modifica- 
tion produces  the  displacement  effect. 

Suppose,  for  instance,  that  an  aeroplane  flying  hori- 
zontally at  a  definite  speed  suddenly  were  to  lose  the 
whole  of  its  lift ;  it  would  become  comparable  to  a 
projectile  launched  horizontally,  and,  while  retaining  a 
certain  forward  speed,  would  fall.  If  the  air  in  no  way 
resisted  its  fall,  this  would  take  place  at  the  rate  of  any 
body  falling  freely  in  a  vacuum  ;  that  is,  after  one  second 
it  would  have  fallen  about  5  m.,  at  the  end  of  2  seconds 
20  m.,  etc. 

Its  trajectory  would  be  a  curve  bending  ever  more  steeply 

*  Responsibility  for  this  statement,  in  which  I  do  not  concur,  rests 
entirely  in  the  author. — TRANSLATOR. 

13 


194  FLIGHT  WITHOUT  FORMULA 

towards  the  earth.  Naturally  this  curve  would  be  flatter 
the  higher  the  flying  speed  of  the  aeroplane. 

Actually  the  air  opposes,  in  the  vertical  sense,  con- 
siderable resistance  to  the  fall  of  a  machine  provided  with 
planes,  so  that  an  aeroplane  would  not  fall  so  fast  as  men- 
tioned above. 

Moreover,  as  a  gust  is  not  instantaneous  and  only  lasts 
a  short  while,  the  flight-path  straightens  out  again  fairl}- 
quickly  as  soon  as  the  lift  returns,  and  this  the  more  quickly 
the  smaller  the  mass  of  the  aeroplane. 

This  modification  of  the  flight-path  constitutes  the  dis- 
placement effect  due  to  the  gust. 

The  pilot  only  feels,  in  the  case  under  consideration,  the 
sensation  of  a  vertical  fall  though  actually  this  move- 
ment is  progressive.  According  to  pilots'  accounts  these 
vertical  falls  are  considerable,  from  which  one  judges  that 
either  the  duration  of  the  gusts  is  fairly  long  or  that  the 
planes  may,  under  given  conditions,  lose  more  than  their 
total  lift.* 

This  displacement  effect  is  devoid  of  danger,  when  it  is 
not  excessive,  if  it  is  in  the  sense  of  raising  the  machine. 
When  it  is  considerable,  the  pilot  corrects  it  by  reducing 
his  incidence  by  means  of  the  elevator. 

On  the  other  hand,  if  it  tends  to  make  the  aeroplane 
fall,  it  may  be  dangerous  if  occurring  near  the  ground  ;  it 
is  here,  moreover,  that  there  always  exists  a  source  of 
danger,  for  eddies  are  more  frequent  than  higher  up  in 
the  atmosphere. 

Besides,  pilots  always  fear  a  loss  of  lift  or,  what  is  often 
the  equivalent,  a  loss  of  air  speed,  for,  apart  altogether 

*  The  discovery  made  during  the  inquiry  into  certain  accidents  that 
the  upper  stay-wires  of  monoplanes  have  broken  in  the  air,  would  at  first 
sight  appear  to  confirm  the  view  that  their  wings  may  at  times  be  struck 
by  the  wind  on  their  upper  surface. 

Nevertheless  this  view  should  be  treated  with  caution,  for  the  break- 
age of  the  overhead  stay-wires  could  be  attributed  equally  well  to  the 
effects  of  inertia  produced  when,  at  the  end  of  a  dive,  the  pilot  flattens 
out  too  abruptly. 


THE   EFFECT   OF  WIND   ON  AEROPLANES         195 

from  the  ensuing  fall,  the  aeroplane  then  flies  in  a  con- 
dition where  the  ordinary  laws  normally  determining  the 
equilibrium  and  stability  of  an  aeroplane  no  longer  apply. 
This  stability  may  become  most  precarious,  and  this  is 
apparent  to  the  pilot  by  the  fact  that  the  controls  no  longer 
respond.  The  only  remedy  is  to  regain  air  speed,  which 
is  effected  by  diving.* 

Usually,  therefore,  the  correction  of  displacement  effects 
due  to  gusts  consists  in  diving.  Nevertheless,  if  a  head 
gust  slanting  downward  forced  the  aeroplane  down,  the 
pilot  would  naturally  have  to  elevate.  In  this  case  there 
would  be  no  loss  of  air  speed,  and  the  loss  of  lift  would  be 
due  to  the  reduction  of  the  relative  incidence. 

Let  us  now  turn  to  the  rotary  effects  of  atmospheric 
disturbances  acting  in  the  plane  of  symmetry  of  the  aero- 
plane. A  machine  with  a  fixed  elevator  can  only  fly  at  a 
single  angle  of  incidence.  Therefore,  if  the  relative  wind 
which  normally  strikes  an  aeroplane  changes  its  inclination 
by  reason  of  a  gust,  the  machine  will  of  its  own  accord 
seek  to  resume,  relatively  to  the  new  direction  of  the  re- 
lative wind,  the  only  angle  of  incidence  at  which  it  flies 
in  longitudinal  equilibrium. 

The  same  thing  will  happen  if  the  displacement  effect 
already  referred  to  should  modify  the  trajectory  of  the 
centre  of  gravity  ;  the  latter  will  always  tend  to  adhere  to 
its  flight-path. 

The  rotary  effect  resulting  will  take  place  all  the  quicker, 
and  will  die  away  all  the  more  rapidly,  as  the  longitudinal 
moment  of  inertia  of  the  machine  is  smaller.  Thus,  in 
the  case,  already  considered,  of  an  aeroplane  losing  air  speed 
and  falling,  it  may  do  this  bodily,  without  any  appreciable 
dive,  if  its  moment  of  inertia  is  big  ;  whereas,  if  bow  and 
tail  are  lightly  loaded,  it  yields  to  the  gust  and  dives  in  a 
more  or  less  pronounced  fashion. 

*  Air-speed  indicators,  consisting  of  some  form  of  delicate  anemo- 
meter, constantly  record  the  relative  speed  and  enable  the  pilot  to 
operate  his  controls  in  good  time. 


196  PLIGHT  WITHOUT  FORMULA 

This  latter  quality  would  appear  to  be  the  better  one 
of  the  two,  since,  in  the  case  under  consideration,  the  pilot 
always  has  to  dive  to  re-establish  equilibrium.  Hence,  in 
this  respect,  an  aeroplane  should  have  as  small  a  longi- 
tudinal moment  of  inertia  as  possible. 

Another  rotary  effect  may  arise  through  a  cause  already 
referred  to — if  the  disturbance  does  not  reach  the  main  plane 
and  the  tail  simultaneously.  In  this  case  there  is  exerted 
on  the  first  surface  struck,  if  considered  independently  from 
the  rest,  a  modification  in  the  magnitude  and  the  position 
of  the  pressure,  which  in  turn  brings  about  a  modification 
in  the  couple  which  it  normally  exerted  about  the  centre 
of  gravity. 

If  the  couple  due  to  the  main  plane  takes  the  upper  hand, 
the  machine  tends  to  stall ;  if  the  reverse  takes  place,  it 
tends  to  dive.  A  stalling  aeroplane  always  loses  some  of 
its  air  speed  ;  moreover,  if  the  gust  strikes  it  head-on  the 
machine  is  still  further  exposed,  being  stalled,  to  its  dis- 
turbing effect.  As  has  already  been  shown,  the  correcting 
movement  for  the  majority  of  cases  of  displacement  effect 
consists  not  hi  stalling  but  in  diving. 

For  these  various  reasons,  and  excepting  always  the  case 
of  a  downward  current  forcing  the  machine  down,  the 
rotary  effect  of  a  gust  should  cause  the  aeroplane  to  dive 
of  its  own  accord. 

In  this  respect,  the  manner  in  which  fore-and-aft  balance 
is  maintained  is  most  important.  If  the  tail  is  a  lifting  tail 
(see  fig.  36,  Chapter  VI.),  the  pressure  normally  exerted  on 
the  main  plane  passes  in  front  of  the  centre  of  gravity. 
This  being  so,  the  action  of  a  gust  striking  the  main  plane 
first,  would  produce  as  its  rotary  effect  a  stalling  move- 
ment, except  only  if  the  gust  had  a  pronounced  downward 
tendency,  in  which  case  the  stalling  movement  is  the 
right  one. 

A  gust  from  the  rear,  striking  the  tail  first,  decreases  its 
lift  and  also  provokes  stalling.  In  every  case,  therefore, 
the  rotary  effect  of  the  gust  is  detrimental  to  stability. 


THE  EFFECT  OF  WIND  ON  AEROPLANES         197 

A  lifting  tail  which,  as  seen  in  Chapter  VI.,  is  the  most 
defective  in  regard  to  lateral  stability  in  still  air,  is  con- 
sequently equally  unfavourable  in  disturbed  air. 

On  the  other  hand,  if  the  tail  is  normally  placed  at  a 
negative  angle  (see  fig.  42,  Chapter  VI.),  the  normal  pressure 
on  the  main  plane  passes  behind  the  centre  of  gravity. 
The  action  of  a  head  gust,  unless  pointing  downward  to  a 
considerable  extent,  in  this  case  produces  as  its  rotary  effect 
a  diving  movement,  and  the  same  is  true  of  a  gust  from 
behind  which  diminishes  the  downward  pressure  normally 
exerted  on  the  tail  plane.  If  the  gust  is  a  downward  one 
to  a  marked  extent,  it  will  tend  to  stall  the  machine,  which, 
again,  is  as  it  should  be.  In  every  case  the  rotary  effect  of 
the  gust  is  favourable. 

The  use  of  a  negative  tail  plane,  which  has  already  been 
seen  to  be  excellent  in  regard  to  stability  hi  still  air,  is 
therefore  equally  beneficial  in  disturbed  air.  Nor  should 
this  cause  surprise. 

Previously  it  was  shown  that  the  presence  of  a  plane 
normally  acting  in  front  of  the  centre  of  gravity  was 
productive  of  longitudinal  instability,  since  it  really  acted 
as  a  reversed  and  overhung  weathercock.  It  is  quite  clear 
that  if  a  gust  strikes  such  a  plane  first,  it  will  tend,  being 
a  bad  weathercock,  to  be  displaced  still  further  and  thereby 
become  still  more  exposed  to  the  disturbing  action  of 
the  gust. 

On  the  other  hand,  if  both  the  main  plane  and  the  tail 
act  behind  the  centre  of  gravity,  where  they  combine  to 
procure  for  the  machine  an  excellent  degree  of  longitudinal 
stability  in  still  air,  they  will  constitute  a  good  weather- 
cock which  will  always  float  in  a  head  gust  so  that  the 
upsetting  action  vanishes,*  and  the  aeroplane  itself  absorbs 
the  gust.  In  so  far  as  gusts  from  behind  are  concerned, 

*  Earlier,  it  was  stated  (see  p.  170)  that  longitudinally  an  aeroplane 
must  necessarily  always  be  a  bad  weathercock,  but  some  distinction  of 
quality  still  remains  and,  so  far  as  the  effects  of  wind  are  concerned,  an 
aeroplane  should  belong  to  a  "  good  variety  of  bad  weathercocks." 


198  FLIGHT  WITHOUT  FORMULA 

this  arrangement  is  again  productive  of  good  stability 
since  the  rotary  effect  due  to  the  gust  brings  about  the 
very  manoeuvre  which  the  pilot  would  have  otherwise  to 
perform  in  order  to  correct  the  displacement  effect. 

These  rotary  effects  have  an  intensity  and  duration 
depending  on  the  moment  of  longitudinal  inertia  of  the 
machine.  The  science  of  mechanics  proves  that  a  definite 
amount  of  disturbing  energy  applied  to  aeroplanes  possess- 
ing the  same  degree  of  longitudinal  stability  *  gives  them 
an  identical  angular  displacement  irrespective  of  their 
moment  of  inertia.  The  latter  only  affects  the  duration 
of  the  displacement.  The  greater  the  moment  of  inertia, 
the  slower  does  the  oscillation  come  about. 

Nevertheless,  it  should  be  remembered  that  a  force, 
however  great,  can  only  put  forth  an  amount  of  energy 
proportional  to  the  displacement  produced.! 

Hence,  if  the  gust  is  only  a  brief  one,  the  disturbing 
energy  applied  to  the  aeroplane  and  the  ensuing  angular 
displacement  will  be  all  the  smaller  the  more  reluctantly 
the  aeroplane  yields  to  the  gust.  Wherefore,  there  is  a 
distinct  advantage  to  be  derived  from  increasing  the 
longitudinal  moment  of  inertia. 

But,  if  the  gust  lasts  some  considerable  time,  this  ad- 
vantage disappears  and  the  great  moment  of  inertia  has 
the  effect  of  prolonging  the  disturbing  impulse.  Besides, 
it  may  happen  that  two  gusts  follow  one  another  at  a 
brief  interval  and  that  the  second,  which  would  encounter 
an  aeroplane  with  little  inertia  already  re-established  in 
a  position  of  equilibrium,  would  strike  a  machine  heavily 
loaded  fore  and  aft  before  it  had  recovered,  or  even  when 
it  was  still  under  the  influence  of  the  first  gust. 

*  In  Chapter  VI.  it  was  shown  that  the  longitudinal  stability  of  an 
aeroplane  can  be  represented  by  the  length  of  a  pendulum  arm  weighted 
at  the  end  with  the  weight  of  the  aeroplane. 

f  If  a  pony  is  harnessed  to  a  heavy  wagon,  it  will  be  unable  to  move 
it ;  its  force  will  be  wasted,  since  it  will  produce  no  energy.  But  if  it 
is  harnessed  to,  a  light  cart,  its  force,  though  smaller  than  that  put  forth 
in  the  former  case,  will  produce  useful  energy. 


THE  EFFECT  OF  WIND   ON  AEROPLANES         199 

Moreover,  for  the  same  reason,  the  first  machine  would 
more  readily  answer  its  controls  and  would  respond  more 
perfectly  to  the  wishes  of  most  pilots,  who  desire,  above 
all,  a  controllable  aeroplane. 

It  should  be  noted  that,  in  so  far  as  rotary  effects  are 
concerned,  it  is  desirable  that  gusts  should  clear  an  aeroplane 
as  quickly  as  possible,  and,  for  this  reason,  it  should  be 
fairly  short  fore  and  aft,  after  the  example  of  birds  who 
fly  particularly  well. 

The  negative-angle  tail  complies  well  with  this  require- 
ment and  also  compensates  the  lessening  of  the  lever  arm  of 
the  tail  plane  which  ensues  through  its  important  increase 
in  stability  due  to  the  increase  in  the  longitudinal  V- 

Moreover,  by  bringing  the  main  and  tail  planes  closer 
together,  the  longitudinal  moment  of  inertia  is  reduced, 
whereby  the  machine  is  rendered  more  responsive  to  its 
controls. 

For  these  reasons,  the  author  is  of  opinion  that  the 
present  type  of  aeroplane  with  its  tail  far  outstretched 
will  give  way  to  a  machine  at  once  much  shorter,  more 
compact,  and  easier  to  control.* 

Summarising  our  conclusions,  we  find  that : 

(1)  In  regard  to  the  relative  action  of  gusts,  which  are 
the  main  cause  of  loss  of  equilibrium,  an  aeroplane  should 
be  as  light  as  possible,  so  as  to  be  able  to  yield  in  the  greatest 
possible  measure  to  the  displacement  effect  of  gusts,  which 
reduces  their  relative  effect.  This  conclusion  is  clearly 
open  to  question,  and  may  be  opposed  by  the  illustration 
that  large  ships  have  less  to  fear  from  a  storm  than  small 
boats.  But  the  comparison  is  not  exact,  for  the  simple 
reason  that  boats  are  supported  by  static  means,  whereas 
aeroplanes  are  upheld  in  the  air  dynamically. 

*  Not  that  it  will  be  possible  to  suppress  the  tail  entirely,  as  some 
have  attempted  to  do.  Oscillatory  stability  (see  Chapter  VII.)  would 
suffer  if  this  were  done,  and  the  braking  effect  would  disappear.  Besides, 
Nature  would  have  made  tailless  birds,  could  these  have  dispensed  with 
their  tails. 


200  FLIGHT  WITHOUT  FORMULA 

(2)  Regarding  its  behaviour  in  a  wind,  an  aeroplane 
should  : 

(a)  possess  high  speed,  with  the  proviso  that  its  speed 
should  not  be  obtained  by  reducing  its  lift  co- 
efficient, so  that  any  increase  in  speed  should 
be  achieved  rather  by  reducing  the  area  than 
the  lift  coefficient ; 
(6)  be  naturally  stable  longitudinally  ; 

(c)  have  a  small  longitudinal  moment  of  inertia  ; 

(d)  be  short  in  the  fore-and-aft  dimension  ; 

(e)  be  so  designed  that  any  initial  displacement  due 

to  a  gust  causes  it  to  turn  head  to  the  gust 
instead  of  exposing  it  still  further  to  its  dis- 
turbing effect. 

The  negative  tail  arrangement  seems  to  answer  the 
most  perfectly  to  (6),  (c),  (d),  and  (e). 

It  has  often  been  stated  that  those  provisions  ensuring 
stability  in  still  air  were  harmful  to  stability  in  disturbed 
air.  If  this  were  true,  the  future  of  aviation  would  indeed 
be  black.  Fortunately  it  is  erroneous,  even  though  practice 
has  borne  it  out  hitherto  with  few  exceptions. 

It  has  been  attempted,  as  in  the  case  of  the  brothers 
Wright,  to  overcome  this  difficulty  by  only  providing  the 
minimum  degree  of  stability  essential  to  the  correct  be- 
haviour of  a  machine  in  still  air,  leaving  the  pilot  to  make 
the  necessary  corrections  to  counteract  the  disturbing 
effects  of  the  wind  by  giving  him  exceptionally  powerful 
means  of  control. 

The  slight  degree  of  natural  stability  possessed  by  such 
an  aeroplane  renders  it  most  responsive  to  its  controls — a 
feature  agreeable  to  the  majority  of  pilots.  On  the  other 
hand,  by  actuating  the  control  a  pilot  may  unduly  modify, 
even  to  a  dangerous  extent,  the  normal  state  of  equilibrium. 
More  especially  is  this  true  of  longitudinal  equilibrium, 
for  here,  as  has  been  shown,  a  slight  degree  of  stability 
may  change  into  actual  instability — for  instance,  by  putting 
the  elevator  down  too  far.  This  is  due  (as  explained  in 


THE  EFFECT  OF  WIND  ON  AEROPLANES         201 

Chapters  VI.  and  VII.)  to  the  fact  that  the  sheaf  of  total 
pressures  of  the  aeroplane  is  thereby  altered,  with  the  result 
that  the  longitudinal  V  is  diminished,  and  consequently 
the  diminution  of  the  angle  of  incidence,  instead  of  increas- 
ing stability,  as  in  the  case  of  advancing  the  centre  of 
gravity,  would  bring  it  down  to  vanishing-point. 

Aeroplanes  which  display  a  tendency  towards  uncontrol- 
lable dives,  are  simply  momentarily  unstable  longitudinally 
and  refuse  to  answer  the  pilot's  controls  because,  owing 
to  their  acceleration,  their  dive  soon  becomes  a  headlong 
fall,  so  that  the  precarious  degree  of  stability  which  they 
possessed  in  normal  flight  has  disappeared.  In  such  a  case 
it  would  be  incorrect  to  say  that  an  increase  of  speed 
augments  stability,  for,  on  the  contrary,  when  the  speed 
passes  a  certain  limit  termed  the  "  critical  speed  "  (in  the 
author's  opinion,  this  term  is  not  correct,  since  a  well- 
designed  aeroplane  should  have  no  critical  speed),  all  stability 
vanishes. 

An  aeroplane  should  always  be  so  designed  as  to  be 
naturally  stable  in  still  air,  and  at  the  same  time  every 
effort  should  be  made  to  arrange  its  structure  so  as  to 
render  it  stable  also  in  disturbed  air. 

It  has  already  been  shown  that  it  seems  possible,  in 
regard  to  longitudinal  stability,  to  achieve  this  result  with- 
out sacrificing  controllability,  which  would  appear  to  be 
dependent,  above  all,  on  a  small  moment  of  inertia. 

Whether  the  negative  tail  arrangement,  previously  re- 
ferred to,  or  some  other  similar  device  should  prove  the 
better  in  the  long  run,  this  for  the  time  being  is  the  right 
road  along  which  to  make  endeavours  and  to  try  to  reduce 
to  the  lowest  possible  degree  the  intervention  of  the  pilot 
in  controlling  the  stability  of  an  aeroplane.  The  whole 
future  of  aviation  is  bound  up  in  the  solution  of  this  problem. 
An  aeroplane  should  be  able  to  fly  in  the  worst  weather 
without  demanding  from  its  pilot  an  incessant,  tiring,  and 
often  dangerous  struggle  against  the  elements.  Not  until 
this  is  achieved  will  aviation  cease  to  be  the  sport  of  the 


202  FLIGHT  WITHOUT  FORMULA 

few  and  become  a  speedy  and  practical,  and  above  all,  safe, 
means  of  locomotion. 

It  has  ere  now  been  sought  to  reduce  the  necessity  for 
constant  control  on  the  part  of  the  pilot  by  rendering 
aeroplanes  automatically  stable.  The  problem  is  an  un- 
usually complex  one,  for  automatic  stability  devices  are 
required  to  correct  not  only  the  effects  of  gusts  that  come 
from  without,  but  faults  that  arise  from  within  the  aero- 
plane itself,  such  as  a  loss  of  power,  motor  failure,  mis- 
takes in  piloting,  etc. 

This  being  so,  if  a  device  of  this  nature  fulfils  one  part' 
of  its  required  functions,  almost  inevitably  it  will  fail  in 
others,  and  this  is  the  rock  against  which  all  attempts  so 
far  made  have  been  shattered.  Not  that  the  difficulty 
cannot  be  overcome,  but  it  is  undoubtedly  a  grave  one. 

Hitherto  such  attempts  at  solution  as  have  been  made 
have  usually  related  to  longitudinal  stability.  Among  such 
devices  may  be  mentioned  the  ingenious  invention  of 
M.  Doutre,  who  utilised  the  effects  of  inertia  exerted  on 
weights  to  actuate,  at  any  change  of  air  speed,  the  elevator 
through  the  intermediary  of  a  servo-motor. 

Even  now  some  lessons  may  be  drawn  from  previous 
attempts.  More  especially  would  it  seem  desirable  to 
prevent  the  effects  of  gusts  rather  than  to  correct  them 
once  they  have  been  produced.  The  use  of  "  antenna  "  or 
"  feelers  " — that  is,  of  some  kind  of  organ  instantaneously 
yielding  to  aerial  disturbances  and  thus  preparing,  through 
the  intermediary  of  the  requisite  controls,  an  aeroplane  to 
meet  the  gust — would  seem  preferable  to  organs  which  only 
right  it  once  it  has  assumed  an  inclined  position  after 
having  been  struck  by  the  gust. 

Important  results,  in  this  respect,  also  appear  to  have 
been  obtained  by  M.  Moreau,  who  seems  to  have  succeeded 
in  applying  the  principle  of  the  pendulum  to  produce  a 
self-righting  device. 

In  addition  it  has  been  sought  to  ensure  automatic 
stability  by  constantly  maintaining  the  air  speed  of  an 


THE  EFFECT  OF  WIND  ON  AEROPLANES         203 

aeroplane.  But  it  has  already  been  shown  that  this  is 
inadequate  in  certain  circumstances,  more  especially  if  the 
aeroplane  has  a  small  lift  coefficient,  which  is  the  case  with 
machines  of  large  wing  area,  and  the  lift  often  decreases 
to  a  far  greater  extent  as  the  result  of  a  decrease  hi  the 
relative  incidence  than  in  the  speed.  Hence,  not  only  the 
relative  speed,  but  the  relative  incidence  should  be  preserved. 

In  regard  to  the  effects  of  wind  alone,  therefore,  the 
problem  is  already  complicated  enough  ;  but  it  becomes 
even  more  complex  if  disturbances  due  to  the  machine 
itself  are  taken  into  consideration. 

Without  the  slightest  wish  to  deny  the  great  importance 
of  the  problem,  the  author,  nevertheless,  reiterates  his 
opinion  that  the  first  necessity  is  to  so  design  the  structure 
of  an  aeroplane  as  to  render  it  immune  from  dangers  through 
wind.  Later,  an  automatic  stability  device  could  be 
added  in  order  to  correct  in  just  proportion  the  effects  of 
gusts  and  further  to  correct  disturbances  due  to  the  machine 
itself.  If  this  were  done,  the  functions  of  automatic  stability 
devices  would  be  greatly  simplified. 

In  addition,  it  should  not  be  forgotten  that  by  adding  to 
an  aeroplane  further  moving  organs  which  are  consequently 
subject  to  lagging  and  even  to  breakdowns,  an  element  of 
danger  is  created.  In  any  event,  any  such  device  must 
perforce  constitute  a  complication.* 

Until  now  only  those  gusts  have  been  considered  which 
blow  in  the  plane  of  symmetry  of  the  aeroplane — straight 
gusts  which  only  affect  the  flying  and  longitudinal  equili- 

*  Virtually,  this  stricture,  while  perfectly  correct  in  itself,  only  applies 
to  such  extraneous  stability  devices  as  those  of  Doutre  and  Moreau,  and 
not  to  the  automatic  stability  inherent  in  the  forms  of  the  aeroplane 
itself  which  has  been  produced  by  J.  W.  Dunne.  This  latter  possesses 
automatic  stability  in  both  senses,  and  in  principle  is  based  on  the  auto- 
matic maintenance  of  air  speed  without  the  pilot's  intervention.  In 
this  respect  it  undoubtedly  constitutes  one  of  the  greatest  advances  yet 
made  in  aviation,  though  opinions  may  well  differ  on  the  point  whether 
it  is  desirable  to  rob  the  pilot  of  control  in  order  to  confide  it  to  automatic 
mechanism. — TRANSLATOR. 


204 


FLIGHT  WITHOUT  FORMULA 


brium  of  the  machine.  Let  us  now  examine  the  effect 
of  side-gusts.  By  doing  so,  we  shall  have  considered 
the  effect  of  almost  every  variety  of  aerial  disturbance, 
which  can  in  most  cases  be  resolved  into  an  action  directed 
in  the  plane  of  symmetry  of  the  aeroplane  and  into  one 
acting  laterally. 

In  this  case  again  we  distinguish  a  primary  effect  and  a 
relative  effect. 

If  the  aeroplane  had  no  inertia,  it  would  immediately  be 


FIG.  84. 

carried  away  by  the  gust  together  with  the  mass  of  sup- 
porting air,  and  this  movement  would  not  be  perceptible 
to  the  pilot  except  by  observing  the  ground  beneath.  But 
this  is  a  purely  hypothetical  case,  and  the  gust  exerts 
a  relative  action  on  the  machine,  which  is  the  more  pro- 
nounced the  greater  the  mass  of  the  latter. 

This  action  is  perceptible  by  a  modification  in  the 
direction  and  speed  of  the  relative  wind.  For,  if  the 
aeroplane  were  flying  in  still  air,  thereby  encountering  a 
relative  wind  GA  (fig.  84),  and  were  struck  by  a  lateral 
gust  whose  action  is  represented  by  the  speed  GB,  the 
relative  speed  of  the  machine  becomes  GC.  Both  the 


THE  EFFECT  OF  WIND  ON  AEROPLANES         205 

magnitude  and  direction  of  the  speed  have,  consequently, 
altered. 

The  fact  of  the  relative  speed  varying  in  magnitude 
shows  that,  apart  from  effects  due  to  its  dissymmetrical 
position,  the  relative  action  of  a  side-gust  must  exert  on 
the  flying  and  longitudinal  equilibrium  an  influence  similar 
to  that  produced  by  the  straight  gusts  already  considered. 

A  lateral  gust,  therefore,  can  cause  an  aeroplane  to  rise  or 
fall  at  the  same  tune  that  it  disturbs  its  longitudinal  equili- 
brium. But  for  the  sake  of  simplicity  this  part  of  the 
effects  of  side-gusts  may  be  ignored,  and  only  those  effects 
need  be  taken  into  account  which  modify  the  direction 
of  flight,  and  lateral  and  directional  stability. 

First,  the  displacement  effect  due  to  the  relative  action  of 
a  side-gust  consists  in  creating  a  centripetal  force  tending 
to  curve  the  flight-path  and  to  produce  a  turn  in  the  direction 
opposite  to  that  from  which  the  gust  comes. 

Among  the  rotary  effects,  as  in  the  case  of  straight  gusts, 
that  particular  one  should  first  be  distinguished  which 
causes  an  aeroplane,  in  regard  to  directional  equilibrium, 
to  adhere  to  its  flight-path — or,  in  other  words,  to  behave 
like  a  good  weathercock. 

If  the  flight -path  curves,  as  the  result  of  the  displacement 
effect  of  a  gust,  in  the  opposite  direction  to  that  from  which 
the  gust  comes,  the  rotary  effect  which  will  tend  to  make 
the  aeroplane  adhere  to  its  new  flight-path  will  cause  it  to 
be  exposed  still  further  to  the  disturbing  effect  of  the  gust. 
It  will  turn  away  from  the  wind.  So  far  as  this  point  is 
concerned,  it  would  seem  desirable  that  an  aeroplane  should 
take  up  its  new  flight-path — as  slowly  as  possible. 

But  a  second  rotary  effect  causes  the  aeroplane  to  assume 
the  new  direction  of  the  relative  wind,  like  a  good  weather- 
cock, and  this  is  an  advantage,  since,  by  heading  into  the 
wind,  the  lateral  disturbing  effect  of  the  gust  is  damped  out. 

Of  these  two  rotary  effects  the  second  is  probably  the 
first  to  occur  and  to  remain  the  more  intense. 

In  order  to  reduce  the  first  rotary  effect,  the  lateral 


206  FLIGHT  WITHOUT  FORMULA 

resistance  of  the  aeroplane — that  is,  its  keel  surface — should 
not  exceed  certain  proportions.  Moreover,  the  directional 
stability  should  also  be  reduced  to  a  minimum  from  this 
point  of  view  ;  the  second  and  more  important  rotary  effect, 
on  the  other  hand,  points  to  an  increase  in  directional 
stability  as  desirable. 

Both  theories  have  their  friends  and  foes,  and  here  again 
the  view  has  been  advanced  that  the  aeroplane  should  be 
given  only  that  measure  of  stability  which  is  strictly 
necessary  in  order  to  prevent  it  from  yielding  too  easily 
to  the  rotary  effects  of  gusts  and  to  render  it  easily 
controllable.  Such  a  reduction  in  directional  stability 
is  not  so  detrimental  as  a  diminution  of  longitudinal 
stability,  since  it  in  no  way  affects  the  cardinal  principles 
of  sustentation. 

Nevertheless,  in  the  author's  opinion  a  definite  degree  of 
directional  stability  is  desirable,  since  this  would  also 
produce  some  amount  of  lateral  stability  which  is  always 
somewhat  defective.  In  any  case,  usually  the  structure  of 
the  aeroplane  and  the  rudder  in  the  rear  suffice  for  the 
purpose. 

There  remain  the  most  important  rotary  effects  due  to 
side-gusts — those  which  affect  lateral  stability. 

Any  modification  in  the  direction  of  the  relative  wind 
results  in  a  lateral  displacement  of  the  normal  pressure  on 
the  main  planes,  which  causes  a  couple  tending  to  tilt  the 
aeroplane  sideways.  If  that  wing  which  is  struck  by  the 
gust  rises,  the  aeroplane  will  turn  into  the  opposite  direction, 
thus  turning  away  from  the  wind,  and  thereby,  as  already 
seen,  exposes  itself  still  further  to  the  disturbing  effect  of 
the  gust. 

But  if  the  wing  struck  by  the  gust  falls,  the  aeroplane 
swings  round,  heading  into  the  wind,  which  damps  out  the 
disturbing  effect.  These  movements  are  intensified  by 
reason  of  the  gust  not  striking  both  wings  at  once. 

According  to  the  principle  already  cited,  the  initial 
displacement  due  to  a  gust  should  cause  an  aeroplane  to 


THE  EFFECT  OF  WIND   ON  AEROPLANES         207 

turn  into  the  wind  instead  of  causing  it  to  become  exposed 
to  the  disturbing  influence  still  further,  which  renders  the 
second  rotary  effect  the  more  favourable. 

If  the  wings  are  straight  and,  still  more,  if  they  have  a 
lateral  dihedral  or  V,  the  first  effect  is  produced.  Hence 
a  lateral  dihedral  seems  unfavourable  in  disturbed  air. 
Besides,  it  is  fast  disappearing,  and  pilots  of  such  machines 
are  obliged  to  counteract  the  effects  of  gusts  by  lowering 
the  wing  struck  first — that  is,  of  momentarily  suppressing, 
as  far  as  is  in  their  power,  the  lateral  dihedral,  while  swinging 
round  into  the  wind. 

On  the  other  hand,  if  the  wings  have  an  invertefl  dihedral 
or  A>  the  rotary  effect  of  a  side-gust  will  be  the  second 
and  desirable  effect ;  the  aeroplane  will  turn  into  the 
wind  of  its  own  accord,  which  will  cause  the  disturbing 
effect  to  disappear. 

Captain  Ferber  from  the  very  first  pointed  out  this  fact 
and  remarked  that  sea-birds  only  succeeded  in  gliding  in 
a  gale  because  they  placed  their  wings  so  as  to  form  an 
inverted  dihedral  angle.  But  he  also  thought  that  these 
birds  could  only  assume  this  attitude,  believed  by  him  to 
be  unstable,  by  constant  balancing.  In  Chapters  VIII.  and 
IX.  it  was  shown  that  it  is  possible,  by  lower  ing  the  rolling 
axis  of  an  aeroplane  in  front  (by  lowering  the  centre  of 
gravity,  or  better,  by  raising  the  tail),  to  build  machines 
with  wings  forming  a  downward  dihedral  and  nevertheless 
stable  in  still  air.* 

In  regard  to  lateral  stability,  as  with  longitudinal,  the 
natural  stability  of  an  aeroplane  and  good  behaviour  in  a 
wind  are,  contrary  to  general  opinion,  in  no  wise  incom- 
patible, and  both  these  important  qualities  can  be  obtained 
in  one  and  the  same  machine  by  a  suitable  arrangement  of 
its  parts. 

*  As  previously  mentioned,  the  "  Tubavion  "  monoplane  has  flown 
with  its  wings  so  arranged,  and  the  pilot  is  stated  to  have  noted  a  great 
improvement  in  its  behaviour  in  winds.  This  machine  had  a  low  centre 
of  gravity  and  a  high  tail. 


208  FLIGHT  WITHOUT  FORMULA 

Attempts  to  produce  automatic  lateral  stabilisers  have 
hitherto  not  given  very  good  results.* 

So  far  as  the  moment  of  rolling  inertia  is  concerned, 
previous  considerations  point  to  the  desirability  of  reducing 
this  as  much  as  possible  by  the  concentration  of  masses. 
The  machine  is  thus  rendered  easily  controllable,  and  the 
rapidity  of  its  oscillations  guards  against  the  danger  aris- 
ing from  too  quick  a  succession  of  two  gusts.  This  is 
of  exceptional  importance  from  the  point  of  view  of  lateral 
stability,  which  we  know  to  be  the  least  effective  of  all  or, 
at  any  rate,  the  most  difficult  to  obtain  in  any  marked 


Summarising  these  conclusions,  it  may  be  stated,  that 
for  good  behaviour  in  winds,  an  aeroplane  should  : 

(1)  be  light,  thus  yielding  more  readily  to  the  primary 

effect  of  gusts,  whereby  it  is  not  so  much  affected  by 
their  relative  action  ;  only  if  this  relative  action 
could  be  wholly  eliminated  would  an  increase  in  the 
weight  become  an  advantage  ; 

(2)  fly  normally  at  high  speed,  provided  that  an  increase 

in  speed  be  not  obtained  by  unduly  reducing  the  lift 
coefficient ; 

(3)  be  naturally  stable  both  longitudinally  and  laterally  ; 

(4)  have  a  small  moment  of  inertia  and  its  masses  con- 

centrated ; 

(5)  head  into  the  wind  instead  of  turning  away  from  it. 
The  fulfilment  of  the  last  condition  is  the  most  likely  to 

produce  the  best  results  in  regard  to  the  behaviour  of  an 
aeroplane  in  a  wind,  and  this  has  been  shown  to  be  in 
no  way  incompatible  with  excellent  stability  in  still  air 
and  adequate  controllability.  The  arrangement  proposed 
by  the  author — a  negative-angle  tail  and  a  downward 

*  This  is  hardly  correct  so  far  as  the  Dunne  aeroplane  is  concerned, 
which  is  automatically  stable  in  a  wind.  This  machine,  it  should  be 
noted,  has  in  effect  a  downward  dihedral  and  a  comparatively  low  centre 
of  gravity,  coupled  with  a  relatively  high  tail  which  is  constituted  by  the 
wing-tips. — TRANSLATOR. 


THE   EFFECT  OF  WIND   ON  AEROPLANES         209 

dihedral* — is  not  perhaps  that  which  careful  experiment 
methodically  pursued  would  finally  cause  to  be  adopted  ; 
but  at  any  rate  it  provides  a  good  starting-point. 

What  is  required  first  of  all  is  to  so  design  the  structure 
itself  of  the  aeroplane  as  to  render  it  immune  to  danger 
from  gusts.  The  future  of  aviation  depends  upon  this  to 
a  large  extent,  and  it  is  for  this  reason  that  attention  has 
been  drawn  to  it  with  such  insistence  in  these  pages,  for 
in  this  respect  much,  if  not  almost  all,  remains  to  be  done. 

Afterwards,  may  come  the  study  of  movable  organs 
producing  automatic  stability,  and  in  all  probability  this 
study  will  have  been  greatly  simplified  if  the  first  essential 
condition  has  been  complied  with. 

Who  knows  whether  one  day  we  shall  not  learn  how  to 
impress  into  our  service,  like  the  birds,  that  very  internal 
work  of  the  wind  which  now  constitutes  a  source  of  danger 
and  difficulty  ?  Some  species  of  birds  appear  to  know 
the  secret  of  how  to  utilise  the  external  energy  of  the 
movements  of  the  atmosphere  and  to  remain  aloft  hi  the 
air  for  hours  at  a  time  without  expending  the  slightest 
muscular  effort. 

It  is  certain  that  for  this  purpose  they  make  use  of  ascend- 
ing currents,  but  it  is  difficult  to  believe  that  these  currents 
are  sufficiently  permanent  to  explain  the  mode  of  soaring 
flight  alluded  to. 

More  probable  is  it  that  birds  which  practise  soaring  flight 
— be  it  noted  that  they  are  all  large  birds,  and  consequently 
possessing  considerable  inertia — meeting  a  head  gust,  give 
their  wings  a  large  angle  of  incidence  and  thus  rise  upon 
the  gust,  and  then  glide  down  at  a  very  flat  angle  in  the 
ensuing  lull. 

Even  in  our  latitudes  certain  big  birds  of  prey,  such  as 
the  buzzard,  rise  up  into  the  air  continuously,  without  any 
motion  of  then-  wings,  but  always  circling,  when  the  wind 

*  This  arrangement  was  first  proposed  by  the  author  in  a  paper  con- 
tributed to  the  Academic  des  Sciences  on  March  25,  1911  (Comples  Bendus, 
voL  clii.  p.  1295). 

14 


210  FLIGHT  WITHOUT  FORMULAE 

is  strong  enough.  This  circling  appears  essential,  and  may 
possibly  be  explained  on  the  supposition  that  the  circling 
speed  is  in  some  way  connected  with  the  rhythmic  wave- 
like  pulsations  of  the  atmosphere  in  such  a  fashion  that 
these  pulsations,  whether  increasing  or  diminishing,  are 
always  met  by  the  bird  as  increasing  pulsations,  and  on 
this  account  it  circles. 

It  appears  in  no  way  impossible  that  we  should  one  day 
be  able  to  imitate  the  birds  and  to  remain,  without  expend- 
ing power,  in  the  air  on  such  days  when  the  intensity  of 
atmospheric  movements,  an  inexhaustible  supply  of  power, 
is  sufficient  for  the  purpose. 

One  thing  is  to  be  remembered  :  wind,  and  probably 
irregular  wind,  is  absolutely  essential  to  enable  such  flight 
to  be  possible  ;  it  would  be  an  idle  dream  to  hope  to  over- 
come the  never-failing  force  of  gravity  without  calling 
into  play  some  external  forces  of  energy,  and  on  those 
days  when  this  energy  could  not  be  derived  from  the  wind, 
it  would  have  to  be  supplied  by  the  motor. 

But  in  any  event  this  stage  has  not  yet  been  reached, 
and  before  we  attempt  to  harness  the  movements  of  the 
atmosphere  they  must  no  longer  give  cause  for  fear.  To 
this  end  the  aerial  engineer  must  direct  all  his  efforts  for 
the  present. 

The  really  high-speed  aeroplane  forms  one  solution,  even 
though  probably  not  the  best,  since  such  machines  must 
always  remain  dangerous  in  proximity  to  the  surface  of 
the  earth.* 

Without  a  doubt,  a  more  perfect  solution  awaits  us  some- 
where, and  the  future  will  surely  bring  it  forth  into  the 
light.  On  that  day  the  aeroplane  will  become  a  practical 
means  of  locomotion. 

Let  the  wish  that  this  day  may  come  soon  conclude  this 

*  Slowing  up  preparatory  to  alighting  forms  no  solution  to  the  difficulty, 
since  the  machine  would  lose  those  very  advantages,  conferred  by  its 
high  speed,  precisely  at  the  moment  when  these  were  most  needed,  in  the 
disturbed  lower  air. 


THE  EFFECT  OF  WIND  ON  AEROPLANES         211 

work.  Every  effort  has  been  made  to  render  the  chapters 
that  have  gone  before  as  simple  and  as  attractive  as  the 
subject,  often  it  is  to  be  feared  somewhat  dry,  permitted. 

Not  a  single  formula  has  been  resorted  to,  and  if  the 
author  has  succeeded  in  his  task  of  rendering  the  under- 
standing of  his  work  possible  with  the  simple  aid  of  such 
knowledge  as  is  acquired  at  school,  this  is  mainly  due  to 
the  distinguished  research  work  which  has  lately  furnished 
aeronautical  science  with  a  mass  of  valuable  facts  :  to  the 
work  of  M.  Eiffel,  to  which  reference  has  so  often  been 
made  in  the  foregoing  pages. 

No  more  fitting  conclusion  to  these  chapters  could  there- 
fore be  devised  than  this  slight  tribute  to  the  indefatigable 
zeal  and  the  distinguished  labours  of  this  great  scientific 
worker  who  has  rendered  this  book  possible. 


Printed  by  T.  and  A.  CONSTABLE,  Printers  to  His  Majesty 
at  the  Edinburgh  University  Press,  Scotland 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY 

Los  Angeles 
This  book  is  DUE  on  the  last  date  stamped  below. 


,A<£ 


COt  QBi 

JljL.  26^68 


*" 


NOV  17*969 


Form  L9-32m-8,'57(.C8680s4)444 


AA    001036939    5 


•II  nit 

1158  00905  5™